diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77259-0.txt | 5434 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77259-h/77259-h.htm | 7719 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77259-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 0 -> 130824 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77259-h/images/i_023a.jpg | bin | 0 -> 143951 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77259-h/images/i_097a.jpg | bin | 0 -> 132658 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77259-h/images/i_127a.jpg | bin | 0 -> 120074 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77259-h/images/i_195a.jpg | bin | 0 -> 116444 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77259-h/images/i_225a.jpg | bin | 0 -> 117630 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77259-h/images/i_frontis.jpg | bin | 0 -> 90702 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77259-h/images/i_title.jpg | bin | 0 -> 59250 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77259-h/images/small.jpg | bin | 0 -> 17227 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
14 files changed, 13169 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/77259-0.txt b/77259-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..172e7c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/77259-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,5434 @@ +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 77259 *** + + +Transcriber’s notes + +Changes made are noted at the end of the book. + + +[Illustration: LANDING AT BEN NEVIS.] + + +[Illustration] + + THE + + FLORENCE STORIES, + + BY JACOB ABBOTT. + + EXCURSION TO THE ORKNEY ISLANDS. + + NEW YORK: + SHELDON & COMPANY, + 115 NASSAU STREET. + + 1861. + + +Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1860, by +SHELDON & COMPANY, +In the Clerk’s Office of the District Court of the United States for the +Southern District of New York. + + +STEREOTYPED BY +Smith & McDougal. +82 & 84 Beekman-st. + +PRINTED BY +C. A. Alvord. +15 Vandewater-st. + + +ENGRAVINGS. + +I. LANDING AT BEN NEVIS _Frontispiece_ + +II. CHOOSING THE STATE ROOMS 23 + +III. VISIT TO THE ORKNEY ISLANDS 97 + +IV. ON BOARD THE IONA 127 + +V. CROSSING THE MICKLE FERRY 195 + +VI. THE BLACK CRAIGS 225 + + + + +CONTENTS. + + +CHAPTER PAGE + +I. Letter from Singapore 11 + +II. Taking Passage 15 + +III. Preparations 21 + +IV. The Letter of Credit 36 + +V. The Embarkation 51 + +VI. Life on board Ship 61 + +VII. Morning in Liverpool 80 + +VIII. Plans Formed 87 + +IX. The Railway Ride 107 + +X. The Highland Glens 122 + +XI. Ben Nevis 135 + +XII. The Caledonian Canal 153 + +XIII. The Vitrified Fort 172 + +XIV. Night Ride by Daylight 188 + +XV. The Prince Consort 200 + +XVI. Kirkwall 212 + +XVII. The Stones of Stennis 222 + +XVIII. The Embarkation 234 + +XIX. Conclusion 249 + + + + +THE ORKNEY ISLANDS. + + + + +CHAPTER I. + +LETTER FROM SINGAPORE. + + +On one occasion, when Mrs. Morelle went down to New York with Grimkie +and her two children Florence and John, while her husband was in the +East Indies, she heard that a letter had arrived from him that very +day, and that it had just been sent to the post-office in order to be +conveyed to her at her house up the North River. The letter, she was +told, came from Singapore. + +Singapore is a large English port situated just about half way round +the world from America, on the way to the East Indies. It is a sort of +center and rendezvous for all ships navigating those seas, and letters +go and come to and from it in all directions. + +It is often visited, moreover, by ships of war, cruising in those seas. + +Grimkie went down to New York with his aunt and cousins, on this +occasion, because it was holiday at his school at the Chateau. Every +Saturday was holiday at the Chateau. + +His aunt and also his cousins were always very glad to have him go to +New York with them when they went, but he never left his school to go +on such excursions, except upon the regular holidays. + +Mrs. Morelle would have been very impatient to reach home if she had +supposed that her husband’s letter would arrive there before she did. +But she knew very well that the mail from New York did not get in till +about eight o’clock, and that the letter would not be brought up to +the Octagon until about half-past eight. She was, therefore, not in +any special haste to reach the end of the voyage, but amused herself +talking with the children very quietly and contentedly all the way. + +The steamboat arrived between four and five. Grimkie obtained a +carriage at the pier, and, after assisting Mrs. Morelle and the +children to get into it, he bade them good-by, and turned his own steps +toward the Chateau. + +At half-past eight o’clock the letter came. Mrs. Morelle, who had been +watching for the coming of the boy who brought the mail, took the +letter from him at the door, and went at once into her little room to +read it. It was as follows: + + Singapore, August 16. + + “My very dear wife: + + “I have just arrived at this port from Calcutta, on my way to Canton, + and in consequence of letters which I have received here I find that + next summer I shall have occasion to go to London. I hope to reach + there about the first of September. + + “Now I have a plan to propose to you, though I do not know what you + will think of it. It is no less than this—that you should take the + children and come out to England and meet me. I shall be able to spend + four or five weeks in England, and then I must return to Canton again. + I might come to America in that time to see you, instead of asking you + to cross the Atlantic to see me, but if I were to do so, the voyage + would occupy nearly all the time that I should have to spare, and thus + leave me only a very few days to spend in your company; whereas, if + you come to London, I can enjoy the pleasure of being with you and the + children a whole month. + + “Besides, I think it might perhaps be agreeable to you, and also + improving to the children, to make a little tour in England and + France. The facilities for travelling are such now that I think you will have + no difficulty in coming out alone. If you approve of this plan, I + would recommend to you to cross early in June, and spend a little time + in rambling about England before I come. By sending your address to + my bankers from time to time, I could come to you immediately on my + arrival. Let me know what you think of this plan. + + “The overland mail is just closing, so I can not write any more at + this time, I shall, however, write you again very soon, and in the + meantime I am your very affectionate husband.” + + James Morelle. + +The children came into the room just as their mother had finished +reading her letter, and so she read it aloud to them. They were very +much excited at the idea of making a voyage to England, and they asked +their mother if she thought she would go. + +“Yes,” said Mrs. Morelle. “I _rather_ think I shall.” + +The children clapped their hands with delight at hearing this answer. + +“I wish that Grimkie could go with us,” said Florence. + +“So do I,” said John. + +“Ah!” responded Mrs. Morelle, shaking her head, “I am afraid that will +be impossible.” + + + + +CHAPTER II. + +TAKING PASSAGE. + + +While Mrs. Morelle was reflecting upon the arrangements which she +should make for her intended voyage, she thought a great deal of the +suggestion which Florence had made, namely, that she should take +Grimkie with her. + +“I wish I _could_ take him with me,” said she. “He would be a great +help to me, and a great reliance. He is so capable, and at the same +time so considerate; besides, he would be a great deal of company for +the children, and would make the tour not only doubly pleasant, but +doubly profitable for them.” + +But then there was the difficulty of his studies. He was fitting for +college; and Mrs. Morelle knew very well that his father was always +extremely unwilling to allow any thing to interfere with his studies in +school. + +At first, Mrs. Morelle thought that this difficulty was insurmountable, +and that it was wholly out of the question that Grimkie should +accompany them on the proposed tour. But on reflecting more fully upon +the subject, she recollected that it was not usually considered well +for a boy to enter college until he was about sixteen years of age, +whereas Grimkie was not yet fourteen. She knew also that he was already +pretty nearly fitted for college, and she thought it possible that his +father might think that he could now spare a year from his studies as +well as not. It would undoubtedly be greatly promotive of his health, +she thought, and of the strength of his constitution, to spend a year +in travelling, and thus enable him to enter upon his college course +with more vigor and energy. He might travel with her and the children a +year, she thought, and still leave a year for school, to complete his +preparations for the college examination, before it would be time for +him to be offered. + +So she determined to propose the plan to Grimkie’s father, though she +did it with great doubt and hesitation. + +“It will be exactly what I want for him,” said Mr. Jay, when he heard +the proposal. “I have been quite at a loss to decide what to do with +him for the two coming years. I thought seriously of sending him to +some farmer for a year. A boy ought not to be kept at his studies all +the time, while he is growing. + +“But it seems to me, sister,” he added, after a moment’s pause, “that +you show a great deal of courage in undertaking the charge of three +such children, in making the tour of Europe. I should think your own +two children would be charge enough for you.” + +“That is just it,” said Mrs. Morelle. “They are too much of a charge, +and so I want Grimkie to go with us to help me take care of them.” + +Mr. Jay made no further objection, and so it was arranged that Grimkie +should go. + +Mr. Jay made it a condition, however, that Grimkie should have all the +charge of the baggage and of the accounts during the tour, so as to +learn to do such business properly. + +Grimkie was, of course, greatly pleased when he heard of the plan which +had thus been formed for him, and it was determined that the very next +Saturday the whole party should go to New York and take passage in the +Cunard line of steamers. It was necessary for Grimkie to go, for this +was a part of the business which he was bound to attend to, according +to the arrangement. Grimkie wished that Mrs. Morelle should go, in +order that she might choose the staterooms which the party were to +occupy, and Florence and John must go for the pleasure of being of the +party. + +“Besides,” said Florence, “we want to go on board the ship and see the +staterooms.” + +“Ah! but we are not going on board the ship,” replied Grimkie: “we are +only going to the office.” + +“Then how is mother going to choose the staterooms that we are to +have,” said Florence, “if she does not see them.” + +“She will see a plan of them,” said Grimkie. “They have plans of +all the ships at the office, with the plans and shapes of all the +staterooms laid down upon them.” + +“Ho!” said John, in a tone of disappointment; “I don’t care any thing +about seeing a plan. Nevertheless,” he added, after a moment’s pause, +“I should like to go.” + +So it was agreed that they should all go together. + +It was necessary to go immediately, too; for the berths and staterooms +in the Atlantic steamers are usually engaged long beforehand. Mrs. +Morelle asked Grimkie to inquire which was the best steamer in the +Cunard line; for as the precise time of their sailing was not material, +they could go a little sooner or later, for the sake of having one of +the best ships. + +Grimkie accordingly inquired, and he learned that the _Persia_ was the +largest of the ships, though in other respects they were all nearly +equally good. Mrs. Morelle accordingly determined to take passage in +the _Persia_, provided she found that that ship was going at any time +near the first of June. + +Accordingly, on the first Saturday morning after it was concluded that +Grimkie should go, the whole party set out together to go to New York +to engage the passages. They went down by the railroad, and arrived at +the Chambers-street station about ten o’clock. + +“This is just right,” said Grimkie. “The office opens at ten, I +suppose.” + +So Grimkie selected a nice looking carriage from among those that were +standing at the station, and after assisting his aunt and his cousins +to enter it, and also getting in himself, he directed the coachman to +drive to the office of the Cunard Company. The office was situated at +the foot of Broadway, opposite the lower end of the Bowling Green. + +They all descended from the carriage, and went up the steps which led +to the office. On entering it they found a large room, in the front +part of which was a counter with a desk at one end of it, and on the +counter were lying one or two immense books containing plans. The books +were about a yard long, and perhaps two feet wide, and each leaf +contained a plan. The leaves were very stiff, as if the plans had been +pasted upon sheets of pasteboard, in order that they might be turned +over easily, and also to protect them from injury by constant handling. + +In the back part of the room were other desks, where several clerks +were engaged in writing. + +Grimkie accosted the clerk who stood at the desk near the counter, +saying, + +“We came, sir, to engage passages in one of your ships.” + +The clerk bowed politely to Mrs. Morelle, and after some conversation +in respect to the time when she wished to sail, and the steamer which +she preferred, he looked into his books, and found that the _Persia_ +would be coming to America, instead of going to Europe, about the first +of June; also that the ship which would sail from New York nearest to +that time, namely, on the 23d of May, was full. All the staterooms were +engaged. There were, however, some excellent staterooms at liberty in +the Boston steamer, which sailed on the following week, namely, the +30th of May. + +And here, perhaps, it is necessary to explain that there are two +branches to the Cunard line of steamers, one of which connects +Liverpool with Boston, and the other with New York. A ship of each +line sails alternately from Boston and New York—one week from Boston, +and the next from New York. + +As soon as Grimkie heard that there were good staterooms disengaged in +the Boston steamer of the 30th of May, his eye brightened up at once, +and he proposed that they should go that way. + +“But that will make us an extra journey from here to Boston,” said Mrs. +Morelle. + +“Yes, Auntie,” said Grimkie, “that is just the thing. We shall have the +journey to Boston into the bargain, and without paying anything for it, +for the price is less from Boston, and a good deal more than enough +less to pay the expenses of going.” + +“Yes, mother,” said Florence, “let us go that way.” + +“Besides,” said Grimkie, “the Boston steamers touch at Halifax, into +the bargain.” + +“Is that so?” said Mrs. Morelle, turning to the clerk. + +“Yes, madam,” said the clerk, smiling; “but I think the passengers do +not usually consider the touching at Halifax any special advantage in +favor of the Boston line.” + +“Why? Does not the ship stop long enough for them to go on shore?” +asked Mrs. Morelle. + +“She stops usually two or three hours,” replied the clerk; “and the +passengers can go ashore, if they please.” + +“Then let us go that way, mother,” said Florence. + +“We _must_ go that way for aught I see,” said Mrs. Morelle, “if there +are no staterooms for us in the New York steamers.” + +The clerk looked into his books again, and said that there were no two +continuous staterooms disengaged in the New York steamers until after +the middle of June. He, however, then opened one of the big books, and +showed Mrs. Morelle the plan of the _Europa_, which was the Boston +steamer that was to sail on the 30th, and pointed out upon the plan two +staterooms lying contiguous to each other, which were disengaged. + +One of them was what was called the family stateroom, being nearly +square in form, with two berths, one over the other, at the end, and +a settee along the side, upon which a third person might sleep, if +necessary. + +“_I_ could sleep on the sofa, mother,” said John, “just as well as not.” + +“Then what should we do with Grimkie,” asked Mrs. Morelle. + +[Illustration: CHOOSING THE STATE ROOMS.] + +“We might give the young gentleman a separate berth in another +stateroom,” said the clerk; “and then you would have only three +passages to pay for. But in that case,” added the clerk, “you might +find it more convenient to let the young lady sleep upon the sofa, as +the upper berth is pretty high, and her brother could climb up to it +perhaps more easily than she could.” + +“_I_ can climb,” said John, eagerly. “I can climb up to the upper +berth, just as well as not.” + +Mrs. Morelle found, on further conversation with the clerk, that if she +took only a single berth in the second stateroom, the other berth would +be occupied by some stranger, who might or might not be very agreeable +company for Grimkie. So she concluded to take two staterooms herself, +with a view of letting Grimkie and John occupy one of them, while she +and Florence occupied the other. The clerk accordingly put down her +name for two staterooms contiguous to each other, one of the large ones +for herself and Florence, and a smaller one, next to it, for Grimkie +and John. Mrs. Morelle paid the money and took a receipt, and then the +whole party left the office and returned to the carriage. + + + + +CHAPTER III. + +PREPARATIONS. + + +Many weeks intervened between the time when Mrs. Morelle took her +passage and the day appointed for sailing. During this interval all +parties were very much occupied with making the various preparations +necessary for such a tour. Mrs. Morelle bought three trunks all alike +and of medium size. One of these trunks was for herself, one for +Florence and John, and one for Grimkie. + +These trunks were all of a medium size, that is, about as large as +could be conveniently handled when full, by one man. Mrs. Morelle had +learned by former experience in travelling in Europe, that occasions +would often occur when it was very inconvenient to have a trunk which +it required two men to lift and carry away. + +Besides these trunks Mrs. Morelle bought a sort of valise as large +as she thought Grimkie could conveniently carry in his hand, which +contained a set of night dresses and certain toilet conveniences for +the whole party. This she called the night valise. + +“Because you see,” she said in explaining the arrangement to Florence, +“we are liable sometimes to be separated from our trunks for a night, +but this valise we can keep with us at all times. Besides we shall +sometimes wish to make a little excursion off from our main route, to +be gone only a single night, and then we shall not wish to take our +trunks with us. In such cases as this the night valise will be very +convenient. Then it will be just the thing for me to use as a stool to +put my feet upon in the railway carriages.” + +“I don’t see how we can ever get separated from our trunks,” said +Florence. “They will always go with us in the same train.” + +“But accidents happen,” said her mother. “In travelling, we have not +only to make arrangements for the ordinary course of things, but we +must also provide for accidents.” + +“What kind of accidents?” asked Florence. + +“Every kind that you can imagine,” said Mrs. Morelle. + +“But tell me of one kind, mother,” said Florence. + +“At one time,” replied Mrs. Morelle, “your father and I arrived in +Liverpool late in the evening. It was eleven o’clock before we got +through the custom-house. The ship could not go into dock because the +tide was so low. So we were obliged to go ashore in a tender, which is +a small steamer somewhat like a Brooklyn ferry-boat, but not half so +large. It was dark and rainy, and the wind was blowing a heavy gale. +We had to go down a long black ladder from the steamer to the tender. +One of the officers of the ship held a lantern at the top, and a sailor +held one below. We wished to take our trunks with us, but they said we +could not do that. We must say what hotel we were going to, and they +would send them there. + +“So we told them that we were going to the Waterloo Hotel, and they +marked all our trunks with a big W in chalk. + +“Then we went down the ladder to the tender, and were sent on shore. +When we landed we took a cab, and drove to the Waterloo Hotel. But we +found that we could not have rooms there, for the hotel was full. So we +were obliged to go to another and another. We went to three before we +could get in. + +“It was now about midnight, and we were very tired, and we would have +liked very much to go to bed. If we had had night dresses with us we +might have gone to bed at once, and let our trunks remain at the +Waterloo until morning. But we had nothing of the kind, and so your +father had to take a cab and go back to the Waterloo and wait there +till the trunks came, and he did not get to our hotel so that we could +undress and go to bed till nearly two o’clock.” + +“That was curious,” said John, who had been standing by all the time, +listening to the conversation. “But I don’t understand very well what +you mean about not getting into the docks.” + +“Ah, you’ll find out all about that,” said his mother, “when you get to +Liverpool.” + +“Tell us some more accidents, then, mother,” said John. + +“No,” said his mother. “I can not tell you of any more, but you will +experience plenty of them, you may depend, if we travel about much in +Europe, before we meet father.” + + * * * * * + +One of the most important things to be arranged in making a tour in +Europe is the question of funds. We can not take American money with +us, for American money is not known, and does not circulate in foreign +countries. We must have for each country which we wish to travel +through, the kind of money that belongs to that country, except that +in some cases we can use the money of a neighboring country, when +it happens to be well known. We can use the principal gold coins of +England and France, namely, the sovereign and the Napoleon, almost all +over Europe, for they are almost universally known. With the exception +of these, we require always the money of the country which we are +travelling in. + +Besides this, even if American money would circulate in foreign +countries, it would be very inconvenient to take a sufficient quantity +of it for a long tour, on account of the weight of it. I speak now, of +course, of real money, that is, of gold or silver coin. Bank bills, as +doubtless most of the readers of this book are aware, are not in fact +money, but only the promises of banks to pay money. They pass as money +in the country where the bank issuing them is situated, because every +one knows that he can go with them to the bank and get the coin—that +is, if he thinks the bank is good, and that it will keep its promises. +But in foreign countries, where of course the banks issuing the bills +are beyond the reach of the holders, the bills would be good for +nothing except to sell at a loss to somebody who could send them across +the Atlantic, and make arrangements for having the coin sent back to +him. + +The arrangements for furnishing travellers with the money they +require, are made by the great banking houses. The _banking houses_ +must not be confounded with the banks. They are private establishments, +conducted by men of great wealth. They have branches of their +establishments in all the great cities and towns in Europe and America, +and large supplies of money at all of them. At each branch they +have money of the country where the branch is situated. An American +traveller going to Europe, can go accordingly to one of these banking +houses in New York, and make arrangements there to be furnished with +any amount of money at any of the great towns in Europe, and of such +kinds as they require, on condition of repaying the value of it in +American money in New York, as soon as the news of its having been paid +can come over. + +The document which the banker in New York gives to the traveller, +instructing the branches in Europe to pay him the money he may require, +is called a letter of credit. A letter of credit may be given for any +sum of money, and continue in force for any period of time. + +There are several precautions and conditions to be attended to in +making arrangements for a letter of credit. In the first place, the +banker requires some security that the money which is advanced to the +traveller in foreign lands, will be promptly repaid to him in America, +as soon as notice arrives in this country of his having received it. +This security is given in various ways. Sometimes the traveller knows +some responsible merchant in New York, who will guarantee that the +money will be paid. When he does not know any such person, or does not +wish to ask any person to become surety for him, he can deposit bank +stock, or railway stock, or bonds, or any other sure and good titles +to property which he happens to have, and give the banker authority to +sell them, and pay himself with the proceeds, in case the traveller +fails to make other provision for the repayment of the money advanced +to him. + +Another precaution which it is necessary to take, is one to prevent any +other person than the traveller himself from getting any money with +the letter of credit, in case he should steal it, or in any other way +get it into his possession. Otherwise, in case the letter should be +lost, and any dishonest person should find it, or in case it should +be stolen, the wrongful holder of it might go with it to one of the +bankers in foreign countries and ask for some money, and thus either +the banker or the traveller would be robbed. + +To prevent this, it is customary for the banker to send specimens of +the traveller’s hand-writing to all the branches in Europe where the +traveller thinks he shall wish to draw money. The traveller writes his +name on several slips of paper, and the banker in New York sends one +of the slips to each of the branches in Europe, where the traveller +thinks he may wish to procure money. The clerks at these branches, when +they receive these slips, which are sent to them by mail, paste them +into a big book with a great many other slips of the same kind received +before. Then, when the traveller arrives and calls for his money, they +write a paper for him to sign, directing the person in New York who +is to do the business for him there, to pay the amount to the banker +in New York as soon as the paper reaches him. This paper is called a +draft. When the traveller has signed the draft, the clerk at the branch +in Europe takes it to the big book, and compares the signature with the +one upon the slip of paper which he had received by mail. If he finds +the hand-writing is the same, then he knows that all is right, and he +pays the money. If it is not the same, then he knows that the person +who has called with the letter of credit is not the person he pretends +to be, and so he sends out at once for a police officer, and has him +taken into custody. + +In respect to the security to be lodged with the banker for the letter +of credit, Grimkie had nothing to do, the merchants who had charge +of Mrs. Morelle’s funds having made arrangements for it; but Mr. Jay +wished that Grimkie should attend to the business of procuring the +letter himself, in order that he might learn how to do business at a +banker’s, and he recommended that Mrs. Morelle should go with him, so +as to see how the business was done, and also to give specimens of her +signature. + +“You might write the specimens at home,” he said, “and send them to +the banker’s; but I think it is a little better for you to go to +the office. I could go with you just as well as not, but if you go +alone you will see how easily the business is done, and you will have +more confidence and self-possession in going to the banking houses +in Europe. So I think I had better not go with you, but leave you +altogether to Grimkie’s care.” + +Mrs. Morelle entirely approved this arrangement; and, accordingly, on +the morning of the day before she was to set out for Boston, she went +with Grimkie and obtained the letter. It was on Monday that she did +this. She had left her home on the North River the Saturday before, +with a view of spending Sunday in New York, and then, after attending +to this and some other business in New York on Monday, of proceeding +to Boston on Tuesday, so as to be ready to sail in the steamer on +Wednesday, that being the appointed day. + +How Grimkie succeeded in doing the business at the banker’s, will +appear in the next chapter. + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + +THE LETTER OF CREDIT. + + +Persons who are not much accustomed to travelling, or to doing business +for themselves in strange places, sometimes feel a good deal of +solicitude when called upon to act in such cases, from not knowing +beforehand exactly what they are to do. But there is never any occasion +for such solicitude. It is not at all necessary when you have occasion +to go to a bank, or to an office of any kind, or to a railway-station +where a great many different trains are coming and going, that you +should know beforehand what you are to do when you get there. All that +is necessary is that you should simply know _what you want_, and that +you should be able to state it intelligibly. It is the business of the +clerks, or of the persons in charge of the establishment, whatever it +may be, to show you how the business is to be done, when you once tell +them what it is. + +It was about eleven o’clock on Monday morning that Grimkie was to set +out with Mrs. Morelle to go and get the letter of credit. Florence and +John were to go too, as they did not wish to be left at the hotel, but +they were to remain in the carriage while Grimkie and his aunt went +into the office. + +Grimkie’s father was at the hotel at the time that they set out. + +“Now, Grimkie,” said he, while Mrs. Morelle was putting on her bonnet +and shawl, “do you know where you are going?” + +“Yes, sir,” said Grimkie, “you gave me the address of the banker, and I +have got it in my pocket.” + +“Very good,” said his father. + +“And now do you know how to do the business when you get there?” + +“No, sir,” said Grimkie. + +“Very good again,” said his father. “It is not necessary that you +should know how to do the business. It is not your duty to know. It is +the duty of the clerks there to do the business for you. But do you +know what the business is that you wish to have done?” + +“Yes, sir,” said Grimkie. “To get a letter of credit.” + +“In whose name?” asked his father. + +“Mrs. Jane Morelle’s,” said Grimkie. + +“For how much?” asked his father. + +“For five hundred pounds,” said Grimkie. + +“How long to run?” asked his father. + +“For one year,” said Grimkie. + +“Very good,” said his father. “That is all you want to know. And +remember, in all your travels, that if you have any business to do of +any kind, in any strange place, all that is necessary for you is to +know distinctly what you want, and to be able to state it intelligibly. +The people of the establishment will attend to all the rest.” + +“Yes, sir,” said Grimkie. “I will remember it.” + +Mrs. Morelle, who had been standing before the glass putting on her +bonnet and shawl during this conversation, listened to it with much +interest, and she felt great satisfaction and relief in hearing it. She +had very naturally felt some uneasiness and apprehension in setting out +upon such a tour, at the thought of being called upon often, as she +knew she must be, at railway stations, and public offices of various +kinds, to transact business without knowing at all how the business was +to be done. + +But if all that is necessary in such places, she said to herself, is +that I should know what I want, and be able to state it intelligibly, I +think I shall get along very well. + +In fact, Grimkie’s father meant what he said much more for Mrs. +Morelle than for Grimkie. He knew very well that boys of Grimkie’s +age were not usually very diffident, or distrustful of themselves, in +regard to the transaction of business of any kind, and that they did +not usually stand in need of any special encouragement. + +When Grimkie entered the banking-house where he was to procure the +letter, he was at first somewhat abashed by the scene which presented +itself to view. He saw a very large room with doors opening in various +directions into other rooms, all full of desks, and clerks, and people +going and coming. There was a long counter with high desks, surmounted +by little balustrades rising above it, and open spaces here and there, +where people were receiving money, or delivering papers, or transacting +other business. Grimkie was for a moment quite bewildered, but after a +moment’s hesitation he recalled to mind the instructions which he had +received, and he went boldly up to the clerk who was nearest to him and +said, + +“I came to see about a letter of credit.” + +“Second desk to the right,” said the clerk, pointing with his pen, but +without raising his eyes from his work. + +Grimkie, followed by Mrs. Morelle, went in the direction indicated. The +desk was a very large and handsome one, and an elderly gentleman of +very respectable appearance was sitting at it writing a letter. He went +on with his work, but in a moment, glancing his eye at Grimkie, he said, + +“Well, my son?” + +“I came to see about a letter of credit,” said Grimkie. + +“What name?” asked the gentleman. + +“Mrs. Jane Morelle,” replied Grimkie. + +“Ah!” said the gentleman, and looking up from his work his eye fell +upon Mrs. Morelle, whom he now for the first time saw. He immediately +rose from his seat and offered Mrs. Morelle a chair. + +“It is all arranged about your letter of credit,” said he, as he +resumed his seat, “except to take your signatures. You will only wish +to draw in London and Paris, I understand?” + +“Yes, sir,” said Mrs. Morelle. “Mr. Jay thought that that would be all +that we should require.” + +The gentleman then called to a handsome-looking young clerk who was +writing at a desk near by, and asked him if he would be kind enough +to take Mrs. Morelle’s signature. So the clerk conducted her to a +table at a little distance, near a window, where there were writing +materials, and asked her to write her name three or four times, at some +little distance apart, upon a sheet of paper which he gave her. Grimkie +followed his aunt to the table, and the clerk, after having given the +directions, went away and left Mrs. Morelle to write at her leisure. + +“I’m all in a trepidation,” said Mrs. Morelle, taking the pen, “and it +won’t be written well.” + +“That will be just right, then, Auntie,” said Grimkie, “for you will +be all in a trepidation when you go to draw the money in the foreign +cities, and so the writing will be the same.” + +Mrs. Morelle smiled, and then proceeded to write her name four times, +in a column on the left hand side of the paper, each signature being at +the distance of two inches from the other. + +By the time that she had finished writing, the clerk came and took +the paper. He then said to her that if she would remain seated a few +minutes, he would bring the letter of credit to her. + +Accordingly, in a few minutes he returned, bringing with him a letter +folded and enclosed in a very strong envelope. Mrs. Morelle took the +envelope, and then bowing to the clerk, and also to the gentleman at +the desk, she and Grimkie retired. + +As soon as they had returned to the hotel, Grimkie was curious to open +the letter of credit and read it. He found that it was a handsomely +printed form, covering one side of a sheet of letter paper, with the +blanks filled up by a pen. It was as follows: + + “New York, _May 28, 1860_. + + “_Messrs. de Rothschild Brothers, Paris._ + + “_Messrs. N. M. Rothschild and Son, London._ + + “_Gentlemen_: + + “This letter will be presented to you by _Mrs. Jane Morelle_, in + whose favor we beg to open a credit with you collectively, for the + sum of £500—_say Five Hundred Pounds_, to which extent be pleased to + furnish payments in sums as required, without deduction, and against + receipts, inscribing the amounts paid on the reverse of this letter, + and reimbursing yourselves in accordance with our letter of advice, + transmitting receipts at the same time. + + “(Signed) Yours, most respectfully, + + “_August Belmont and Co._” + + “This credit is in favor for _two years from date_.” + +The parts of the letter which are printed in Italics, were in +manuscript in the original. The rest was the printed form. You will +observe that the parts which were in manuscript comprise all those +portions of the letter which would require to be varied for different +travellers applying for letters, while the printed portion consists of +what would be the same for all. + +Besides the letter of credit, Grimkie’s father recommended to Mrs. +Morelle to take a considerable supply of English gold with her—as much +as she could conveniently carry—to use when she first landed; for she +might desire, he said, to travel about England for a while before going +to London, which was the first place where her letter of credit could +be made available. + +“Besides,” said he, “it is a little cheaper for you to carry gold. The +gold which you buy here and take with you, does not cost quite so much +as that which you obtain there, through your letter of credit; for, +besides being repaid for the actual value of the gold, the bankers +require something for themselves, as their profit on the transaction.” + +“That’s fair,” said Grimkie. “But then why can’t we take it _all_ in +gold, and so get it all cheaper?” + +“Because then you lose in interest money more than you save,” said +his father. “Suppose, for example, a person is going to spend three +thousand dollars in a year, in travelling in Europe—fifteen hundred +dollars the first six months, and fifteen hundred in the second. Now +the last fifteen hundred, if he leaves it at home, well invested, +will bring in, during the first half of the year, say forty or fifty +dollars, which will much more than pay the banker’s commission. So it +is better for him to leave it invested, and take it from the banker’s +when the time comes for using it. And then, besides, the danger of +being robbed is very much greater in taking a very large sum in gold +with you. It is best, therefore, for you to rely upon your letter of +credit, except for what you require at the outset, and that it is well +to take with you in gold.” + +So it was arranged that Grimkie should go with Mrs. Morelle to a money +broker’s in Wall-street, whose address his father gave him, to get some +sovereigns. + +A money-broker is a man who keeps the different kinds of money of +all the different foreign nations for sale. Merchants, shipmasters, +travellers and other persons coming home from foreign parts, are always +bringing home certain quantities of this money. As it will not pass +current in this country, they usually take it to a money-broker’s and +sell it. He pays them for it a little less than its intrinsic value. In +this way he keeps a supply of all kinds of foreign money constantly on +hand, and in passing by his office you often see these coins in the +window for sale, just as you see books in the window of a bookstore, +or toys in that of a toy-shop, and travellers who wish to visit any +foreign countries, or persons who wish to send money there for any +purpose, go to these brokers and buy the kind of money which they +require—though, of course, they have to pay for it a little _more_ +than its intrinsic value, just as those who brought it into the country +were obliged to sell it for a little less. The difference is the +broker’s profit. + +The coin which Mrs. Morelle wished to buy was sovereigns. The value of +the sovereign is a pound. It is divided into twenty shillings, which +are represented by silver coins of nearly the size of an American +quarter of a dollar. + +The sovereign is a gold coin, nearly as large as an American five +dollar piece. There is gold enough in a new sovereign fresh from the +mint, to come to four dollars and eighty-six cents, as determined by +the assaying officers of the United States. The average amount of gold +in the sovereigns in circulation is, however, only four dollars and +eighty-four cents. That is, the new ones have two cents worth of gold +in them more than the average of those in circulation. + +How much you have to pay for sovereigns when you go to buy them at a +broker’s depends upon how many he has in hand, or expects soon to +receive, and upon the demand for them. When a great many sovereigns +are wanted and the supply is not large, of course the price rises, and +in a reverse of circumstances it falls. Grimkie’s father told him that +probably he would have to pay four ninety, or four ninety-one for them +on the day when he went with Mrs. Morelle to purchase them. + +If, instead of purchasing sovereigns at the broker’s, the traveller +obtains them of the banker’s through a letter of credit, they cost him, +on account of commissions and charges, nearly five dollars apiece. +American travellers, therefore, generally reckon the sovereigns which +they expend in Europe in their travels, and in the purchases which they +make, as so many times five dollars. + +On entering the broker’s office, Mrs. Morelle and Grimkie at once +heard a great chinking of coin, as people were counting it out, either +paying or receiving it. There was a long counter on one side of the +room, with clerks behind it, and beyond the clerks, against the wall, +were shelves, with boxes of coin, and little heaps of coin, some in +piles, and some in rolls, enveloped in paper. A man, who looked like a +seafaring man, was standing at the counter in one place, with a bag of +gold which he had just opened, and he was now pouring out the coin from +it. It was a bag of doubloons which he had brought from some Spanish +country. Near by was a young man, who was just counting and putting +into a bag a quantity of sovereigns which he had been purchasing. There +were various others at different places along the counter engaged in +similar transactions. + +Mrs. Morelle had concluded to reserve about seventy-five dollars, for +her expenses in going to Boston, and to invest all the rest of the +money which she had with her in sovereigns. But Grimkie, who seemed +to want to get hold of as many sovereigns as possible, said to her as +they were coming in the carriage toward the office that he thought that +seventy-five dollars was more than would be necessary to take them to +Boston. But she said that possibly some accident might happen which +would lead to extra expense, and it was always best to have enough. + +“And then if I have anything left over,” said she, “we can purchase +sovereigns with it in Boston, the morning before we sail.” + +Accordingly Grimkie, holding in his hands eight bills of a hundred +dollars each, went with Mrs. Morelle to a vacant place at the counter, +and said that he wished to buy some sovereigns, and asked the price. + +“How many will you want?” asked the clerk. + +“About a hundred and sixty,” said Grimkie. He had previously made a +calculation that he could have rather more than a hundred and sixty for +the eight hundred dollars. + +“I have got eight hundred dollars here,” said Grimkie, “which I wish to +change into sovereigns.” + +“We can let you have them for four ninety,” said the clerk. + +Then taking a little slip of paper and a pencil he made a calculation, +and presently said, + +“You can have a hundred and sixty-three sovereigns, and a little over, +for the eight hundred dollars.” + +“How much will one hundred and sixty-five cost?” asked Mrs. Morelle. + +The clerk, after figuring a little more on his paper, said that they +would come to eight hundred and eight dollars and fifty cents exactly. + +“Then let us take a hundred and sixty-five,” said Mrs. Morelle, “and I +will pay the eight dollars fifty.” + +So Mrs. Morelle took eight dollars and fifty cents from her purse, and +put it with the eight hundred dollars, and Grimkie gave the whole to +the clerk. He counted it and put it away, and then proceeded to count +out the sovereigns, laying them in piles, as he counted them, of fifty +each. + +“Would you like a bag to put them in?” asked the clerk. + +Grimkie said he would like one very much. + +So the clerk gave him a small, brown linen bag, large enough to contain +the coin. While Grimkie was putting the money into the bag, it occurred +to him that perhaps it would be well to have a little English silver. + +“We shall also have need of a little change, Auntie,” said he, “when we +first land, for the porters or the cabmen.” + +“I can give you silver for one of the sovereigns,” said the clerk, “if +you wish.” + +So Grimkie gave back one of the sovereigns to the clerk, and the clerk +in lieu of it counted out twenty silver coins not quite so large as a +quarter of a dollar. He left them on the counter for Grimkie to count +over after him, and began to attend to another customer. + +“That’s right, Auntie,” said Grimkie: “twenty is right. Twelve pence +make a shilling; twenty shillings make a pound.” + +Grimkie wrapped up the twenty shillings in a piece of paper, and put +them into the mouth of his bag, and then putting the bag in his pocket, +he assisted Mrs. Morelle into the carriage, and after getting in +himself, he ordered the coachman to drive to the hotel. + + + + +CHAPTER V. + +THE EMBARKATION. + + +On Tuesday morning, when Mrs. Morelle and her party arrived at Boston, +they learned from an advertisement in the newspaper that they must be +on board the next morning at eight o’clock, as the steamer was to sail +at nine. + +“I am glad of that,” said Grimkie; “for now the sooner we are off the +better. Only,” he added, after a moment’s pause, “we shall not have a +chance to change the rest of our money.” + +“True,” said Mrs. Morelle; “and I think I shall have nearly forty +dollars over, after I have paid the bill at the hotel.” + +“That would get us eight sovereigns more,” said Grimkie. + +“I don’t know what I shall do with that money,” said Mrs. Morelle. “It +is in bank bills, which will be of no use in England, and it will make +me considerable trouble to carry them with me all the time of my tour.” + +“Perhaps we might get five-dollar gold pieces with the money here at +the hotel,” said Grimkie, “and that would be much better than to carry +the bills, for we can sell the gold pieces in Liverpool to the brokers +there, for nearly as much as they are worth.” + +“That will be the best thing that we can do,” said Mrs. Morelle. + +So Grimkie took the money and went to the bar of the hotel, and the +barkeeper said he could change it into gold just as well as not. He +accordingly gave Grimkie eight half-eagles, and Grimkie, after wrapping +them up carefully in a paper by themselves, put them into the top +of his money bag, with the rest of the coin, and then put the whole +carefully away in his aunt’s trunk. + +The next morning, at half-past seven, a coach which Grimkie had ordered +the night before, came to the private door of the Tremont House, in +Tremont Place, and took the whole party in, with their luggage, and +conveyed them to East Boston, where the steamer was lying. + +As soon as they arrived upon the pier, they found themselves in the +midst of a scene of great bustle and excitement. + +Carriages were arriving in rapid succession, bringing passengers to the +ship. Piles of trunks and carpet-bags were lying upon the pier, and a +line of sailorlike-looking men were engaged in taking them on board. +As soon as Grimkie’s baggage—for from this time he called it all his, +since he had now the exclusive charge of it—was set down, Grimkie paid +the fare, and the coachman, mounting upon the box, wheeled his carriage +round, and drove away. Very soon one of the porters from the ship came +and took up one of the trunks to carry it on board. + +“Johnnie,” said Grimkie, “you go with Aunt and Florence on board, after +this man, and see where he puts this trunk, and then come back here. +I’ll stay in the meantime, and watch the rest.” + +So John led the way in following the porter over the plank, while +his mother and Florence followed _him_. As soon as he got on board, +he saw the porter put down the trunk in a sort of open space in the +middle of the deck, with a great many others, and in a moment afterward +several more were piled up upon it and around it, so that it rapidly +disappeared from view. + +John found a place near by where Mrs. Morelle could stand, a little out +of the way of the crowd, and then immediately hastened back over the +plank to where he had left Grimkie on the pier. + +“Grimkie,” said he, “they have covered our trunk all up with fifty +others, and I don’t see how we shall ever get it again.” + +“Never mind,” said Grimkie; “we’ll wait and see how the other +passengers get theirs.” + +Just at this moment some porters came and took up the two remaining +trunks, and heaving them up upon their shoulders, began to walk with +them on board. Grimkie and John followed, bringing with them the valise +and several other similar things. When they arrived on board they saw +the two trunks deposited with the other baggage, and where they soon +began rapidly to disappear from view. + +“Now,” said Grimkie, “we will go down and put the valise in our +state-room.” + +The deck and all the passages leading below, were crowded with people +going and coming. A large proportion of these people were friends of +the passengers, who had come to accompany them on board, in order to +see the ship and the staterooms which their friends were to occupy. +Grimkie led the way through this crowd, working forward slowly, as well +as he could, and followed by the rest of his party. Indeed there were +two lines of people moving in contrary directions, and Grimkie supposed +that by following the one that was going on, he should sooner or later +find his way below. + +He was right in this calculation. He was soon conducted to a door which +led into a narrow but very elegant passage-way. In the middle of this +passage-way was a door to the right, leading into a magnificent saloon, +with a walk up and down the middle of it, and rows of long tables on +each side. The aspect of this room was very brilliant, but Grimkie had +only time to glance at it, for opposite to it, on the other side of +the passage-way were three other openings, the center one opening into +a most spacious and elegant china closet, and each of the two side +ones leading down a flight of winding stairs, with very bright brass +hand-rails on the sides to take hold of in descending. + +On reaching the foot of the stair-case, the party entered a bewildering +mass of passages and open spaces, all elegantly finished, with highly +polished woods, and handsomely carpeted, and lighted moreover with +strangely placed sky-lights and panes of glass placed in rows near +the ceiling. Grimkie thought that he knew from the plan exactly where +to look for his aunt’s state-room, but he found himself completely +bewildered and lost. There were various state-room doors opening all +around him. He went into one or two of them and looked at the numbers +inscribed upon the berths, but they were not the right ones. + +At length he met a very respectable middle aged woman, who seemed to +belong on board. She was in fact the stewardess. Grimkie asked her if +she would show him state-room number twenty-three and twenty-four. + +“Ah yes,” said she, “with a great deal of pleasure. This is it. It is +one of the three best staterooms in the ship.” + +Grimkie stood back and allowed his aunt to go into the state-room +first, and then the other children and finally he himself, followed. + +The state-room was in size like what in a house on land would be called +a large closet, being about seven feet wide and eight feet long. Across +the end of it, and against the side of the ship, were two berths one +above another, with pretty curtains before them, and a space underneath +the lowermost berth, where trunks might be placed. Along one of the +sides there extended a wide settee, covered with a haircloth cushion, +and on the other side two wash-stands in the two corners, with a short +and narrow seat, also covered with a haircloth cushion, between them. +There was a looking-glass over the settee, and various little shelves, +with ledges upon the outer edge of them, to prevent the things from +rolling off in a heavy sea. There were also sundry large brass pins for +hanging cloaks and dresses upon, and brass rings projecting from the +walls in the corners to put tumblers into. + +Opening into the upper berth was a small, round window, deep set in the +thickness of the ship’s side, and there was also a very thick piece +of glass, of prismatic shape, set in the deck above, making a sort of +window there, six inches by three. Over the door, too, and extending +along the whole of that side of the state-room, was a row of panes of +glass, which admitted light from the passage-way, and from other panes +set in mysterious recesses above. + +Mrs. Morelle as soon as she had entered the state-room, drew back the +curtain of the lower berth, and laid her shawl and her parasol upon the +bed, while Grimkie placed the valise under the little seat between the +two wash-stands. + +Mrs. Morelle then sat down upon the settee and looked around to take a +survey of the place, and then at the sky-light above. At the same time +she drew a long breath and said, + +“Ah me! This is rather a small cell to be shut up in as a prisoner fur +two weeks.” + +“Oh mother!” exclaimed Florence, “we shall not be shut up here. We can +go about all over the ship.” + +“You children will do that,” said Mrs. Morelle, “but I shall be shut up +here. I shall be sick.” + +“But mother you will not be sick all the voyage,” said Florence. + +“Perhaps not,” said she. “I am sure I shall not be very sick, all the +voyage. After a day or two I shall be only comfortably sick, and you +will all be perfectly well I am quite sure, and can run about wherever +you please.” + +Then rising from her seat she said, + +“But I need not begin my imprisonment yet. Let us go up on deck and see +the people come on board.” + +So they all left the state-room, and making their way through the +crowd as well as they could, they went up to the upper deck, where +they found a great number of ladies and gentlemen assembled in various +groups—some standing and others sitting upon settees and camp-stools, +while the pier, which was here in full view, was crowded with other +parties coming and going, and with porters bringing more trunks and +baggage on board. + +Grimkie found seats for his party, and they all sat down. They remained +in these places an hour, amusing themselves with the extraordinary +spectacle which was exhibiting itself around them. As the time drew +nigh for the sailing of the ship, the excitement of the scene was +increased by the steam which having now been raised in the boilers to +its full tension, and not yet being allowed to expend its energies in +turning the paddles, made its escape through the waste-pipe with a +thundering roar which made it almost impossible for the friends who +were taking leave of each other to hear the parting word. From time to +time the bell was rung, loud and rapidly, to warn those who were only +on board as visitors to go on shore. A long and crowded procession of +these visitors poured over the bridge to the pier, and when all were +gone the bridge itself was raised, and hoisted to the shore, by a +vast tackle and fall. The noise of the steam now suddenly ceased. The +hawsers at the bow and at the stern were cast off, the paddle-wheels +commenced their motion, and the ship began slowly to move away from the +pier. A moment afterward two guns were fired one after another from the +bows of the ship, with a deafening sound. The passengers standing along +the hand-railing of the upper deck waved their hats and handkerchiefs +to their friends who thronged the pier, and who waved their hats and +handkerchiefs in return. Many of them were in tears. Mrs. Morelle +herself might have experienced some misgivings and have felt a little +homesick and sad, at parting thus from her native land, and setting +out upon so long a voyage with only three children, as it were, for +her companions,—but she was going to meet her husband; and when a +wife is going to meet a husband that she loves, or a mother to her +son, she rarely experiences any misgiving. Her heart reposes with so +much confidence and hope, upon the end of her journey, that she seldom +shrinks very much from any thing to be encountered on the way. + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + +LIFE ON BOARD SHIP. + + +The party enjoyed a very excellent opportunity, as the ship sailed +down the harbor, of viewing the scenery of the shores, and of seeing +the other ships, steamers and sail-boats, that were going in various +directions to and fro. While Mrs. Morelle remained at this seat, +Grimkie and John went to take a walk about the ship to see what they +could see. There was no difficulty now in going where they pleased, +for since the visitors had left the ship and none but the regular +passengers remained, there was ample room for all. + +Accordingly, Grimkie and John took a long ramble all about the ship. +They looked down into the engine-room, and there, at a vast depth below +the deck, they saw half-naked stokers shoveling coal into the furnace. +They walked along by the ranges of offices which extended on each side +of the main deck through the whole middle portion of the ship, like +two little streets of shops in a town. They saw the cow—a monstrous +one—shut up in a pen, with the sides of it covered with carpeting and +well padded, like the back of a sofa, to prevent the cow from being +hurt when thrown against them by the rolling of the ship in a storm. +They went into the saloon and were much struck with the brilliancy +and magnificence of it. There was one arrangement which particularly +attracted their attention. This was a row of hanging shelves extending +up and down the room over the tables. These shelves were made of some +highly polished wood and were so ornamented with brass mountings that +they made quite an elegant appearance. They were all loaded, too, with +cut-glass and silver-ware—such as decanters, tumblers, wine-glasses +of different colors, castors, and silver spoons,—which added greatly +to the brilliance of the effect. The shelves were double, or, as one +might say, two stories high, the upper story of each having holes and +openings in it of various forms, suited to the various articles which +they were to contain. In these openings of the upper board the various +vessels were placed, while the bottoms of them rested on the lower +board. Each one had thus its own little nest, where it could rest in +safety, no matter how much the ship might pitch or roll. + +Grimkie found that cards were pinned along the sides of the table to +mark the places where the different passengers were to sit, and there +were also in the saloon two or three gentlemen who had cards in their +hands, and were looking out for vacant places to put them. + +“Ah, yes!” said Grimkie, “we must choose our places at the tables. +Father told me about this and I have got the cards in my pocket all +ready. I came very near forgetting it.” + +So he took out the cards and one of the stewards who was there, helped +him to choose good places. After he had pinned the cards to the +table-cloth, opposite the seats which they were intended to secure, +he and John went up to the upper deck again to where Mrs. Morelle and +Florence were sitting. Mrs. Morelle asked John how he liked the ship. + +He liked it very well he said. Every thing was complete and secure. The +chairs and tables were all screwed down to the floor, and there were +nests for all the tumblers, and a sofa for the cow. + +The ship was now gradually getting out of the harbor, and coming upon +the open sea where she met with a gentle swell over which she rose +and fell in a manner very graceful and charming to the eye, but very +bewildering and dizzying in its effects upon the brain. Mrs. Morelle +and Florence soon went below, where, with the help of Mrs. McGregor, +the stewardess, who was extremely kind and attentive to them, they +undressed themselves and went to bed. Mrs. Morelle got into the lower +berth, but as Florence felt a little afraid to climb up into the upper +one, Mrs. McGregor made a bed for her upon the settee, where she could +lie very comfortably. + +Grimkie and John remained up and about the decks all that day. At times +they felt sick and uncomfortable, but they were so much excited by the +new and strange scenes which continually attracted their attention that +they were extremely unwilling to go to their state-room. From time +to time they paid Mrs. Morelle and Florence a visit, but they found +them lying silent and motionless, and very little inclined to talk. +At twelve o’clock there was a grand luncheon in the dining saloon, +with nearly all the passengers at the tables. At four a still grander +dinner, though the places of the ladies were generally vacant. + +The ship’s bells tolled the hours regularly through the afternoon +and evening watches, and at eight o’clock both Grimkie and John were +very ready to go to bed. Grimkie allowed John to have the lower berth +because it was so much easier to get into. There was no real difficulty +however in respect to the upper berth, for Mrs. McGregor, when the +boys were ready to go to bed, brought in a very nice step-ladder with +iron hooks at the upper end of it to hook into the edge of the berth. +She hooked the ladder on the berth and planted the lower end of it upon +the floor, and then went away, saying that the ladder could remain +there all night. + +“It is a very nice ladder,” said John, “and it must be easy going up. +But I never saw a ladder with hooks in it before. A ladder will stand +steady enough without hooks.” + +“On _land_ it would,” said Grimkie. “But at sea, when the ship is +rolling heavily in a gale of wind, the ladder must have claws to hold +on by.” + +“I hope we shall have a good gale of wind,” said John, after a brief +pause. “I want to see if I can go up that ladder in it.” + +John was however evidently not much inclined to talk. He undressed +himself in silence and crept into his berth. Grimkie also mounted the +ladder and climbed over from the top of it into his. After covering +himself up with the bed clothes and getting as well settled as was +possible in so hard and narrow a bed, he extended his head over the +edge of his berth so as to look down toward John’s berth below, and +said, + +“Johnnie, are you comfortable?” + +“Yes,” said John. + +“Are you sleepy?” said Grimkie. + +“No,” said John, “but I am sick.” + +“Never mind,” said Grimkie. “Say your prayers to yourself, and then +shut up your eyes and go to sleep, and forget all about it.” + +For several days after this time the condition of our party of +travelers was quite forlorn. Grimkie himself, in fulfillment of a +positive resolution which he had made, clambered down from his berth, +and went up to the saloon to all his meals, though frequently without +being able to eat any thing when he got there. On these occasions +he always went into Mrs. Morelle’s state-room, to see how his aunt +and Florence were. He found them generally lying in their beds, +Mrs. Morelle in the berth, and Florence upon the settee, silent and +motionless, and not at all inclined to conversation. His aunt opened +her eyes and smiled faintly when he came in and usually asked him some +questions about the progress of the ship. The weather was cold, rainy +and foggy, and although the air was in itself tolerably calm, the +motion of the ship through the water produced a raw and chilly wind +across the decks, which made it impossible to remain there long without +extreme discomfort. + +On the second night out, about eight o’clock, the engine stopped. +Grimkie, who was always ready at a moment’s notice to go into his +aunt’s stateroom whenever she knocked upon the partition to call him, +or there was any other occasion for going in to see her, and who for +this purpose undressed very little during all the first part of the +voyage, immediately climbed down from his berth, and slipping on a +great coat which he kept always at hand, in lieu of a dressing gown, he +opened his aunt’s door. + +The moment that he opened it, Mrs. Morelle raised her head suddenly, +and asked him in a tone of alarm, what was the matter. + +“I don’t think any thing at all is the matter, Auntie,” said he. “They +are always stopping the engine on these voyages—to tighten up a screw +or something or other.” + +“But Grimkie,” said she, “I wish you would go and see if you can not +find out what is the matter. I am afraid that something has happened.” + +There was, indeed, something almost awful in the solemn stillness which +reigned throughout the ship, now that the engine had ceased its motion, +and the ship lay rocking upon the waves as if powerless and helpless. +Grimkie immediately left the stateroom in order to go upon deck, and +Mrs. Morelle’s alarm was very much increased a moment after he had +gone, by a burst of steam from the steam-pipe, which suddenly began to +be heard, occasioned by the letting off of the surplus steam, which, as +it could now no longer be employed in driving the paddle-wheels, it was +necessary to allow to escape into the atmosphere. + +A moment after this sound began to be heard however, Mrs. McGregor came +into the cabin, to say to Mrs. Morelle, that she must not be alarmed at +the stopping of the engine, for there was nothing the matter. + +“They have only stopped to sound,” said she. “You see we are drawing +nigh to Halifax, and it is very thick and dark, and they can not see +the land. So they have to sound and go on cautiously. We shall go on +again presently.” + +So saying Mrs. McGregor went away in order to convey the same relief +and reassurance to the ladies in the other staterooms. + +Grimkie went up on deck, but he could see nothing. The night was dark, +and a heavy mist mingled with rain, was driving along the decks. He +could hear the voices of some of the sailors occasionally, talking in +ordinary tunes, in the forward part of the vessel, and now and then a +command given by an officer, but otherwise all was still. + +Grimkie returned to the stateroom, and there found how much his aunt +had been relieved by having learned that they had stopped the ship to +sound. + +“I was sure there could not be anything the matter,” said Grimkie. +“So you must shut your eyes, Auntie, and go to sleep, and not pay any +attention after this to any thing you hear. There are ever so many +things going on in such a ship, and when any thing unusual happens we +must not mind it. Whenever there is any danger—or at least whenever +there is any thing for us to do, Mrs. McGregor will be sure to come and +tell us.” + +“That is true,” said Mrs. Morelle, “and I will try not to be afraid +again.” + +“But if you _should be_ afraid at any time, Auntie,” continued Grimkie, +“just knock at the head of your berth and I shall hear.” + +So saying Grimkie bade his aunt good night and went back to his +stateroom. As for John he heard nothing of all this, having slept +soundly through the whole. + +The steamer was soon put in motion again, but in the course of an +hour she stopped anew. Grimkie was asleep, but the stopping wakened +him. He knew it was not midnight by the stateroom light which was +still burning. There was a little three-cornered box partitioned off +in a corner between the two staterooms, with a door opening into +the passage-way, and ground glass sides toward the staterooms. Into +this box a lighted candle was placed by a steward standing in the +passage-way, every evening, as soon as it was dark, and this gave a dim +and indistinct light in the two staterooms adjoining it, through the +ground glass panes. This was all the light for the staterooms that was +allowed. + +Moreover, as this light was put out at midnight, it afforded the +passengers the means of knowing, when they awoke in the night, whether +it was before or after midnight, by observing whether their light had +gone out or was still burning. + +Grimkie was awakened from his sleep by the stopping of the engine the +second time, and he remained awake long enough to observe that his +light was still burning. He, however, soon fell asleep again. + +He awoke after this several times during the night and found the ship +sometimes at rest, and sometimes in motion. On one of these occasions +he heard a great sound of trampling upon the deck, as of persons going +to and fro, and a sort of thumping, such as would be occasioned by the +moving heavy boxes about upon deck. He determined to go up and see what +was the matter. + +So he climbed down from his berth, put on his great coat, his +overshoes, and his cap, and went up to the deck. He saw lights, and the +dim forms of many men were going to and fro forward and on the side of +the ship a long range of black masses which looked so strange that they +quite bewildered him. The wind blew, and the mist and rain were driven +into his face so as almost to blind him. As he stood at the head of the +stairs looking out, a passenger came by to go in. + +“What is it?” asked Grimkie. + +“Halifax,” said the passenger. “I’m thankful that we have got in at +last. We lost five hours beating about outside in the fog before we +could get in.” + +Grimkie was determined to see Halifax, so he went out upon the main +deck and thence along to the foot of a narrow winding stair which led +up to the upper deck, and thence forward to the great funnel where he +thought he could find a little shelter. He saw some lights glancing +about upon the pier, and the dark and indistinct forms of men moving to +and fro, and a range of black spectral looking roofs extending along +the shore. But it was so cold, and the mist and rain were driven so +furiously into his face by the wind, that he was glad to go below, +saying to himself as he went, + +“We may have better luck perhaps when we come back, and get to Halifax +in the day time.” + +When he awoke the next time he knew by the jar, and by the rocking +motion of the ship, that they were not only on their way again, but +were once more out upon the open sea. + +Everything went on much in this way for a day or two longer. It was +cold and wet upon the decks, and dreary and silent below. The horizon +in every direction was obscured by fogs and mists, and the decks were +kept always wet by driving rains which were continually sweeping over +the sea. Grimkie went up regularly to his meals, but he was glad to +come back again as soon as possible to his berth, and the rest of +the party kept their berths all the time. Mrs. McGregor brought them +soup, and porridge, and tea and toast, and other things, at regular +intervals, but often they were taken away again, scarcely touched, and +during the intervals of these visits Mrs. Morelle and Florence remained +in their berths, sometimes hour after hour without speaking a word. + +The only amusement which they had was to listen for the sound of the +ship’s bells as they tolled the slow progress of the hours, and to +hear the news which Grimkie brought in to them from time to time, in +respect to the progress of the voyage. + +During a great portion of this time Mrs. Morelle was kept in a constant +state of uneasiness, by the blowing of a monstrous steam trumpet +which was attached to the engine, and which was sounded every two or +three minutes, when the fog was too thick ahead to allow them to see +whether any vessels were in the way. The intention in blowing this +trumpet is, that if there should be any such vessels in the line of the +steamer’s advance, they may hear the sound and blow horns or fire guns +in response, and then the steamer might be turned to one side to avoid +them. + +This blowing of the steam trumpet in a fog, is an example of the +extreme caution and care which marks the whole management of the Cunard +steamers, and which inspires the public with so great a degree of +confidence in them. Many steamers in such cases push boldly on, without +making any signals, trusting to the chance of not meeting anything by +the way. I once heard the captain of a steamer say, when we were going +on through a dense fog, on the Atlantic, without taking any of these +precautions, that there was about as little chance of a steamer’s +coming into collision with another vessel when pursuing her way upon +the ocean, as there would be of hitting a bird by firing a gun at +random into the air. + +There is, however, something rather trying to the nerves of timid lady +passengers, in hearing the unearthly scream of this awful trumpet sound +its note of alarm, at regular intervals at midnight, while they lie +sick, miserable and helpless in their berths. When for a time the sound +ceases, indicating that the horizon has become so cleared ahead that +the lookout-men can see, their hearts revive within them, only to sink +again however when a few minutes later perhaps, or perhaps a few hours, +the frightful sound is heard again, sending its screaming note of alarm +far and wide over the sea. + +In a day or two after leaving Halifax, the ship came upon the banks +of Newfoundland, a vast area of foggy and stormy sea, the darkest, +dreariest and most dangerous portion of the Atlantic. Indeed upon these +banks almost all conceivable dangers of the sea seem to congregate. +The water is shallow upon the banks and that brings fish, and the fish +bring fishermen in immense numbers, and the steamers in dark and foggy +nights and days are in constant danger of running foul of them. The +gulf stream brings a vast quantity of comparatively warm water here +from the Gulf of Mexico and the tropics, while at the same time the +winds and currents from Baffin’s bay float down immense fields and +mountains of ice, which chill the air and produce fogs, mists, rains +and driving storms. + +The steamer was two or three days in crossing the banks, and during +almost all this time she was enveloped in thick misty rains, which +kept the decks continually wet, and covered the surface of the sea in +every direction, concealing the fishing vessels, and the icebergs, and +all other dangers entirely from view. The trumpet was kept continually +blowing, by which means it was probable that fishermen might be +warned,—but the greatest danger was from icebergs, for which, of +course, no warning could be of any avail. + +At length, on Monday evening, Mrs. McGregor comforted all the ladies, +by saying, that the next morning the ship would be off the banks, and +that then in all probability they would find good weather. This proved +to be the case. Grimkie went up to the deck before breakfast, and he +found instead of thick mists and rain covering the whole surface of the +water, only a stratum of clouds in the sky, while the horizon was open +and clear in every direction around. Mrs. Morelle and Florence too, had +now become somewhat accustomed to the motion of the ship, and their +appetites began to return. And when at length, about the middle of the +forenoon, a sun-beam made its appearance in the little prismatic piece +of glass which was set in the ceiling of the stateroom, overhead, they +began to feel quite cheerful and happy. The same effect was produced +in many other staterooms, occupied by ladies. They began to feel as if +they could get up and dress themselves, so as to eat their dinners in a +somewhat civilized manner. + +Things improved after this every day. The ladies of the different +staterooms began to become somewhat acquainted with each other through +Mrs. McGregor, who informed them of each other’s condition, and +conveyed messages of politeness and good will to and fro. There were +a number of children too, who played in the passages, and thus became +acquainted with each other, and were brought in by each other to visit +their mothers still lying perhaps upon their settees or in their berths. + +Mrs. Morelle became so well acquainted with one of her neighbors who +occupied the stateroom opposite to hers, across the passage-way, one +which was quite small and confined, that she often invited her to +come and dine with her. Sometimes Florence was of the party too, but +generally from this time Florence preferred to go up to the great +saloon, and take dinner there with Grimkie and John. In such cases +she would come after leaving the table and look in at her mother’s +stateroom, where she usually found her mother and her visitor enjoying +themselves very well indeed, with nice beef-steaks, fried potatoes, and +tumblers of iced lemonade. + +After this time every thing went on smoothly and prosperously till the +end of the voyage. After leaving the banks there are no special dangers +to be apprehended by a Cunard ship, in crossing the Atlantic, and every +body on board was now in good spirits, looking forward with great +pleasure to the approaching termination of the voyage. + +At length, on Saturday afternoon, about four o’clock, news came down +to the ladies in the staterooms that land was in sight. The land first +seen consisted of certain high mountains in the vicinity of the town of +Killarney, in the southwestern part of Ireland. A few hours later the +ship passed Cape Clear, which is the southernmost point of Ireland, and +then bearing a little to the northward followed the coast toward the +Cove of Cork, where she was to touch in order to land passengers and +mails. + +She reached this place between eight and nine o’clock. A tender +came off from Queenstown, which is a town situated at the mouth of +the harbor, to take the mails and the passengers that were to be +landed here. The other passengers, who were to go on with the ship +to Liverpool, and who were now all in excellent spirits as they +considered their voyage substantially over, established themselves upon +camp-stools and settees upon the upper deck, watching the operation of +putting the mails on board the tender, or looking upon the green shores +of Ireland, which as the sun had but just gone down, were brightly +illuminated by the golden radiance of the western sky. + +The passengers all seemed to feel a peculiar pleasure in thus +approaching the land again; and they watched the shores, until, as it +grew dark, one after another they went below for the night. Grimkie and +John remained some time after Mrs. Morelle and Florence had retired. + +The next day being Sunday, divine service was held in the saloon, and +though the ship was out of sight of land for a large part of the day, +the ladies were nearly all well enough, not only to attend service +in the saloon, but also to sit upon the upper deck nearly all the +afternoon, to watch for the reappearance of the land, and to talk about +what they were to do after their arrival. As for Mrs. Morelle she had +concluded to postpone forming any definite plan in respect to her +tour, until she was safe on shore. + +The children, who had become acquainted on the voyage, finding they +were so soon to bid good-by to their new friends, made various projects +of excursions together, in case they should meet each other in the +course of their travels. + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + +MORNING IN LIVERPOOL. + + +Most heartily glad were Mrs. Morelle and Florence to set foot once more +upon dry land. Grimkie and John, though on the whole well pleased to +arrive at the end of the voyage, had, nevertheless, found so much to +amuse them, and to occupy their minds, on board the ship, especially +during the last few days, that they had not been at all impatient to +reach the shore. Immediately on landing they all got into a cab and +drove to the Waterloo Hotel, where rooms had been ordered for them +beforehand by Mr. Jay, who had written to Liverpool for that purpose, +the week before the _Europa_ sailed. + +They found the rooms all ready for them,—a parlor and two bed-rooms. +The parlor was on the front of the house, and looked out upon the +street. The bed-rooms were in the rear. One of the bed-rooms was for +Mrs. Morelle and Florence, and the other for Grimkie and John. + +Of course they all went to bed early. They found it inexpressibly +delightful to have a good wide and soft bed to get into, and to go +to sleep without being rocked, though Mrs. Morelle and Florence still +continued to feel the rocking motion of the ship whenever they shut +their eyes. + +In an English hotel the usages are entirely different from those +which prevail in America. There are no stated hours for meals, and no +public room except one for gentlemen. In an American hotel there is +no objection to a little bustle and life. Indeed one of the charms +of traveling in America is the pleasure of witnessing the bustle and +life of the hotels. In England, on the other hand, the hotels are kept +as still and quiet as possible. The idea is, especially when a lady +arrives at one, to make it as much as possible like her own private +house. Often the landlord, the landlady, the porter, the waiter and +the chambermaid, meet her at the door when she comes, and receive her +just as if they were her own private servants, and the house was her +own private house. The porter receives and takes care of the baggage, +the landlady conducts the guests to their parlor, and from the parlor +the chambermaid presently shows the way to her chambers. The lady +establishes herself in these rooms just as if she were at home. She has +all her meals with her own party, in her own room, ordering just what +she likes, and fixing the hours to suit her own convenience. The fact +that there may be other parties in the hotel, living in the same way, +is kept as much as possible out of view. Thus it happens that a lady is +sometimes several days at a hotel, and one of her best friends is there +too all the time, living in another wing or in rooms approached by some +other passage-way, while she knows nothing about it. + +Of course there was a great deal to be done that evening before the +members of our party were ready to go to bed, but when finally bed-time +arrived, Mrs. Morelle said that she should not wish to have breakfast +very early the next morning, but the children might get up, she added, +as early as they pleased, and if they wished, go out and take a walk. + +“Only you must be back by a quarter to nine,” said she, “for I intend +to have breakfast at nine. And Florence,” she added, “if you are up in +time, I should like to have you order it.” + +“How shall I order it, mother?” asked Florence. + +“When you go out into the parlor you will find the table already set. +The waiters always set all the tables in the different parlors early in +the morning, when they arrange the rooms. You must then ring the bell +and the waiter will come. Tell him that your mother will have breakfast +at nine o’clock, and also tell him what you will have.” + +“And what shall we have mother?” asked Florence. + +“You may have whatever you please,” said Mrs. Morelle, “only I should +like a fried sole for one thing.” + +The sole is a remarkably fine fish, in some sense peculiar to England. +It is particularly nice when fried, and the Americans generally count +a great deal upon having one for breakfast on the morning after they +arrive in Liverpool from a voyage across the Atlantic. + +Liverpool lies so far to the north, that the sun, in the middle of +June, rises very early,—between three and four o’clock—and it is +quite light at half past two. Grimkie was deceived by this very early +dawn, and he got up about three o’clock on the following morning, and +began to dress himself, but happening to look at his watch he saw how +early it was, and so he went to bed again. + +When he next awoke, it was half past six. So he determined to get up. +John got up too. They both dressed themselves and went out into the +parlor, but they found that the shutters were not open. + +“John,” said Grimkie, “the waiters are all asleep. We will go out and +take a walk and come back again by and by.” + +So the two boys passed down stairs and went out into the streets. There +were milk carts and other such things going about, but the shops were +all shut, and there were no signs of opening them. + +“John,” said Grimkie, “the shopmen are all asleep too, and there is +nothing to see here—but let us go down to the landing. We shall find +somebody awake there you may depend.” + +Now there is something very curious at Liverpool in respect to the +arrangements made for the shipping, something that is especially well +calculated to interest such boys as Grimkie and John, and that is the +system of docks and landings. The tide rises and falls so much that +the ordinary system of fixed piers for vessels to lie at, and rise and +fall with the tide, will not answer. Accordingly there have been built +a range of immense docks, extending along the shore for many miles. The +ships go into these docks through vast gates which are opened at high +tide, when of course the river and the docks are both full. Then the +gates are shut to keep the water in, and thus although the tide in the +river may go down very low, the ships within the docks, are kept afloat +all the time—the water there being kept up by the resistance of the +gates, which are made of immense size and strength, in order to enable +them to sustain the pressure. + +Thus in sailing up the river opposite to Liverpool the voyager sees +nothing for miles along the shore but a lofty wall, of prodigious size +interrupted here and there by towers, gateways, and other curious +structures—and beyond it a forest of masts and steamboat funnels, +rising above it, in countless thousands. The wall is the outer line of +the docks, and the masts and funnels seen beyond belong to the ships +and steamers which are lying within. + +Grimkie and John went down to the shore and rambled about for an hour +or more among these docks. They saw immense numbers of ships floating +in the basins—which were full of water, although it was low tide in +the river outside—and the draw-bridge and gates connecting one lock +with another, and vessels loading and unloading, and men hoisting +boilers and machinery into steamers by means of prodigious iron cranes, +and other such spectacles. + +They also saw the landing-stage, which is one of the wonders of +Liverpool. It is an immense floating wharf which rises and falls with +the tide so as always to preserve the same level in respect to the +water. Here all the ferry boats, and tug boats, and tenders, and other +small steamers land, as well as row boats and sail boats innumerable, +the coming and going of which make the great landing-stage one of the +busiest places in the world. + +The boys were so much interested in what they saw, that instead of +getting back to the hotel at eight o’clock as they had intended, it +was a quarter of nine when they arrived. They found that Florence +had ordered breakfast, and that the table was set. There was also a +pleasant little coal fire burning in the grate, for the morning was +cool. In a short time Mrs. Morelle appeared, and soon afterward the +whole party sat down to breakfast. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + +PLANS FORMED. + + +“Now children,” said Mrs. Morelle, while she and the children were at +breakfast, “since we are safe on shore, we can begin to talk about our +plans. It is now about the middle of June. Mr. Morelle will not arrive +in London until September. So that we have two months and a half to +spend in rambling about. And the question is where we shall go.” + +“_You_ must decide that mother,” said Florence. + +“Yes,” replied Mrs. Morelle, “I will decide it, but first I wish +to hear what you all have to say about it. You may all propose the +plans which you would prefer, and then I will take the subject into +consideration and decide.” + +The children then all began to talk about the different tours which +they had heard the passengers speak of on board the ship, toward the +end of the voyage, when they had become well enough to take out their +maps and guide-books, and to consult together about the tours which +they were to make. Florence said that there was a beautiful region +called the lake country, full of mountains and lakes, which lay to the +north of Liverpool, in the counties of Cumberland and Westmoreland. The +Isle of Wight was proposed too, which is a very charming island lying +off the southern coast of England, and a great place of resort for +parties travelling for health or pleasure. + +John said that for his part he would like to go directly to Paris. His +motive for this was partly the long and rapid journey by railway and +steamboat which it would require, but chiefly because he wished to +see the performances at the Hippodrome, a famous place in Paris for +equestrian shows, of which he had heard very glowing accounts before he +left America. + +When it came to Grimkie’s turn to propose a plan, he said that what he +should like best, if he thought that his aunt and Florence would like +it, would be to go to the Orkney Islands. + +“To the Orkney Islands!” exclaimed Mrs. Morelle in a tone of surprise; +“why they are beyond the very northern extremity of Scotland.” + +“Yes, Auntie, I know they are,” said Grimkie; “that is the reason why I +want to go and see them.” + +Mrs. Morelle paused a moment, and seemed to be thinking. + +“Florence,” said she, at length, “go into our bedroom and get my little +atlas. You will find it on the table there. I took it out of the trunk +this morning.” + +Mrs. Morelle always carried a small atlas with her, especially when +travelling with the children, for she found that occasions were +continually arising in which it was necessary, or at least very +desirable, to refer to the map. + +Florence went out, and in a few minutes returned bringing the atlas +with her. + +Mrs. Morelle took the atlas and opened it at the map of Scotland. After +examining the map attentively, she turned to the map of North America. + +“The Orkney Islands extend as far up as latitude fifty-nine and a +half,” said she, “and the lower point of Greenland is only sixty. So +that you would take us to within half a degree of the latitude of +Greenland.” + +“Yes, Auntie,” said Grimkie, “that is just it. To think that we can go +so far north as that and have good roads and good comfortable inns all +the way.” + +“But we should have to go a part of the way by sea,” said Mrs. Morelle. +“The Orkneys are islands at some distance from the main land.” + +“Only six miles, Auntie,” said Grimkie. “It is only across the Pentland +Firth, and that is only six miles wide.” + +“But are not the seas in that region very stormy?” + +“Yes, Auntie,” said Grimkie, “they are the stormiest seas in the world. +Those are the seas that the old Norsemen used to navigate, between the +coasts of Norway and Scotland, and the Orkney and Shetland Islands and +Iceland. The Norsemen were the greatest sailors in the world. They +lived almost always on the water, and the harder it blew the better +they liked it. I want to go and see where they used to sail.” + +Grimkie had recently been studying history at the Chateau, and it was +there that he had learned about the wonderful exploits which those old +sea kings, as they were sometimes called, used to perform in the ships +in which they navigated these stormy northern seas. They were very rude +and violent men, and they seemed to consider that they had a right to +everything that they could find, no matter where, provided they were +strong enough to take it. The richest or the most daring among them, +who found means to build or buy one or more vessels, would enlist a +party of followers, and with this horde make descents upon any of the +coasts in all those regions, and plunder the people of their cattle, +or seize their little town. Sometimes they would take possession of +certain places on the coast and make agreements with the people living +there, that if they would give them a certain portion of their cattle +every year, they would protect them from any other marauders who might +come to rob them. This the people would consent to do, and thus the +foundation was laid for territorial governments, on the different +coasts adjoining these northern seas. + +In process of time the Norsemen and their descendants extended their +incursions not only to the islands north of Scotland and to Scotland +itself, but also to the coasts of England and Ireland, and at last even +of France, where they settled a country, which, from their occupancy of +it, received the name of Normandy, which name it retains to the present +day. + +It was among these rude men, and in these boisterous and terrible seas, +where a dismal twilight reigns almost supreme for half the year, and +winds and fogs and ice, and sweeping and impetuous tides, have almost +continual possession of the sea, that the progenitors of the present +race of British and American seamen had their origin. The case is +often referred to in history, as affording a conspicuous illustration +of the effect which the encountering of difficulty and danger produces, +in stimulating the exertions of men, and developing the highest +capacities of their nature. + +“There is another reason,” said Grimkie, “why I should like to go +_now_ to the Orkney Islands, and that is because it is so near the +summer solstice. I have a great desire to get as far north as I can in +the time of the summer solstice. Even here the sun rises now between +three and four, and it is quite light at two. In the Orkneys there can +scarcely be any night at all.” + +Grimkie it seems had been studying astronomy as well as history, at +the Chateau, and so he was quite learned about the summer solstice and +other such things. It may be well, however, for me to explain, for +the sake of the younger portion of my readers, that the phrase summer +solstice refers, for the northern hemisphere, to that portion of the +year, when the sun, in his apparent motion, comes farthest to the +north, as the winter solstice relates to that portion of the year when +the sun declines farthest to the south. + +The summer solstice occurs on the twenty-first or twenty-second of +June, and the winter solstice on the twenty-first or twenty-second of +December. + +In the summer solstice the days are longest and the nights shortest. In +the winter solstice the days are shortest and the nights longest—that +is, to all people living in northern latitudes. + +Now it is a very curious circumstance, the cause of which it would be +somewhat difficult to explain without showing it by means of a globe, +that the difference in length between the days and the nights increases +greatly the farther north we go. On or near the equator the difference +is very little, at any part of the year. The days throughout the whole +year are very nearly twelve hours long, and the nights too. At the +pole, however, if it were possible for any one to reach the pole, the +day would continue during the whole twenty-four hours for six months +in the year, and then the night would continue through the whole +twenty-four hours during the remaining six months. In the latitude of +the southern part of Greenland, the days, at the time of the summer +solstice, are more than eighteen hours long, and the nights not quite +six. + +There is another remarkable phenomenon too, to be observed in high +northern latitudes, in the time of the summer solstice, which Grimkie +was very desirous of verifying by his own observation, and that is +the long continuance of the twilight, and the very early appearance of +the dawn. The reason of this is that the path of the sun is so oblique +to the horizon, or in other words the sun goes down in so slanting +a direction, that it is a long time after sunset before he gets low +enough to withdraw his light entirely from view. + +“I should think,” said Grimkie, “that in the Orkney Islands it would be +light nearly all night. The sun does not set there now till after nine +o’clock, and it rises again before three, and so I should think the +twilight would not be over before the dawn would begin. And I want to +go and see if it really is so.” + +“It would be very curious indeed,” said Florence, “to have it light all +night, and no moon. I should like to see it myself, if it really is so. + +“But then,” she added, after a pause, “we should have to sit up all +night to see it.” + +“No,” said Grimkie. “We might get up from time to time, and look out +the window. Or perhaps we might be travelling all night somewhere, and +then we should see it.” + +After some farther conversation, Mrs. Morelle said that she would not +decide at once in respect to Grimkie’s plan, but would wait until she +had obtained some farther information. + +“Or rather,” she said, “until _you_ have obtained some farther +information for me. After breakfast you may go to a bookstore and buy +a good travelling map of Scotland, and also a railway guide. Florence +and John may go with you, if they please. Then some time during the day +you may study out the different ways of going, and see which you think +is the best way. You must find out where the steamer sails from too, to +take us across the six miles of water. Then at dinner to-day you can +tell me what you have found out, and show me by the map, exactly which +way we shall have to go, and what sort of conveyances we shall have for +the different portions of the journey. Then when I have all the facts +before me I can decide.” + +Grimkie accordingly bought the map and the guide book, and he spent +more than two hours that day in studying them so as to make himself as +thoroughly acquainted as possible with every thing pertaining to the +route. Mrs. Morelle did not assist him in these researches. In fact she +was out shopping during most of the time while Grimkie was making them. +Besides she thought it best to leave him to investigate the case as +well as he could himself, in the first instance, without any aid. + +Accordingly, when the party were assembled for dinner that day, and +just before the waiter brought the dinner in, Mrs. Morelle asked +Grimkie what sort of report he had to make about the way of reaching +the Orkney Islands. + +“I have some bad news for you, in the first place,” said Grimkie. “We +shall have a great deal more than six miles to go in a steamer.” + +“How is that?” asked Mrs. Morelle. + +“Because there is no steamer that goes across in the shortest place,” +said Grimkie. “There is a sail boat that goes that way, to take the +mails, but we could not go in the sail boat very well. The only large +steamer is one that goes from Edinburgh. The only places where it stops +are Aberdeen and Wick. Wick is the last place it touches at. And from +Wick to Kirkwall, which is the town where we land in the Orkneys, it is +about sixty miles. So that we should have a steamer voyage of five or +six hours to take.” + +“That is bad news indeed,” said Mrs. Morelle. + +“But then there is one thing favorable about it,” continued Grimkie, +“and that is that there is only six miles of the voyage that is in an +open sea. We should be sheltered by the land on one side all the way, +excepting for about six miles. We might at any rate go as far as Wick, +and then see how the weather is. If the sea is smooth and calm, then +we might go on board the steamer. If not we might wait for the next +steamer or give it up altogether. All the way from here to Wick +there will be no difficulty. It will be a very pleasant journey.” + +[Illustration: Visit to the Orkney Islands] + +Grimkie then unfolded his map in order to explain to his aunt the +general features of the country so far as they affected the different +modes of travelling to the north of Scotland. + +“Here is Wick,” said Grimkie, pointing to the situation of that town +on the northwest coast of Scotland. It lies as the reader will see by +the map, north of a great bay formed by the union of Murray and Dornock +Firths. Grimkie pointed out the situation of Wick and also that of +Inverness, which lies in the bottom of the bay, at the head of Murray +Firth. + +“The steamer,” he says, “sails from Edinburgh once a week. She touches +at Aberdeen, for that is directly in her way, on the eastern coast.” + +Here Grimkie pointed out the situation of Aberdeen. + +“But she does not go to Inverness,” continued Grimkie, “although that +is a very large and important town, because that would take her too +much out of her way. So she steers right across the mouth of the bay, +where she must be in the open sea for some time, and makes for Wick. +There she takes in freight and passengers, and then sails again north +along the coast to the Orkney Islands. The town where she stops in the +Orkneys is Kirkwall. After that she sails on and goes to the Shetland +Islands, fifty or sixty miles farther over the open sea.” + +“But Grimkie,” said Mrs. Morelle, “why did not you propose to go to the +Shetland Islands instead of the Orkneys, while you were about it? You +would be still more among the Norsemen’s seas there, and the nights +would be still shorter.” + +“Ah!” said Grimkie, “that was my discretion, Auntie. I should like very +much to go on to the end of the route, and to see the Shetland ponies, +but I knew that you and Florence would not like so long a voyage, and +so I only proposed going to the Orkneys.” + +“That _was_ discretion indeed,” said Mrs. Morelle. “But tell us the +rest of the plan. How about getting to Wick?” + +“The next stage this side of Wick,” said Grimkie, “is Inverness. From +Inverness to Wick we should go by stage-coach. That we should all like. +You said the other day, on board ship, that you would like one more +good ride in an English stage-coach, and here is an excellent chance. +The road winds in and out to pass round the lochs and firths, and then +coasts along the sea delightfully. At least so my guide book says. +There is one splendid pass which it goes through, equal to Switzerland.” + +“I should like that very much,” said Mrs. Morelle. “And now how about +getting to Inverness?” + +“There are three ways,” said Grimkie. “We can go by the railroads on +the eastern side of the island, or by coaches and posting up through +the center, or by inland steam navigation on the western side.” + +Grimkie then went on to explain what he had learned by long study of +the maps and guide books during the day. The information which he +communicated was substantially as follows: + +The western part of Scotland north of Glasgow is so mountainous, and +so intersected in every direction with long and narrow bays setting in +from the sea, and also with inland lakes, that no railroad can well +be made there. By connecting these lakes, however, and by cutting +across one or two narrow necks of land, and making canals and locks +along the sides of some rapid rivers, a channel of inland navigation +has been opened, by which steamers can pass all the way from Glasgow +to Inverness, through the very heart of the country. The route of the +steamers in taking this voyage, for some portion of the way, lies +along the shore of the sea, but it is in places where the water is so +sheltered by islands and by lofty promontories and headlands, that the +ocean swell has very little access to it in any part of the way. + +On the eastern coast, on the other hand, the country is comparatively +smooth and well cultivated, and a line of railroad extends on this +side all the way from Edinburgh to Inverness. Thus the party might, +as Grimkie explained the case to them, either go, up to Inverness +from Edinburgh by railroad, on the eastern side, through a smooth and +beautiful country filled with green and fruitful fields, and with +thriving villages and towns,—or by steamboat from Glasgow on the +western side, among dark mountains and frowning precipices, and wild +but beautiful solitudes. Florence voted at once and very eagerly in +favor of the mountains. + +“Then there is a third course still that we can take,” said Grimkie; +“we can go up through the center of the island.” + +“And how shall we travel in that case?” asked Mrs. Morelle. + +“There is no railroad yet through the center,” said Grimkie, “and no +steamboat route. So we should have to go by coach, or else by a hired +carriage.” + +“And what sort of a country is it?” asked Florence. + +“Some parts of it are very beautiful,” said Grimkie, “and some parts +are very wild. We should go through the estates of some of the grandest +noblemen in Great Britain. The guide book says that one duke that lives +there planted about twenty-five millions of trees on his grounds, but I +don’t believe it.” + +“It _may_ be so,” said Mrs. Morelle. + +“Twenty-five millions is a great many,” said Grimkie. + +“I don’t see where he could get so many trees,” said John. + +“Probably he raised them from seed in his own nurseries,” said Mrs. +Morelle. + +“He could not have nurseries big enough to raise so many,” said John. + +“Let us see,” said Grimkie. “Suppose he had a nursery a mile square +and the little trees grew in it a foot apart. We will call a mile five +thousand feet. It is really more than five thousand feet, but we will +call it that for easy reckoning. That would give us five thousand rows +and five thousand trees in a row—five thousand times five thousand.” + +Grimkie took out his pencil and figured with it for a moment, on the +margin of a newspaper, and then said, + +“It makes exactly twenty-five millions. So that if he had a nursery a +mile square, and planted the trees a foot apart, he would have just +enough.” + +“Never mind the Duke of Athol’s trees,” said Mrs. Morelle. “Let us +finish planning our journey.” + +But here the door opened and two waiters came in bringing the dinner. +So the whole party took their seats at the table. Afterward, while +they were sitting at the table, Mrs. Morelle asked Grimkie what he +had concluded upon as the best way for them to take of all the three +which he had described, in case they should decide to go to the Orkney +Islands. + +“You see, Auntie,” said he, “we shall of course go by railway from here +to Glasgow, and it will make a pleasant change to take the steamboat +there. It is a beautiful steamboat and excellently well managed. It +is used almost altogether for pleasure travelling, and every thing +is as nice in it as a pin. Then it must be very curious to see the +green glens and the sheep pastures, and the highland shepherds on the +mountains, as we are sailing along. Then when we got to Inverness we +shall change again into the stage-coach, to go to Wick, and at Wick we +shall take the deep sea steamer. So we shall have a series of pleasant +changes all the way.” + +“I am not sure how pleasant the last one will be,” said Mrs. Morelle. + +“If we have pleasant weather and a smooth sea, I think it will be very +pleasant indeed,” said Grimkie. “It will be amusing to think how far we +are going away, and also to see what kind of people there will be going +to the Orkney and Shetland Islands.” + +“But suppose it should not be pleasant weather and a smooth sea.” + +“Then we will not go,” said Grimkie. “We will stop at Wick and come +back again, if we do not wish to wait for the next steamer. It will be +a very curious and interesting journey to Wick, even if we do not go +any farther at all.” + +Mrs. Morelle said that she would consider the subject, and give her +decision the next morning. + +The next morning she told the children that she had concluded to go, +and to follow the plan which Grimkie had marked out for the journey. + +“But there is one thing that we must not overlook,” said she. “We must +be sure that we have got money enough. So you must make a calculation +how long it will take us to go, and how much it will cost. Of course +you can not calculate exactly, but you can come near enough for our +purpose. When you have made the calculation, put down the items on +paper and show it to me.” + +Grimkie made the calculation as his aunt had requested. He did not +attempt to estimate the expense of each day precisely. That would have +been impossible. He reckoned in general the hotel expenses, all the +way, at so much a day, from the number of days which it would require, +and then from the railway guide and other books he found what the fares +would be for the travelling part of the work. He also made a liberal +allowance for porterage, coach hire, and other such things. When he had +made out his account he gave it to Mrs. Morelle, and she showed it to +the keeper of the hotel, and asked him if he thought that was a just +estimate. Mr. Lynn, after examining it carefully, said that he thought +it was a very good estimate indeed, and that the allowances were all +liberal; and as the total came entirely within the amount which Mrs. +Morelle had with her in sovereigns, she concluded that it would be safe +to proceed. + +The party accordingly went to the station that very afternoon and took +passage for Carlisle, a town near the frontier of Scotland, and on the +way to Glasgow. + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + +THE RAILWAY RIDE. + + +“Now, Florence,” said Grimkie, when the cab arrived at the station, +and stopped for the party to get out, “now we shall see which is the +best—an English railroad ride, or an American one.” + +A man in a peculiar velveteen dress of a bronze green color, and with a +badge upon his arm to mark his official character, came with a barrow, +and in a very respectful manner asked where the party were going. + +“To Carlisle,” said Grimkie. + +“Very well,” said the man. “If you will follow me to the platform I +will show you where to get the tickets.” + +So saying the porter put the trunks and all the parcels carefully upon +his barrow, and led the way through an arched passage into the interior +of the station. Grimkie paid the cabman, and then, with the rest of the +party, followed the porter. + +When they entered the station, a remarkable scene presented itself +to view. Florence looked about with great surprise and admiration. +She saw an immense space covered with a glass roof, with platforms +flagged with stone along the sides, and great numbers of trains on the +different tracks in the center. Great hissing locomotives were moving +to and fro, on these tracks, and parties of travellers, with porters +wheeling their trunks and parcels on their barrows, were moving in +various directions along the platforms. There were doors opening into +pretty rooms, with signs over them, marked, First Class Waiting Rooms, +and Second Class Waiting Rooms, and First Class Refreshment Rooms, and +the like. One of the objects which most strongly attracted Florence’s +attention, was a very elegant little book stall, with a great variety +of entertaining books displayed on the shelves of it, together with +prints, newspapers and periodicals, all neatly arranged on open +shelves, or behind glass sashes. + +But there was not time to stop and look at these things, for the porter +went on, and it seemed necessary to follow him. He took the barrow near +to one of the trains which was standing upon the track, and stopping +there, he said to Grimkie, + +“You have plenty of time, sir. The train does not go for twenty +minutes. Your luggage will be quite safe here, and if you will come +with me I will show you the waiting-room, and then I will come and tell +you when it is time to get the tickets.” + +“Can’t I get the tickets now?” asked Grimkie. + +“Not quite yet, sir,” said the porter. “The ticket office for this +train will be open in about ten minutes.” + +So saying, the porter led the way to the first class waiting room, and +the whole party went in. They found a spacious and handsomely furnished +room, with a great table in the center, and very comfortable-looking +sofas and arm-chairs against the walls. On one side was a door opening +into the refreshment room, where they saw a large table elegantly +set, as if for a sumptuous dinner. Beyond was a counter loaded with +decanters, plates of fruits, tarts, pies, and all sorts of delicacies, +and with one or two very tidy-looking girls behind it, ready to wait +upon customers. + +“What nice rooms!” said Florence. + +“Yes,” said Grimkie. “These are for the first class passengers.” + +“How did the porter know that we were going first class?” asked +Florence. + +“He knew by our looks,” said Grimkie; “besides, he knew by our being +Americans. Americans always take the first class. They don’t go for +marking themselves publicly as second rate people, and so whether they +are rich or poor, they all rush into the first class carriages.” + +“Who told you that?” asked Florence. Florence knew very well that +Grimkie was quoting what somebody else had said, for the language did +not sound at all as if it were original with him. + +“A gentleman on board the steamer,” said Grimkie, coolly. + +“Mother,” said Florence, turning to Mrs. Morelle, who had seated +herself comfortably upon one of the sofas, “let us go out on the +platform again. It is a great deal more amusing there than here.” + +“I think so, too,” said Mrs. Morelle. So saying, she rose from her +seat, and they all went together out upon the platform, and began to +walk up and down, amusing themselves with observing what was going on. +Grimkie and John began to read the placards and notices which were +posted up along the walls. Some of them were adorned with pictures +printed in colored inks, and were mounted in handsome frames. + +While they were looking at these things, the porter came again and told +Grimkie that the ticket office was now open, and he proceeded to show +him the way to it. Grimkie bought the tickets, and then the porter led +the way toward the night train. Mrs. Morelle and John went on together +after him, and Grimkie and Florence followed. + +“This is very nice,” said Florence, “to have a man wait upon us in this +way, and show us exactly what we are to do.” + +“Yes,” said Grimkie, “but then we have to pay for it.” + +“No,” replied Florence, “for I saw a notice posted up that the men were +not allowed to receive anything whatever from the passengers. If they +do take anything they are to be dismissed.” + +“I don’t mean that we have to pay the _men_,” said Grimkie, “but +the _company_. The fares are a great deal higher in England than in +America. Here they have plenty of servants to wait upon us at the +stations, and they charge accordingly. In America every man takes care +of himself and saves his money.” + +“Not all of it,” said Florence. + +“No, not all of it,” replied Grimkie, “but all that part which the +company would require to employ servants at all the stations to take +care of him. Besides, this porter will expect a sixpence from me, and I +have got one all ready to give to him. You will see how he will manage +to get it slily. The gentleman on board the steamer told me all about +it.” + +By this time the porter had come to the train. The train was not +composed, as in America, of a few long cars, but of a larger number of +carriages, each of which contained three separate compartments, with +doors at the sides. The porter went to one of these carriages, marked +First Class, and opened the door. Grimkie put in some of the small +parcels of the luggage, and the porter put the trunks upon the top. He +kept one bag in his hands and told Grimkie that he would hand it to him +after he got in. So Grimkie got into the carriage and took his seat, +and the porter, after he had put up the trunks upon the top, within the +railing which had been made there to keep them from falling off, and +had covered them with a tarpaulin, took the bag and put it into the +carriage, contriving at the sane time, when he shut the door, to hold +his hand inside of it a moment, in such a way that Grimkie could give +him the sixpence. + +“You will not change carriages, sir,” said he to Grimkie, “until you +get to Carlisle, and then you will find your luggage on the top quite +safe.” + +“Grimkie,” said Florence, as soon as the man had gone. “You ought not +to have given that man a sixpence. He is liable to lose his place for +taking it.” + +“Yes,” said Grimkie. “Provided any body saw him take it.” + +“That makes no difference,” said Florence, “whether any body saw him +take it or not. It makes not the least difference in the world. You +have broken the law.” + +“No,” said Grimkie. “_I_ have not broken any law. There is no law +against the traveller’s giving the sixpence, but only against the +porter’s taking it. _He_ may have broken a law, but I have not.” + +“Oh Grimkie!” said Florence. + +Florence was no match for Grimkie in the logical management of an +argument, and she did not know exactly how to reply to his reasoning +in this instance, though she felt very confident that he was wrong. +Her thoughts were, however, for the present, at once diverted from +the subject, for the train began to move, and in a very few minutes +it appeared that it was entering a dark tunnel. The interior of the +carriage, however, did not become dark, for in proportion as the +day-light faded away the illumination which it had produced was +replaced by a lamp-light which gradually began to appear. Where this +lamp-light could come from was at first a mystery, but, on looking +up, the children saw a lamp burning brightly in a glass which was set +into the top of the carriage over their heads, with a reflector above +it which threw the light down. This light made it very cheerful and +pleasant within the car while the train was passing the tunnel. + +On emerging from the tunnel at the other end a marvelous picture of +verdure and beauty met the view of the travellers, and filled them +with delight. Florence particularly was charmed with the aspect of the +scene. She looked out first at one window and then the other, scarcely +knowing which way to turn in her fear that something would escape her. +The rich and deep green of the fields, the hawthorn hedges, in full +flower, the gardens, the beautiful villas, the charming cottages, +half covered with eglantine and ivy, the little railway stations, +which the train passed from time to time, built substantially of +stone, in very picturesque and endlessly varied forms, and with the +prettiest ornamental gardens which can be imagined surrounding them, or +extending from them each way along the sloping banks which bordered the +track—these and a hundred other objects which came into view in the +most rapid and ever changing succession, kept her in a continual state +of excitement. + +It was about one o’clock when the train left Liverpool, and it reached +Carlisle about half past five. The distance was about a hundred and +thirty miles. The time passed, however, very rapidly. A short time +before the train arrived, Mrs. Morelle asked Grimkie what he was going +to do about a hotel. + +“You know,” said she, “that the agreement is that you are to take the +whole care of the party, just as if you were my courier.” + +A courier is a travelling servant, who is employed by a gentleman +travelling, or by a lady, or a family, to conduct them wherever they +wish to go on their journey. He takes care of all the luggage, knows +which are the good hotels, makes bargains with the keepers of them, +and settles the bills, makes arrangements for horses and carriages +when travelling, and in a word relieves his employers of all trouble +and care, and enables them to make their journey with as much ease and +quiet of mind as if they were merely taking a morning’s drive on their +own grounds at home. + +That is to say, this is the case when the employer of the courier +understands how to manage properly. It is with travelling couriers as +with all other servants; every thing depends upon the principles of +management adopted by the master or mistress. A courier is a means of +great convenience and comfort in travelling, or a source of continual +vexation and trouble, according to the tact or want of tact displayed +by the traveller himself, in employing and directing him. + +Grimkie looked a little at a loss when his aunt asked him what hotel he +was going to. He said he had intended to have asked some gentleman in +the cars, supposing that the cars would be large, as in America, and +that there would be a great many people in them. But in fact there had +been no one in their compartment of the carriage all the way. He had +looked into his guide book, and the guide book gave the names of two or +three of the hotels in Carlisle, but did not say which was the best. + +“Read us the names, Grimkie,” said Florence. “We can judge something by +the sound of them.” + +So Grimkie opened the book and began to read. + +“There’s the Royal Hotel,” said he. + +“We won’t go there,” said John, “at any rate. We are republicans.” + +“And there’s a hotel called the County Hotel,” continued Grimkie. “It +is in the station.” + +“In the station?” repeated Florence; “let us go there. It will seem +very funny to be at a hotel that is in the station. May we go to any +hotel that we choose, mother?” + +“You may go to any one that Grimkie chooses,” replied Mrs. Morelle. “He +is responsible for finding us comfortable quarters for the night.” + +“I’ll see how the station hotel looks when we get there,” said Grimkie +to Florence, “and if it looks pleasant we will stop there.” + +This plan for deciding the question in respect to the Station Hotel +seemed to be in theory a very good one, but it proved unfortunately +impracticable, for when the train stopped, and Grimkie had helped his +party out from the carriage to the platform, he found no signs of the +hotel to be seen, except two or three porters who wore the badges of +the hotel upon their caps, and one of whom stood ready at once to take +charge of Grimkie’s luggage and to show the way to the hotel. Grimkie, +who had no time for reflection, decided at once to accept the offer, +and as soon as the trunks were handed down and put upon the hotel +porter’s barrow, he followed with Mrs. Morelle and the children where +the porter led. + +They went for some distance along the platform, and then turned to a +side door which led to a long passage gently ascending. At the end of +this passage they ascended some steps and entered a door, and there +turning to the left they came into another long passage which looked +like the entry of the hotel. Apartments of various kinds opened from it +on each side, and waiters were seen carrying dinners and suppers to the +different rooms. At the end of this passage was a sort of office, and +turning round the corner an elegant stair-case came into view, leading +to the stories above. A pretty looking young woman met the party at the +office door. Grimkie said they wanted a sitting-room and two bed-rooms. +The young woman led the way up stairs to show the rooms. + +In about half an hour after this time the whole party were sitting +down, in excellent spirits, and with great appetites, to a very nice +dinner, in an elegant little room, with windows looking out upon a +great area filled with omnibuses and cabs that were waiting for the +arrival of the next train, and upon a street which passed by a spacious +castle-like building that seemed to stand at the entrance to the town. + +After dinner they all went out to take a walk, On entering the town +they found themselves in a narrow street with very ancient but very +solid and substantial looking buildings on either side of it, the +whole entirely unlike any thing which they had ever seen in America. +They passed by several inns which were so quaint and curious in +their structure, and looked so snug and so neat, and so much like the +representations of English inns which they had seen in pictures and +drawing-books, that Florence began to be sorry that they had stopped +at the Station Hotel, which was modern and new, and the rooms in which +were very much like those of a nice hotel in America. + +“Grimkie,” said she, “we made a mistake. We ought to have come to one +of these little old fashioned inns here in the town. See what nice +curtains at the chamber windows. If we had only known about these.” + +“Ah yes,” said Grimkie. “If we could only manage when we are coming +into a strange town, to have a chance to see all the hotels and inns +beforehand, we could choose a great deal better.” + +“You made a great mistake this time,” said Florence. + +“Next time then _you_ shall choose,” said Grimkie. + +Florence was prepared for some sort of tart reply from Grimkie, to her +finding fault with him, but when she heard so kind and polite a reply, +it produced a reaction in her own feelings. After a moment’s pause she +said, + +“Grimkie, it was _I_ that chose this time. Going to the Station Hotel +was my plan, after all.” + +“Was it?” said Grimkie; “well you shall choose the next time too, if +you like.” + +The principal object of the walk which our party were taking at +this time, was to visit the Cathedral of Carlisle. It was the first +cathedral which the children had had an opportunity of seeing. They +found a very ancient and venerable pile, with ruins around it, and +several little streets, and open spaces, with pretty houses fronting +them, all of which seemed to belong to the cathedral, for they were +enclosed with it in a wall which separated the whole precinct from +the rest of the town. This precinct is called the cathedral close. It +pertains exclusively to the cathedral, and is under ecclesiastical +jurisdiction, in a measure, and contains the dwellings of the various +clergymen and laymen that are attached to the cathedral service. + +There was a certain air of solemn stillness and repose reigning about +the precincts of the cathedral, when our party entered the close, +which was very impressive. The venerable walls of the cathedral itself +crumbling with age, the old inscriptions and sculptured images, now in +some cases almost wholly effaced by the decay of the stone,—the masses +of ruined walls, the remains of ancient cloisters or chapels which +were seen here and there rising from the patches of greensward,—the +smooth and solitary walks—and above all the mournful chirping of the +rooks and swallows and daws that were flying about among the turrets +and parapets far above, or in the tops of the ancient trees—combined +to impart a peculiar expression of solemn and melancholy grandeur to +the scene, which was wholly indescribable. + +After rambling about the town and the environs till after ten o’clock, +the party returned to the Station Hotel, where they all went to bed +without candles, for it was not yet dark. + +The next morning, soon after breakfast, Grimkie paid the bill, and +they all went down to the platform to take the train which was to +leave about half-past eight o’clock for Glasgow. They were soon all +comfortably seated in the carriage, and five minutes afterward the +train was in motion. They had a delightful journey to Glasgow, where +they arrived safely a little after noon. + + + + +CHAPTER X. + +THE HIGHLAND GLENS. + + +“Now,” said Grimkie, when the party arrived at the hotel in Glasgow, +“we have come to the end of the first stage of our journey, that is the +railway stage of it. The next is the steamboat stage.” + +“I am glad of that,” said Florence. “The railway ride was very +pleasant, but I am ready for a change.” + +Grimkie had learned in the course of the conversations which he had +held with his fellow-passengers on board the ship at sea, that it was +best, in travelling in Scotland, especially among the Highlands, to +take as little baggage as possible. + +“On whichever side of Scotland you go up,” said one of these gentlemen, +“you will be likely to come down on the other side, so that your +journey will either begin at Glasgow and end at Edinburgh, or it +will begin at Edinburgh and end at Glasgow. You will find it better +therefore, when you are ready to set out from either of those towns, +to put all that you will want for the journey in one trunk, and send +all the rest of your baggage across to some hotel in the other town, to +wait there for you till you come back.” + +Grimkie explained all this to his aunt, at the breakfast table at +their hotel in Glasgow. Mrs. Morelle looked at her travelling map of +Scotland, and she saw that Edinburgh and Glasgow were in fact situated +as is represented above. + +“We shall probably come down from the Orkneys on that side of the +island,” said she, “and I think it would be convenient to have our +trunks go there, all except one—but then, Grimkie, we don’t know how +to send them there. I suppose there is some kind of express, if we only +knew where the office was.” + +“Ah, but you remember, Auntie, that father told us that all we had to +do was to be able to tell distinctly what we wanted, and the people +here would find out how it was to be done.” + +“That was in the public offices,” said Mrs. Morelle. + +“It will do just as well in the hotels I expect, Auntie,” said Grimkie. +“May I ring the bell and try?” + +Mrs. Morelle gave the required permission, and Grimkie rang the bell. +Very soon the waiter appeared. + +“I want to see about sending some baggage to Edinburgh,” said Grimkie. + +“Yes, sir,” said the waiter. “I’ll send up Boots directly.” + +Boots is the familiar name by which the porter is designated in the +English inns. In these inns moreover every servant has his own definite +duties to perform, and these are never on any account intermingled. It +is the porter’s duty to know about railway trains, and conveyances of +all kinds, and about baggage, and sending letters and parcels, and all +such things. The waiter’s duty, on the other hand, is confined entirely +to the service of the table, and to acts of personal attendance upon +the guests within the hotel. If any question arises pertaining to +transportation or conveyance of any kind, he has but one answer—“Yes, +sir, I’ll send Boots.” + +In a few minutes the porter appeared, cap in hand. + +“We want to inquire about sending some of our luggage to Edinburgh,” +said Grimkie. “We are going to make a tour in the north of Scotland, +and we thought it would be best to send most of our luggage to +Edinburgh to wait there till we come.” + +“Yes, sir,” said the porter, “that will be much the best way for you.” + +“And how shall we manage it?” asked Grimkie. “What have I to do?” + +“You have nothing at all to do,” said the porter, “except to tell me +the name of the hotel where you will go—or put it upon your luggage, +and leave it in your room here when you go away. I will attend to it +all, and you will find it quite safe at the hotel when you arrive +there.” + +“And how about paying?” asked Grimkie. “Shall we pay you?” + +“No, sir,” said the porter, “you will have nothing to pay here. It will +not be much, and they will pay at the hotel in Edinburgh and put it in +your bill.” + +“That will be exactly the thing, Auntie,” said Grimkie. “Only,” he +added, “we do not know what hotel we shall go to.” + +On being asked by Mrs. Morelle, the porter gave them the address of a +good hotel in Edinburgh, which he said was in a pleasant situation, and +a well kept house. He also brought Grimkie a package of gum labels, +such as are used in England for labelling baggage. Grimkie wrote Mrs. +Morelle’s name on several of these labels, and also the name of the +hotel which the porter had given him, and then, after his aunt had +selected from all the trunks what she thought would be required for the +whole party during the tour in Scotland, and had put them in the one +which she was to take, Grimkie with the assistance of the porter locked +and strapped the others, and put the labels upon them. + +The party spent the rest of the day in rambling about Glasgow, and in +amusing themselves with the various objects of interest which met their +view in the streets and in the environs, and the next morning before +breakfast, they went on board the steamer Iona, which was to take them +to Inverness. + +They enjoyed the voyage exceedingly although at first Florence was +somewhat disappointed in respect to the steamer, which she had expected +would be as much superior, in respect to its size, and its decorations, +to those plying upon the North River, as Europe is generally considered +superior to America. Instead of this, the Iona was comparatively +quite small, but it was very neatly arranged, and there was a small, +but richly furnished cabin below, which looked exceedingly snug and +comfortable. + +After rambling about the steamer until they had explored it in every +part, the children went with Mrs. Morelle and chose a place upon the +deck at a corner near the companion-way, where they could enjoy the +views on every side, and at the same time, could be comfortably seated +all the time, if they chose, on camp-stools and benches. + +[Illustration: ON BOARD THE IONA.] + +Here they remained for several hours enjoying the most charming +succession of views of mountain scenery that can be imagined. Grimkie, +by means of the maps and guide books, followed the course of the +steamer, and found out the names of all the villages, and castles, and +country seats, which came successively into view, and pointed them out +to his aunt and Florence who examined them attentively, especially the +old castles, by means of the opera glass. + +The course of the steamer lay through a succession of channels, lakes +and sounds, most of which were connected with the sea, but they were +so hemmed in by the promontories and islands which bordered them, as +to make it seem to the party as if they were navigating inland waters +altogether. The channels of water were so narrow too, in most cases, +that the land was very near. It was generally more like sailing upon +a river, than upon an arm of the sea. The land was everywhere very +mountainous too, and seemed to rise very abruptly from the water’s +edge, though often it was bordered near the margin of the water, by +villages and towns, and elegant country seats with green fields and +beautiful gardens adjoining them, and parks and pleasure grounds, all +of which presented a succession of most charming pictures to the view. + +In other places the shores of the _loch_, as the Scotch call such +sheets of water as these, were wild and solitary,—immense sheep +pastures extending up the mountain sides to a great height, with +flocks of sheep, and dogs, and Highland shepherds seen here and there, +standing motionless to gaze upon the steamer as it glided swiftly by. + +As this line of steamers was intended almost exclusively for the +accommodation of tourists, journeying for health or pleasure, the +arrangements on board were all made with reference to rendering +the voyage as comfortable and as agreeable as possible. One of the +arrangements made with this view was to stop at night, half way between +Glasgow and Inverness, at a place situated in the midst of some of the +grandest and most romantic scenery, in order to give the passengers +a quiet night’s sleep, at a spacious and elegant hotel, built there +expressly for the purpose. The steamer was to touch too at a great many +different places along the route, wherever there was a pretty village +on the margin of the water, or any grand or picturesque scenery at a +little distance in the interior. When Mrs. Morelle and her party came +on board, they had not determined whether to proceed directly to +Inverness, or to stop at Rothsay, or Oban, or Fort William, or at some +other interesting point, with a view of continuing their journey on a +subsequent day. + +“We will not decide,” said Mrs. Morelle, “until we get on board the +steamer, and see how we like it, and what the weather is.” + +When, however, the party had embarked and the voyage was begun, they +were all for the first hour so much interested in the wonderful beauty +and grandeur of the scenery which everywhere met their view, that they +did not think of the question how far they should go, until Grimkie saw +the man coming round among the passengers to receive their money, and +give them tickets. Before he had time to say anything about it, the man +came to where Mrs. Morelle was sitting and said he would take the fare. + +“How much is it, sir?” asked Grimkie. + +The man replied by asking how far they were going. Grimkie looked to +his aunt, not knowing himself exactly what to say. + +“We are going to Inverness,” said she, “but we had not fully decided +whether to go directly through, or to stop somewhere, for a day.” + +“You can pay through, madam,” said the man, “and take a ticket, and +then you can break the journey where you please. The tickets are good +for a month.” + +“Ah,” said Grimkie, “that will be just the thing for us.” So he took +out his purse and counted out the number of sovereigns which the man +required, and received the tickets. + +The tickets were made in a very curious manner. They were printed upon +thin paper, and lined upon the back with green morocco, and were then +folded in three, that is, the upper part was folded down, and the lower +part up, and in this condition they looked like so many little green +wallets. Florence and John were very much interested in examining their +tickets, and they wished to have the custody of them themselves. But +Grimkie said no. He was responsible for all the payments, and he must +take charge of the tickets himself—but they might have them to look at +as often as they pleased. + +John was very much taken with the ticket man’s phrase “break the +journey,” and he began to be quite desirous that _their_ journey should +be broken at some point or other along the route. His mother said that +she had no objection to that. So she commissioned Grimkie to look over +the map and the guide books, and read the descriptions of the different +places along the route, and of the objects of interest to be seen in +the vicinity of them, and so select a place where in his opinion it +would be best to stop. + +Grimkie immediately set himself to this work, and after a good deal +of patient investigation and research, he came to the conclusion to +recommend that they should stop at Ben Nevis. Ben Nevis, he found, lay +close upon their course. + +Ben Nevis has usually been considered as the highest mountain in +Scotland. It is any rate altogether the most celebrated. There is a +little village at the base of it, named Fort William, where travellers +land who wish to ascend the mountain. This village is at the head of a +loch, and all the environs of it are romantic and beautiful. Grimkie +found a picture of Fort William in one of the guide books, and showed +it to his aunt, and to Florence and John. He also read what the guide +book said about the place, and the environs of it, and the mode of +ascending the mountain. + +“I have only one objection to stopping there,” said Mrs. Morelle, “and +that is that I do not like climbing mountains very well.” + +“But, Auntie,” said Grimkie, “we need not go up the mountain unless we +choose to do it.” + +“True,” said Mrs. Morelle, “but I am pretty sure you children will want +to go up, and I shall not like to have you go, unless I go too.” + +“Then, Auntie, how would you like to stop at Oban?” + +“What is there remarkable at Oban?” asked Mrs. Morelle. + +“It is a pretty little town on the western coast, built along the curve +of a bay, under high hills,” said Grimkie, half reading from his guide +book. “It is a sort of central point and rendezvous for travellers +in the western Highlands, being the place of departure for many +excursions.” + +“What sort of excursions?” asked Mrs. Morelle. + +“The principal are steamboat excursions among the outlying islands,” +said Grimkie, “such as to Fingal’s cave on the island of Staffa, and +the old monastery in Iona.” + +“Should we be exposed to the swell of the sea in going to those +islands?” asked Mrs. Morelle. + +“I think from the map that we should,” said Grimkie. + +“Then,” said Mrs. Morelle, laughing, “I would rather stop at Ben Nevis. +I would rather take the mountain than the sea.” + +“I thought so, Auntie,” said Grimkie. + +And so it was decided that the party should land at Fort William, at +the base of Ben Nevis. + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + +BEN NEVIS. + + +Mrs. Morelle was charmed with the appearance of Ben Nevis and its +environs when the steamer drew near. The slopes of the mountain seemed +to commence almost at the margin of the water, and they rose in solemn +grandeur to a vast height, the portions near the summit being covered +with great patches of snow. Lower down, the mountain sides were rounded +and smooth, and covered with rich green and brown vegetation, which +glowed in the setting sun and seemed as soft as the richest velvet. +Along the margin of the water were extended the buildings of the town, +with vessels of various size lying at anchor near. + +The steamer stopped at some distance from the shore, just as Grimkie +and John, who had been forward to see about getting out the trunk, +came back to see if Mrs. Morelle and Florence were ready. Mrs. Morelle +looked alarmed. + +“Why, Grimkie!” said she, “are they going to land us in a boat. I +thought they would go up to the pier. I am afraid to land in a boat.” + +“Then we can go on,” said Grimkie, “to the end of the sail. It is not a +great deal farther.” + +“But I should like to stop and see Ben Nevis, too,” said Mrs. Morelle +hesitating—“if it were not for landing in a boat—going down such a +steep and narrow ladder.” + +“There can’t be any real danger, Auntie,” said Grimkie, “but still we +will go on if you prefer. They land by boats at half the places where +we stop.” + +This was very true, and Mrs. Morelle had taken great interest in +watching the progress of such landings, several times during the day. +It was very curious to see the boat in such cases come out from the +land, and lie upon its oars on the water in the track of the steamer, +until the steamer came up, and the paddle-wheels were backed. Then +the man standing on the guard would throw a rope to the boat, which +would be caught by a man at the bows of it, and immediately made fast, +by which means the boat would be drawn on through the water, by the +steamer which was not yet entirely at rest. + +The boat was soon pulled in under the little step-ladder leading from +the deck, which had previously been let down, and then the passengers +who were to land would descend, guarded carefully, by strong boatmen +reaching up from the boat to the outer side of the ladder, to prevent +the possibility of their falling into the water, in case of any misstep. + +As fast as the passengers reached the boat, they stepped over the +thwarts and took their seats in the stern. Then the trunks and other +parcels of baggage were passed down. Then the boatmen would take the +oars again, the rope was cast off, the boat was pushed away, the +paddle-wheels recommenced their motion, and the steamer went on, +leaving the boat behind to struggle with the waves as best it could, +and make its slow way to the shore. + +All this had been very interesting to see, as it appeared to the +passengers who stood leaning over the bulwarks and looking down upon it +from the deck above, but Mrs. Morelle thought that it would not be very +agreeable to go through. She was afraid, in the first place, to go down +such a steep and narrow ladder, especially when the resting place was +so unstable and insecure at the bottom. Then she was still more afraid +of the pitching and tossing of the boat, in the surges made by the +paddle-wheels when the steamer moved away. + +She did not, however, hesitate long, for a moment’s reflection +convinced her that these fears were imaginary. There could not possibly +be any real danger in the mode of landing adopted, as the ordinary and +usual method for such a class of travellers as those on board this +steamer. So she banished her fears, and rising from her seat, said that +she would go. + +By this time the boat had made fast along side the steamer, and the +passengers who were to go on shore were going down the ladder. Mrs. +Morelle found no difficulty in following them, Florence and John +followed her. Grimkie remained at the head of the ladder to the last. +When all had descended that were going, the trunks were put down, and +then the boat pushed off, and the steamer resumed her voyage.[1] + +[Footnote 1: See Frontispiece.] + +The next morning, while at breakfast at the inn at Fort William, +Grimkie proposed to his aunt that they should all make an excursion up +the mountain. + +“Not to the top of it, Auntie,” said he, “but only so far as you find +you will like to go. We will get a guide and set off together. We +will ride to the foot of the mountain. Then we will begin to walk up. +You shall go first and we will follow you, and we will not ask to go +any farther than you like. We will go as slowly, and stop to rest as +often, as you please; and then when we get high enough for a good view, +we can turn about and come back again.” + +There could of course be no objection to so exceedingly reasonable a +proposal as this, and Mrs. Morelle said at once that she should like +to make an excursion up the mountain, on those conditions, very much +indeed. + +“If I walk slowly,” said she, “I can walk two hours.” + +“That will take us up pretty high,” said Grimkie. “It only takes two +hours and a half to get to the top. So you and Florence may get ready +Auntie, and John and I will go down and see about a carriage and a +guide.” + +The usual mode would have been for Grimkie to have rung the bell and +called for Boots, and so have made the arrangement for the carriage and +the guide through him. But there were some preparations that he wished +to make secretly, and so he left his aunt and Florence, and went down +to the coffee-room of the hotel. He took his seat there at one of the +tables, near a window, and asked the waiter to send Boots in to him. + +When Boots came, Grimkie told him that they were going a little way up +the mountain, and made an arrangement with him to have a dog-cart got +ready immediately, to take them as far as they could go in a carriage, +and also to engage a guide, and to send the guide in to the coffee-room +to see him. In a few minutes the guide came. + +He was a nice tidy-looking young man, with a frank and good-humored +countenance, and a broad Scotch accent in his speech. Grimkie explained +the case to him. + +“We are going up the mountain a little way,” said Grimkie. “We want +to go as far as we can, but my aunt is not used to climbing mountains +much, and so we must go very slowly.” + +“Oh, aye,” said the guide, “the slower ye gang, the higher oop y’ell +get.” + +The guide had had great experience with travelling parties attempting +to ascend the mountain, and he had known many ladies to become tired +and discouraged before reaching the top, just because they could not be +contented to go slowly enough at the beginning. + +After some further discussion and consultation, the plan for the +excursion was matured in all its details. The guide was to go forward +on foot, carrying with him a supply of provisions which Grimkie was +to have made ready, and to wait at the end of the carriage road until +the party in the carriage should come up. The provisions—which the +waiter at the coffee-room subsequently made ready under Grimkie’s +directions—consisted of a bottle of coffee, another of milk, a cold +roast chicken, some sandwiches, two buttered rolls, a little paper of +salt, one plate, one knife, four forks, and a tumbler. All these the +waiter packed carefully in two round wooden boxes, and put the boxes +in a bag. That was the way he said that the guides liked to have their +burdens packed. + +The bag thus arranged was to be put into the dog-cart, to be carried in +that way as far the cart could go, with a view of being taken by the +guide there, and carried by him over his shoulder for the rest of the +ascent. + +When Grimkie had completed these arrangements he went up to his aunt’s +room again, and there he found John who had gone up a moment before +him, remonstrating in a somewhat urgent manner with Florence against +a plan which she entertained of carrying a large guide book up the +mountain, to press flowers in. + +“You can’t carry such a big book as that,” said John. “It’s ridiculous. +We must have every thing as light as possible, in going up a mountain, +Grimkie says so.” + +“But this is the only book I have got,” said Florence, “and I must take +some book. It is very important for me to get some specimens from Ben +Nevis, to carry home for souvenirs.” + +“Then you must bring them down in your hand,” said John. “We can’t +possibly take such a big book as that; can we Grimkie?” + +“I will see about that presently,” said Grimkie. “Come with me, John. I +want you to go somewhere.” + +So John laid down the big book and followed Grimkie down stairs. +Grimkie led the way into the street. + +“Where are you going, Grimkie?” asked John. + +“I am going to see if I can find a bookseller,” said Grimkie. “But you +should not contradict a young lady in that short way. That’s boyish.” + +“How boyish?” said John. + +“Why boys fly in their sisters’ faces in that way sometimes, but no +gentleman ever does.” + +“But Grimkie,” said John, “it is perfectly ridiculous to think of +carrying such a big book as that up a high mountain.” + +“That’s the very reason why you ought to be more gentle in setting her +right,” replied Grimkie. “Do you think a lady likes to have it made to +appear to her face that any thing she says or does is ridiculous?” + +“Then what shall I do?” asked John. + +“You must be more gentle,” said Grimkie. “A lady is like a steamboat; +you can’t turn her short about, by a sudden twitch, when she is going +wrong. You must bring her round by a sweep—in a grand circle—gently +and gracefully. I’ll show you how.” + +By this time the boys arrived at the door of a small bookstore, and +Grimkie immediately went in. John followed him. Grimkie asked a young +woman who stood behind the counter if she had any blotting paper. She +immediately produced half a quire, and Grimkie bought six sheets of it. +These sheets he cut in two with a paper knife, and then after folding +them, cut them again. He then folded them again, thus bringing them +into a snug compass for carrying, that is, as the bookbinders would +say, into an _octavo_ form. The paper as it was when he bought it, was +in a folio form. After he had cut and folded it the first time, it was +in a quarto form, and now after a second folding, by which means each +sheet formed eight leaves, it was put into the octavo form. Another +folding still, which would have made sixteen leaves to the sheet, would +have produced what is called the sixteenmo form. + +Grimkie and John immediately returned to the hotel, carrying the paper +with them. As soon as they arrived, Grimkie went to his room and took a +small portfolio off his table. This portfolio was simply the cover of +a blank book Grimkie had used at the Chateau for some of his exercises. +When it was full and he had no further occasion to use it, he had cut +out the inside neatly, in order to save the cover, which was quite a +pretty one, being made of green morocco. He thought it would make a +nice portfolio. He had accordingly stocked it with small note papers +and envelopes, and had made it serve the purpose of a stationery case, +for his travels. + +He now took out the note paper and his envelopes from it, and then +compared the blotting-paper in its octavo form with the size of +the cover. He found that by folding it once more, that is into the +sixteenmo form, it would fit the cover very well. So he cut it open at +the octavo folding, and then after folding it again he slipped it into +the cover and went to find Florence. + +“Florence,” said he, “how do you think this will do to put your little +flowers in up the mountain? It is made of blotting paper, and that is +much better than the paper of books to press plants in, for it absorbs +the moisture, and so dries the plants quicker, and that makes them +preserve their colors better.” + +“That will be excellent,” said Florence, taking the book and looking at +it with great interest. “But how did you know about that?” + +“Our professor of botany at the Chateau,” said Grimkie, “told us that +it is better to have a book made of blotting paper. Only this book is +not sewed. Could you sew it?” + +“I can sew it in a moment,” said Florence. + +“Then it will do nicely,” said Grimkie. “If you can sew the leaves +together so as to make a book of them, then we can slip them into the +book cover, and that will be all we shall want. I can carry it in my +pocket. You see you don’t want large specimens. The smaller and more +delicate they are the better. Our professor told us that.” + +“Your professor?” repeated Florence. + +“Yes,” replied Grimkie; “he lectured us about it. ‘Young gentlemen,’ +said he, ‘the mode of procedure is very different both in the selection +of flowers and in the method of preserving them, according to the +object you have in view, whether to procure botanical specimens for +purposes of science, or souvenirs and tokens for purposes of sentiment +and love.’” + +Grimkie repeated these words in a tone and manner imitative of a +lecturer making a discourse before an audience, producing thus a very +comical effect, so that both John and Florence laughed outright. + +“Oh, Grimkie!” exclaimed Florence. + +“I don’t believe he said any such things,” added John. + +“We verily did,” replied Grimkie. “‘Young gentlemen,’ said he, ‘when +you have advanced a little farther along the verdant and flowery path +of life, you will sometimes have occasion, in your various wanderings, +to prepare plants and flowers as tokens of remembrance, or of other +sentiments, or as souvenirs of travel. In such cases, gentlemen, select +small and delicate specimens—of graceful forms and pretty colors. +Press them till they are dry between leaves of blotting paper. If +necessary, separate the leaves and stems so as to press and preserve +them separately. You can recompose your flower afterward. Examine the +specimens from time to time while they are drying, and see that the +stems lie in natural and graceful curves, and that the leaves and +petals are smooth, and fully extended. Then when they are thoroughly +dry, arrange the parts anew, and gum them delicately upon a small piece +of white paper, with a suitable inscription beneath, and enclose the +paper in a tinted envelope of the right size to contain it,—and then +when you present it to the Mary, or the Lucy, or the Ellen, for whom it +is intended, she will perceive that you are a young gentleman of taste +and skill, as well as of science.’” + +Grimkie finished this recitation of a portion of the professor’s +lecture with such an air of mock gravity, that Florence and John both +laughed louder than ever. + +“Oh, Grimkie!” said John, “did the professor really say that?” + +“Yes,” said Grimkie, “and we all clapped him.” + +“It seems to me you have pretty funny doings at the Chateau, Grimkie,” +said Florence. + +“We do sometimes,” said Grimkie. “But hark!” he added, “I thought I +heard wheels coming. No they are not coming yet, but we must not waste +any more time. We must get ready. The dog-cart will be here very soon.” + +“Good!” said John, at the same time cutting a caper, to express his joy. + +“But what kind of dogs will they be?” he added, turning to Grimkie. +“Will they be Esquimaux dogs?” + +“There they come,” said Grimkie; “run to the window and see.” + +John supposed that a dog-cart was a cart made to be _drawn_ by dogs. +In this idea he was greatly mistaken, a dog-cart being made to _carry_ +dogs, and not to be drawn by them. It is quite a curious vehicle, +having its origin in the wish of sportsmen to provide some means +of transporting their dogs, as well as themselves and their guns, +when going into the field, so that the dogs may be fresh and in good +condition for their work, when they arrive there. + +It is a very handsomely made vehicle, in the form of a cart. The seat +is double, there being places for two persons to sit on the front +part, facing the horse, and two directly behind them, with their backs +against those of the first two. Underneath this double seat is a box +or recess, for the dogs. The lid which shuts this box, is behind, and +is made to open down in such a manner that when it is opened it is +sustained by a support which holds it in nearly a horizontal position, +where it forms a foot-board for the two persons riding behind to rest +their feet upon. + +The children were all very much interested in examining the form and +construction of the dog-cart when they went down to the door. The +coachman took the right hand front seat. Mrs. Morelle took the other +front seat. John and Florence and Grimkie took the seat behind, where +they were so much crowded at first, that John said he had a great mind +to play that he was a pointer or a setter, and crawl into the box +below. + +After having been shaken together a little while by the jolting of the +carriage—for a dog-cart moves, even upon a smooth road, with a very +jerking and jolting motion—they found themselves quite comfortable, +and they had a very amusing ride. + +When they reached the end of the carriage-road, they found a guide +there ready for them. He took the bag containing the provisions, from +the fore part of the dog-cart where the coachman had put it, and threw +it over his shoulder, in such a manner that one of the boxes hung down +before him, and the other behind. The coachman then took the dog-cart +to a farmer’s near by, to put up the horse, to wait until the party +returned, while the guide, followed by his party, commenced his ascent +of the mountain. + +The path was very good, although rather rugged and steep, but the +country was open, there being in general no trees, but only furze, +broom, whinbushes, and other such shrubs as grow upon the Scottish +Highlands. Grimkie wished very much that his aunt should ascend to the +top of the mountain, but he knew very well that the only hope of her +being able to do so, must depend upon their going very slowly at first. +John and Florence who both felt very fresh and agile, were eager to +press forward, but Grimkie kept them back, stopping continually to +gather flowers, and to look back at the prospect. Whenever he found +a flat stone with a smooth and clear surface, he persuaded his aunt +to sit down, and when she was once seated, he detained her as long as +possible, by talking with her, and amusing her mind with the objects +around her. Then he would point to the next elevation above, and ask +his aunt if she thought she could go up to it; and she would say, “Oh, +yes! I am not tired at all yet.” + +In this way the party sauntered along for more than three hours, +advancing all the time, but in a slow and unconcerned manner, without +thought or care, as if they were out for a walk, without any definite +plan in respect to the end of the excursion. At last, however, about +noon, Mrs. Morelle took out her watch, and expressed surprise to find +how late it was, and said that it was time for her to begin to think +about going home. + +“Look up there, Auntie,” said Grimkie, “where that shepherd is standing +with his dog. There must be a grand lookout from there. Let us go up +as high as that, and there we will have our luncheon, and then, if you +please, we will set out for home.” + +Mrs. Morelle made no objection to going up to the point which Grimkie +had indicated, and they soon attained it. Here they found a spring of +water coming out from under a great rock. Grimkie brought some flat +stones and made seats for the party in a shady and sheltered place, and +then the guide opened the bag and took out the provisions. Mrs. Morelle +was quite surprised to see so abundant a supply of provisions coming to +view. + +“I did not know that we were going to have even a luncheon on the +mountain,” said she, “and here you have got enough, almost, for a +dinner.” + +The party remained at the spring for more than half an hour, and then +Mrs. Morelle found herself so much refreshed by the chicken and the +sandwiches, and especially by the tumbler of cold coffee which Grimkie +mixed for her, that she said she was almost inclined to go on farther; +and when the guide told her that an hour more of easy walking would +bring her to the very top, she said she had half a mind to try to go +there. + +“Do you think I could do it, Grimkie?” said she. + +Grimkie said it was a great thing for a lady to get to the top of Ben +Nevis, but if she felt strong enough to try it, he should like it very +much indeed. She might go on for half an hour more at any rate, and +then if she felt tired she could turn. + +Mrs. Morelle determined to follow this suggestion, and the result was, +that she persevered until she reached the top. + +The wind blew very fresh and cool upon the summit, and the party could +not remain there long. While they did remain, however, they were filled +with wonder and delight at the extent and sublime magnificence of the +view. The mountains lay all around them, clothed with a velvet-like +covering of the softest green, and between them lay an endless number +and variety of lakes and rivers—all sleeping apparently in the +sun—and green fields, and pretty villages, and charming glens, in +endless variety. + +After remaining upon the mountain for about fifteen minutes, they all +set out upon their return. They of course came down the path very +easily, and getting into the dog-cart, when they reached the foot of +the descent, they were driven very rapidly back to the inn. + + + + +CHAPTER XII. + +THE CALEDONIAN CANAL. + + +The route of the steamer from the foot of Ben Nevis to Inverness, +lies along a remarkable chain of lakes, that occupy a long and narrow +valley extending through the very heart of Scotland, in a direction +from southwest to northeast, and reaching from the base of Ben Nevis to +Inverness. The line of these lakes is easily to be seen upon the map. +In a state of nature the lakes were connected by rapid streams flowing +from the center lake, which is the highest, down through the others +each way to the sea. But though the lakes themselves were navigable, +the streams were not. Many years ago, however, as has already been +intimated, deep channels were cut along these streams, and locks made +whereever there was an ascent or descent, so as to form a navigable +communication through the whole distance, which received the name of +the Caledonian canal. + +Mrs. Morelle and her party, remained a day or two at the foot of Ben +Nevis, taking little excursions in the environs, and exploring for +a few miles, in various directions, the glens which open around the +mountain. On the morning of the third day, they took the steamer again, +at a place called Banavie, where there was a large and beautiful hotel, +standing almost by itself in a wild and beautiful place, and surrounded +by gardens and ornamental grounds. A great many of the best inns and +hotels in Scotland, stand thus in secluded places, entirely apart from +the towns, being intended altogether for the accommodation of tourists +journeying for pleasure, and being placed accordingly in the localities +where it is supposed to be most convenient or most agreeable for such +travellers to stop. + +By having rested from the steamer two days, the children were well +prepared to return to it again, and they had a delightful passage +along the canal. Sometimes they found themselves sailing in a very +narrow channel which had been excavated artificially, to connect one +lake with another. Next they would come to a chain of locks, by means +of which the steamer was to be raised up, or let down, from one level +to another; and while the lockmen were engaged in this operation, +which always required some time, the passengers would step out upon +the embankment, and ramble about the neighborhood, or walk on to the +next lock, with a view of getting on board again when the steamer came +to it. Then at length, suddenly the steamer would emerge from the +narrow and artificial channel into one of the lakes, and would glide +swiftly on from one end of it to the other, between the lofty ranges of +mountains which bordered it on either hand. + +In all cases, the course of the steamer was so near to the shore, that +all the features of the scenery could be very distinctly seen, and it +was an endless source of amusement to the children to watch the changes +which were continually taking place, and to explore every hidden recess +of the landscape, and examine every detail with the glass. They saw the +sheep feeding on the mountain sides, watched by the shepherd and his +dog, and the cottages, with Highland children, dressed in the kilt, +playing at the doors, and now and then an elegant travelling carriage +moving along the road at the margin of the water. + +There were a great many mists and clouds floating over the mountain +tops, and these increased toward the middle of the day. For a time +the effect of these clouds was only to add an additional feature of +grandeur to the scenery, by the magnificent forms which the stupendous +masses of vapor assumed on the summits of the mountain chains, and the +mysterious and solemn gloom which they seemed to impart to the deep +valleys, by hanging over them in heavy folds, like those of a curtain, +and diffusing through the recesses which they half concealed, a dark +and impenetrable gloom. Florence said that she could not decide whether +she liked the mountains best when full in view, or when half covered +with clouds. + +“Nor I,” said Grimkie. “Only it is raining from some of those clouds. +All I am afraid of is, that one of them may come and rain upon us.” + +Grimkie’s fears were destined to be realized. In a short time it +began to rain upon the deck of the steamer. Some of the passengers, +especially the ladies, hastily gathering up their maps, and guide +books, and travelling bags, went below. Others drew themselves into as +compact a mass as possible, and spreading an umbrella over their heads, +kept their seats. Some gentlemen put on India rubber coats, which they +seemed to have ready at hand, and went on walking up and down the deck +just as before. One of the men belonging on board the steamer came up +from below, and took up all the cushions which were not in use, and +carried them down. He also gathered together all books, bags, shawls +and other such things as any of the passengers had left exposed, and +putting them upon the end of a seat he covered them with a tarpaulin. +He also gathered together all the camp-stools which were not in use, +and put them under cover. + +Mrs. Morelle went below as soon as the first drops of the shower began +to fall, leaving the children to remain if they chose. Grimkie found a +place which was in a good degree sheltered from the wind and rain, and +there, placing Florence upon one camp-stool in the middle, and John +upon another at the side of her, while he took his place upon the other +side, and then after spreading a large travelling shawl, or rug as the +English call it, over their knees, and tucking it in well all around, +he opened his umbrella, which was very large, and looking out from +under it at the shower, he said, + +“Now let it rain.” + +For some time the children seemed to enjoy the scene and the novelty of +their situation, but before long they began to get tired, and at length +they determined to avail themselves of the first opportunity, when the +rain should slacken a little, to go below. + +“I have got something for us to do there,” said Grimkie. “We shall get +the benefit of Mr. Twig’s advice.” + +“Who is Mr. Twig?” asked Florence. + +“He is the gentleman on board the steamer,” replied Grimkie, “that told +me about travelling in Scotland. He said that one of the most important +things, was to provide plenty of employment for rainy days. It rained, +he said, in Scotland about half the time.” + +“Oh, Grimkie!” exclaimed John. + +“Among the Highlands, he meant,” said Grimkie. “He said that the +Gulf of Mexico, the Atlantic Ocean, and the Highlands and islands of +Scotland formed one great distilling apparatus. The Gulf of Mexico was +the boiler, and the mountains in Scotland the condenser. + +“But come,” added Grimkie, interrupting himself, “it does not rain much +just this moment. Let us go below.” + +So they rose from their seats, and taking every thing with them they +hurried along the deck to the companion-way and went below. + +They found a very pretty cabin, handsomely carpeted, with four long +tables in it, two on each side, and cushioned seats behind them. There +was also a row of small windows, with sliding sashes, above, from which +they could look out over the water. Groups of passengers were sitting +here and there at the tables. Some were looking over their maps and +guide books, and others were lounging on the seats with a listless air, +as if they had had no one to forewarn them, as Mr. Twig had done for +Grimkie, of the necessity of providing work for rainy days. + +Grimkie found seats for his party at one of the tables. He placed his +aunt and Florence at the back side of it, upon one of the cushioned +seats, and set camp-stools for himself and John in front. He then went +for his knapsack. + +This knapsack Grimkie always kept with him in travelling. He bought +it in Liverpool. It was made of morocco, of a bronze-green color, and +was provided with a strap which was arranged in such a way that the +knapsack could be suspended from the shoulder, or carried in the hand +like a bag. In it Grimkie carried his portfolio, his writing apparatus, +Mrs. Morelle’s opera-glass, the map, the guide book, and other such +things as it was necessary to have always at hand. + +When he had brought the knapsack he laid it down upon the table, and as +soon as he had taken his seat, he opened it and took out his portfolio, +containing Florence’s flowers. + +“Ah!” said Florence, “here are my flowers.” + +Grimkie had collected a large number of delicate Alpine flowers, +for Florence, during their ascent of Ben Nevis, and had put them all +carefully between the leaves of the blotting paper book, which he had +made for her. On the evening of the same day, on his return from the +mountain, he had looked over all these flowers and rearranged them. In +doing this, he cut off with the point of a pair of scissors, all the +superfluous parts, smoothed out the little leaves, bent the stems into +graceful forms, and put them into fresh places between the leaves. When +he had done all this, he placed the book under a small piece of board +which he found in the yard of the hotel, and put the whole beneath one +of the legs of the bedstead in his room, which of course subjected the +book, and the plants between the leaves of it, to a heavy pressure. + +The next morning, when the party were about to leave the hotel, Grimkie +took out the book, and after winding a long tape round it a great many +times, and tying the ends, he crowded some wedges in on both sides, +between the tape and book covers. This produced a pressure upon the +plants which, though not so great as before, was sufficient at this +stage of the process. + +It was this book, thus tied up and wedged, that Grimkie now took out +from his knapsack. + +“That’s a nice way to press the flowers,” said Florence. + +“Yes,” replied Grimkie, “only the sides of the book are not stiff +enough to wedge against. I ought to have two thin pieces of board, just +the size of the book covers, to put upon them, one on each side.” + +Grimkie opened the book and looked at the flowers. They were pressed +very nicely, and the colors of the flowers were well preserved. He +also took out from his knapsack some sheets of white note paper, which +he proceeded to fold into quarters and then to cut them open at the +foldings with a knife, so as to make a number of little sheets of paper +of about the size and shape of visiting cards, each one, however, +having, like the original sheet of note paper, two leaves. He gave +these to Florence as fast as he made them, that she might trim the +edges with her scissors. These sheets were to gum the little flowers +upon. + +He also took from his knapsack, a small bottle of gum arabic. This +bottle was very small, being not much bigger than a large thimble, and +it was very strong, so as not to be in any danger of breaking, by being +carried in a knapsack. + +Grimkie took out the cork from this bottle, and then proceeded +to select from his stock of flowers, two or three of different +kinds, such as could be arranged together prettily in the form of a +bouquet. These he proceeded to gum upon one of his little sheets of +paper. He would take out a very small quantity of the dissolved gum +arabic,—which was very thick,—being of about the consistence of +honey, and then touch a very little of it, delicately at different +points on the under side of the flower. Then he would lay down the +flower upon the inside page of one of his little sheets of note paper, +taking care to place it in exactly the position in which he meant it to +lie. + +Presently Florence and John after seeing how Grimkie managed the work, +undertook it themselves, each selecting flowers from among those which +had been pressed, and gumming them upon the paper. In this manner, in +the course of half an hour, quite a number of very pretty specimens +were prepared. + +The flowers were in all cases gummed upon what may be called the third +page of the little sheet of note paper: that is, upon the right hand +page of the second leaf, on the inside. The first leaf then, when laid +down, covered and protected the flower. + +“When we stop at the next hotel,” said Grimkie, “we will write upon +these little sheets what the flowers are, and where they come from, +and then put them all up for you Florence in a package, and so when you +get back to America you can distribute them among your friends.” + +Just at this time the attention of the whole party was suddenly +attracted to a gleam of sunshine, which came in through one of the +windows and fell upon the floor. John immediately abandoned every thing +and hurried away to go on deck. Grimkie after putting all his apparatus +carefully away in his knapsack, followed him, saying to his aunt and +Florence that he would come back in a moment and tell them whether it +was dry enough for them to come up too. + +In a few minutes Grimkie came down and said that the steamer was going +to stop pretty soon in a certain place on the border of the lake, in +order to allow the passengers to go on shore to see a waterfall. + +“To see a waterfall!” exclaimed Mrs. Morelle. “I never heard of such a +thing as a steamer’s stopping for the passengers to see a waterfall. +You don’t mean that she is going to wait for us.” + +“Yes, Auntie,” said Grimkie. “That is it. She is going to wait here +while we go up and see it, and then come back. It is only a little way.” + +“Let us go, then, by all means,” said Mrs. Morelle. + +Mrs. Morelle decided to go at once, without stopping to make any +inquiries. Cases of this kind often occur in which an experienced +traveller is safe in taking things upon trust, without making +inquiries. Mrs. Morelle saw at a glance that a steamer would not stop +for such a purpose unless the fall was really remarkable, and well +worthy the attention of the tourists on board, nor without having +proper arrangements made, in respect to guides, paths, and all other +necessary facilities for going to and from the place. So when, on +ascending to the deck, she found the ladies and gentlemen generally +preparing to go on shore, she determined at once to join them, +especially as it was plain that there was no time for obtaining any +information, as the steamer was now close to the pier. + +It was a small pier, projecting out a little way from the shore, in a +very wild and solitary place. + +The mountain-side rose quite abruptly from the surface of the water, +half covered with forests, and there was no town, nor even any house in +sight. There was nothing but a small building at the end of the pier +near which a kind of cab, or short omnibus without any covering over +it, was standing. + +The steamer was soon made fast and the passengers went on shore. Most +of them began at once to walk up a road which was seen ascending in a +diagonal manner through the trees. Some of the ladies were getting into +the cab. + +“Auntie,” said Grimkie. “They are going to ride up. You had better ride +too.” + +“How far is it?” asked Mrs. Morelle. + +“I don’t know at all,” said Grimkie. “Only it must be far enough to +ride, or else they would not have a carriage.” + +This reasoning seemed very conclusive, but Mrs. Morelle turned to a +gentleman who was walking near her with a lady upon his arm, and asked +him if he knew how far it was to the fall. + +“No madam,” said he with a smile, “we don’t know any thing about it. We +are only following the multitude.” + +Mrs. Morelle might perhaps have asked half or two thirds of the whole +company without receiving any other answer than this. + +“I think you had better ride, Auntie,” said Grimkie. “That will be the +safest way.” + +Mrs. Morelle acceded to this proposal and Grimkie helped her into the +cab, and then he followed Florence and John up the road. + +The road was a most excellent one. It was not very wide, but it was +perfectly made, and the borders of it on each side were finished as +nicely as if it had been a walk in a gentleman’s private grounds. +The land was very steep, both above and below it, and the slopes were +covered with forest trees. The road ascended in a zigzag direction, in +long reaches, though the children soon came to places where there were +short cuts by a foot-path from one angle of the road to another, which +they found that most of the people who were walking took, and so they +took them too. + +They went on in this way for nearly half an hour, ascending all +the time, and at length they seemed to have left the carriage road +altogether. At last, however, they came out into it again at a place +where they could hear the roar of the waterfall in a deep ravine below +them. The tourists seemed to find out by some sort of instinct that +this was the place where the carriage was to come, and so those who had +ladies in the carriage stopped here, to wait for the carriage to come +up, while the others began to go down a steep zigzag path which led +into the ravine. + +“We will wait here,” said Grimkie, “until Auntie comes.” + +It was not long before the carriage came, and all the ladies who had +rode up in it got out. They then all began to go down the zigzag path +into the ravine. The scenery in the chasm was grand beyond description. +The path, as it changed its direction at the different turns, brought +continually new portions of the vast chasm into view, and revealed +awful depths which it made one dizzy to look down into. At the same +time the thundering of the cataract, reverberating from the rocky +precipices which formed the sides of the chasm filled the air with a +deafening sound. + +At length the path came to an end on a pinnacle of rock, where there +was room for only one or two to stand at a time, and where the fall +itself was in full view. It was an immense torrent coming down through +a vast fissure in the rocks above, and falling with the noise of +thunder, eighty or ninety feet, into an awful abyss below. + +It was fearful to stand upon the dizzy pinnacle where the path +terminated, and attempt to look down into the gulf half hidden by mist +and spray into which the cataract descended. Only one or two could +stand there at a time, and the visitors were consequently obliged to +take turns. Mrs. Morelle allowed the children to go, one at a time, +while she held them nervously to prevent their falling, and right glad +she was when they all had seen it and she could go away. + +The company lingered a little while at the different turns of the path +to look down into the chasm. It was of a very irregular form, and it +presented new and striking aspects at every new point of view. It was +very impressive to survey the precipitous rocks, the trees clinging to +the crevices on the sides, and the foaming torrents forcing their way +furiously through the devious and rocky channels at an immense depth +below. + +After a time all the passengers had ascended to the place where the +carriage had been left. The ladies who had rode up took their places in +it again, and began to descend the hill by the road, while the rest of +the party went down more rapidly by the short cuts which the foot-path +followed. + +Grimkie waited at the bottom until the carriage came down, and then, +after helping his aunt to descend, and paying the driver of the +carriage the shilling fare, they all went together again on board the +steamer. + +The name of this cataract is the Fall of Foyers. It is on the shore +of Loch Ness, the last of the lakes which lie on the line of the +Caledonian canal; and not many hours from the time of resuming the +voyage, after visiting the fall, the steamer arrived at its destination +at Inverness. + +As the party went into the town from the place of debarkation, they +all gazed about them with great curiosity and interest. They saw the +river Ness flowing rapidly along between green and beautiful banks, +and a long and massive stone bridge leading across it, and a grand +looking castle on the brow of a hill bordering the town overlooking the +river, and a compact mass of grey stone houses, ancient and venerable +in appearance, but snug, tidy, and all in excellent order. Nothing +was imperfect or unfinished. There was no building going on, nor any +improvements of any kind in progress. Florence said it looked as if +the town had been completed fifty years before, and that thenceforth +nothing had been done, and nothing was ever to be done but to keep +everything in it in the nicest order. + +There were the neatest and prettiest little graveled roads extending +along the banks of the river on either side, which promised to be +charming walks, and ornamented grounds here and there which seemed to +be open to the public, and high craggy summits of hills seen in the +environs that Grimkie said he must ascend. On the whole the aspect of +the town and of its environs was charming. But the party could only get +occasional glimpses of the view, for they were driven along rapidly in +their carriage, and at length stopped in the middle of a street, at +the door of a very snug, compact, and quiet-looking hotel, called the +Union Hotel. Grimkie had chosen it from its name, partly on account +of the American associations connected with that word, and partly for +the sake of variety. The other principal hotel in the town was the +Caledonian; and as it was the Caledonian canal on which they had been +travelling all day, Grimkie said it would make an agreeable change, he +thought, to take some other name for the hotel. + +After the party became settled at the hotel, John, on reflecting +upon the name, wondered at first that one of so peculiarly American +a meaning should be given to an inn in so remote a part of Scotland. +He concluded that it must have been given out of compliment to the +Americans, in hopes of attracting their custom; just as he had seen +“New York Hotel” at Glasgow. He at length ventured to ask a respectable +looking gentleman who was standing at the door what the name denoted. +The gentleman answered him as follows, in broad Scotch: + +“It is joost to commemorate the union of the two kingdoms of England +and Scotland,” said he. “Ye ken that in former days they were separate +altogether, but at length by marriages and intermarriages atween the +twa royal hooses, they baith descended to the same heir, who was James +Sixth of Scotland and First of England. But still the twa kingdoms +were separate, each with its own parliament and its own laws, although +they were ruled over by one and the same king. This was found in the +end not to be convenient, and so finally an act of union was passed by +which the twa realms themselves were moulded and merged into ane, with +ane only parliament at London to make laws for the whole. This was the +famous union, and ye will larn all aboot it, when ye get a little older +and study Scottish history.” + +On hearing this, John went in and told Grimkie that he had missed it in +coming to that hotel, for the union of it was not the American Union at +all. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + +THE VITRIFIED FORT. + + +The party arrived at the hotel about the middle of the afternoon. After +getting somewhat settled in their rooms, Grimkie ordered dinner at five +o’clock, and then, while Mrs. Morelle and Florence were occupied in +their chamber, he and John went out to take a walk. + +They spent their time during their walk in rambling along the principal +streets of the town, occupying themselves with looking at the curious +dresses of the people, hearing the little children talk broad Scotch in +their play, and examining the objects displayed in the shop windows. +Many of these objects were very curious, especially the bracelets, and +pins, and brooches, made of Scotch pebbles, many of which were of the +most singular forms, being made after the fashion of the different +clans of Highlanders, as they wore them in ancient times. + +“You may depend upon it my mother will buy some of these pins,” said +John. + +There were also a number of curious articles made of wood painted in +tartan, according to the fashion of the different clans, such as boxes, +card-cases, needle-books, pen-holders, paper-folders, and many other +such things. + +When the time drew near which had been appointed for dinner, the boys +went home, and very soon after they arrived the dinner was brought in. +While they were at table, Grimkie asked his aunt, whether she was not +glad, so far, that she had come. + +“Yes,” said she, “very glad indeed. We have had a delightful voyage +among the mountains and lakes, but I feel tired and I have a great idea +of going into lodgings here for a week to rest and recruit.” + +“Oh, mother!” exclaimed Florence, “we have not had anything to tire +us. We have had nothing to do but to sit quietly on the deck of the +steamer, and look at the scenery.” + +“It is not my body that is tired,” said Mrs. Morelle, “but my mind. I +have been continually wondering and admiring for four or five days, +and I am tired of wondering and admiring. I want to be quiet a little +while, to rest my mind, and get ready to begin again. And the best way +to do that is to go into lodgings. I see lodgings to let on several of +the houses along the street.” + +The English system in respect to accommodations for strangers at +private houses, as well as that of the hotels, is entirely different +from the usage which prevails in America. Instead of boarding houses, +they have what is called lodging houses. In one of these houses, the +party travelling, if they wish to remain some days in any place, and +to spend the time in a more quiet and domestic way than by remaining +at a hotel, take apartments and keep house, precisely as if they were +in their own home. After looking at the different rooms, and hearing +the prices of each, they select as many as they require, and take +possession of them, paying so much a day for them. The price which they +pay for the rooms, includes the necessary service, and the _cooking_ of +the food, but not the purchase of it. The lodger may either purchase +the food for himself, going to the market for it every day, just as +if he were keeping house at home, or he may request the landlady to +purchase it for him. In case he adopts the latter plan, the landlady +keeps an account of what she expends, and brings him in the bill every +morning. + +In a word, at an English lodging house a lady stopping to rest for a +week, finds herself keeping house, just as if she were at home, with an +experienced, capable, and motherly woman to act as her housekeeper, +and to do every thing that she requires. She can arrange the expenses +too just as she pleases, for every thing except the price of the rooms, +which is agreed upon beforehand, is under her immediate control. + +English ladies when they take lodgings in this way, usually go out +themselves to the grocers and to the markets, to purchase their +provisions and supplies—but American ladies, not being so well +acquainted with English marketing, usually give the landlady a +memorandum in the morning of what they would like during the day, and +the landlady then makes the purchases. + +In addition to the domestic quiet and repose which the traveller +obtains by taking lodgings, when he wishes to remain in any town for +several days, there is a great advantage in the arrangement, in point +of economy. The expense is only from one-third to one-half, for the +same rooms and style of living, at the lodging-houses of what it costs +at the hotels. + +Mrs. Morelle had often experienced the advantage of stopping +occasionally for a week, and going into lodgings, when she had been +travelling in Europe before. But the children knew nothing about the +system. They were, however, always ready for any new plan which was +proposed, and in coming into Inverness they had seen so much to +attract their attention that they were perfectly willing to remain +there a week. So it was determined that they should remain at the hotel +that night, and the next morning go and look out for lodgings. + +But the next morning Mrs. Morelle found herself so well rested, by a +good night’s sleep that she began to feel inclined to go on. + +“The next portion of our journey is by the stage-coach, Grimkie, is it +not?” said she. + +Grimkie said that it was. They were to go by a circuitous route, +following the indentations of the shore to Wick, and there to wait for +the Edinburgh steamer. + +“And I believe,” said Grimkie, “that the steamer only goes once a week, +and it touches at Wick every Friday night, at midnight.” + +“At midnight,” repeated Mrs. Morelle. + +“Yes, Auntie,” said Grimkie, “but that will not make any difference. It +will be as light as day.” + +“That will be funny,” said John. + +“Let us send for Boots,” said Mrs. Morelle, “and ascertain exactly how +it is.” + +So Grimkie rang the bell and asked the waiter to send up Boots, and +when he came they obtained from him all the necessary information. +He said that the coach left Inverness every evening at eight +o’clock—that it travelled all night—that about two o’clock it crossed +a wide ferry called the Mickle Ferry—a mile wide—that it arrived at +Wick about ten o’clock on the following day, and that the steamer would +arrive from Edinburgh in the course of Friday night, and they would +have to go on board early on Saturday morning. + +The children were all very much pleased to learn that they were to ride +in the stage-coach all night, and even Mrs. Morelle did not object to +it on the whole. She concluded, however, not to remain at Inverness, +as she had at first intended, but to go directly on as far as Wick. It +was on Wednesday, when the party arrived at Inverness, and in order to +be in time for the steamer of that week, it would be necessary to leave +that very evening, and this she determined to do. + +“And then,” said she, “when we arrive at Wick, in case the weather is +favorable we will go on board the steamer and accomplish our voyage. +If it is not favorable then we can go into lodgings and spend our week +there.” + +“Yes, Auntie,” said Grimkie, “John and I will like that very much, +for then we can see the fishing boats go out and come in. Wick is the +greatest place in the world for the herring fishery. The guide book +says there are fifteen hundred large fishing boats that belong there.” + +The plan being thus arranged, Grimkie and John went to the coach to +“book” as they called it, for Wick. They were very desirous, of taking +outside seats for themselves, and inside seats, which are much dearer, +for the two ladies; but Mrs. Morelle was afraid to have the boys sit +outside all night, for fear that they might get asleep and fall off. +So she requested them to take the four inside seats for the party, +promising that if there was room outside, and the coachman had no +objection, they should ride there a part of the time. + +Accordingly, Grimkie went to the coach office, and took all the four +inside seats and paid the fare. The clerk said that the travellers must +be at the office, with their luggage at a quarter before eight. + +When the two boys returned to the hotel, they found a large open +carriage before the door, and Mrs. Morelle and Florence preparing to +take a drive around the environs of Inverness to see the scenery. Mrs. +Morelle invited the two boys to join the party, which invitation they +were of course very ready to accept. Grimkie proposed, too that, in +the course of the ride the carriage should stop at the foot of Craig +Phadric, and that they should all go up and see the remains of a +vitrified fort that he said existed there. + +In furtherance of this suggestion, he opened one of his books and read +an account of the vitrified forts. + +These forts are objects of great curiosity to tourists and +antiquarians. They exist in various parts of the country, and are so +ancient that not only all records, but even all traditions of their +origin is lost. They are referred to in the very earliest accounts +of the country that exist, as ruins and remains exhibiting the same +appearance then as they now present, and enveloped in the same mystery +in respect to their origin. + +There are a great many of these old forts in different parts of the +country, and the thing which chiefly characterizes them, and the one +from which they derive their name, is that the stones of which the +walls are composed instead of being cemented together by mortar, are +fused, or vitrified, as if by the action of great heat, into one +continuous mass. It is not possible to ascertain the exact nature +of this vitrification, for the walls of these forts have nearly +disappeared, leaving only long ridges of ruins, covered in the main +with earth, and turfed over; and in many cases immense trees are +growing upon them. Portions of the old walls, however, appear here and +there above the ground, and by a little digging they may be uncovered +at any point along the line, when the stones, melted together, are +brought to view. + +A great many different suppositions have been advanced by antiquarians +to account for the origin of these works. Some suppose that they were +erected in times before the use of cement was known, and that the +people of those days resorted to this mode of consolidating their +masonry, not knowing any other. They think that they laid up the wall +first in the usual way, selecting such stones as would vitrify by heat, +and then built immense fires against them, and kept up the heat by +replenishing the fires continually until the effect was produced. + +It has been supposed that in order to concentrate the heat, and +economize fuel, the builders were accustomed to build a second wall +outside the first, and very near it, leaving only interval enough for +the fuel to be laid in. + +It must be confessed, however, that some persons who have examined +these remains, have suggested that perhaps the vitrification was not +produced purposely at all, but was an accidental effect, resulting +from the building of great beacon fires on the hills where the forts +stand, perhaps long after the forts themselves fell to ruin. It is +a fact that the vitrified forts are generally situated on commanding +elevations. It is also a well-known fact that in ancient times it was +the universal custom, in all this region, to extend the alarm through +the country in case of war, by immense beacon fires built upon the +hills; and it has been suggested accordingly, that it might have been +in some accidental way like this, and not by any special design and +process of art, that the vitrification was produced. + +Grimkie had read accounts of these forts in the different books that +he had consulted, and was very desirous of visiting one of them. He +was influenced in this desire, not only by a wish to see the fort, but +he also wished to procure a specimen of the stones fused together to +carry home, and add to the museum at the Chateau. And thus it was that +he proposed to his aunt, when they were getting into the carriage to go +and take their ride, that they should drive first to the foot of Craig +Phadric, and so go up and see the fort. + +“How high is Craig Phadric?” asked Mrs. Morelle. “Is it as high as Ben +Nevis?” + +“Oh no, Auntie,” replied Grimkie. “It is only two or three hundred feet +high.” + +“Because I don’t feel quite able to undertake a second Ben Nevis just +yet,” said Mrs. Morelle. + +“It will be nothing like Ben Nevis, Auntie,” said Grimkie. “They never +would make a fortification on such a mountain as that. Besides you +will not be obliged to go any farther than you like. If we find it too +steep, or too high, we can turn back again at any time.” + +“Ah!” replied Mrs. Morelle, laughing, “that is the way you got me up to +the top of Ben Nevis, by pretending that I could turn about whenever I +pleased.” + +“Oh no, Auntie! I did not _pretend_,” said Grimkie. “You really _could_ +turn about whenever you pleased. I think I was very honest about it. +Though I confess I hoped all the time that you would get to the top.” + +“Yes,” said Mrs. Morelle, “you were honest, and I am very glad that you +managed as you did, and that it ended in my going to the top of the +mountain. And we will go to Craig Phadric now. I won’t promise to go +up, but on the way you shall tell us about the vitrified fort, as you +call it, that we are to see there.” + +So they all got into the carriage, and directed the coachman to drive +to the foot of the Craig Phadric. + +On the way Grimkie gave his aunt an account of the particulars in +respect to vitrified forts, which have been stated above. His aunt +was very much interested in what he said, having never heard of the +vitrified forts before. She became still more interested in the idea +of making the ascent, when she came to see the hill itself, which was +in full view as the carriage crossed the bridge. It was a high hill, +well wooded except upon one side, where the rocks were exposed to view, +naked and precipitous. + +After ascending by a winding road for some time, the coachman stopped +the horses near a small farm house, close under the hill, and on +getting down from the carriage the party saw a small path leading +through the woods up the ascent. They took this path and after +following it for about ten minutes through various meanderings and +windings they found themselves upon the summit. + +Here the remains of the fort lay before them, though they were all +somewhat disappointed in the appearance of them. They had expected +to see some solid walls with the outside surface of them fused into +a black and glass-like slag. Instead of this, however, there were +only long embankments of earth, forming an immense parallelogram +which occupied the whole top of the hill. These embankments as well +as various detached mounds which were connected with them in various +places in the form of outworks, were almost entirely grassed over, +and from the firm and compact turf which enveloped them, immense trees +were growing everywhere. Indeed, the whole of the ground occupied by +the fort was covered with a forest of ancient and venerable-looking +trees, the effect of which was to impart an air of strange solitude +and solemnity to the scene, which made it extremely impressive. Mrs. +Morelle said that though she was a little disappointed in what she saw, +she was far more than repaid by what she _felt_, in walking over the +ruins, or rather the remains, and that she would not on any account +have failed of visiting the spot. + +After rambling about for some time, Grimkie at length found several +places where portions of the old wall were exposed to view, and though +they were mere shapeless masses of stones that he thus found, they +appeared to be fused together by heat. After pounding among them for a +while he succeeded in obtaining several good specimens of the curious +conglomerate, to carry with him to America. He selected also a very +pretty specimen, the smallest that he could find, for Florence, and +others similar to it for Mrs. Morelle and John. + +After satisfying themselves with an examination of the fort, Grimkie +led the way out of the wood toward the brow of the precipice, which +formed the side of the hill next the town. Here they enjoyed a +magnificent prospect of the whole valley, with the river Ness flowing +through the center of it, the bridge over it, leading into the town, +the town itself, and the castle by its side. Florence thought that this +view was far more worth seeing than the fort. + +“So do I,” said John. “In fact I don’t think much of the fort. I’ve +seen just such banks as those on the Heights of Dorchester once, when I +was in Boston.” + +“True,” said his mother, “only those were not a hundred years old, and +these are probably two thousand.” + +“That does not make any difference in the looks of them,” replied John. + +“No,” said his mother, “but it makes some difference in the _feelings_ +with which we regard them.” + +“It does not make much difference in mine,” said John. + +Just then John saw something alive running off through the woods. + +“It is a rabbit,” said he, and he darted off at full speed, taking aim +at the same time with his specimen of the vitrification. Grimkie called +him to come back, but before he had time to obey the stone flew from +his hand through the air, and at last struck the trunk of a tree very +near where the rabbit had disappeared, and rebounded from it with great +force. + +“Johnnie!” said Grimkie, speaking in a very stern voice. “It is very +lucky for you that you did not hit that rabbit.” + +“Why so?” asked John. + +“If you had hit him and killed him, you would have been a poacher. Any +body that kills any kind of game in this country, unless the owner of +the land gives him leave, is a poacher. Did not you ever read the story +of Black Giles the Poacher?” + +“Yes,” said John; “but he did things a great deal worse than killing +rabbits out in the woods. I tell you these rabbits don’t belong to any +body. I don’t believe the _land_ here belongs to any body. It is _wild_ +land.” + +“We should find that it belonged to some body,” replied Grimkie, “if +people should catch us killing rabbits here.” + +John had a sort of instinctive feeling that Grimkie was right, but he +consoled himself for his discomfiture in the argument by saying that at +any rate he came within one of hitting the rabbit. + +The subject here dropped, as the reporters in Parliament say, and the +whole party returned down the hill. + +“Now, Auntie,” said Grimkie, as they rode back to the hotel, “the clerk +said we must be at the stage office at a quarter before eight. Would +you like to ride there?” + +“If it is not far,” said his aunt, “we can walk just as well, and so we +shall see more of the town.” + +“Yes,” said Grimkie, “I should like that, and Mr. Boots will carry our +luggage for us.” + + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + +NIGHT RIDE BY DAYLIGHT. + + +A little before eight o’clock that evening, the whole party proceeded +on foot from the hotel to the stage office. The porter of the hotel +went with them, taking the trunk and some smaller parcels. The coach +soon came out in front of the office, the trunk and the parcels were +put upon the roof. Mrs. Morelle and Florence took their places inside, +while Grimkie and John mounted to the top, and established themselves +upon a long cushioned seat, which extended from one side of the coach +to the other, directly behind the coachman. + +Instead of a rack behind, as in American stage-coaches, there was a +sort of box, with a door opening into it, for the mail bags, and seats +above, over the back part of the coach. One of these seats is occupied +by the man who has care of the mails, and who is called the guard. The +other seats are for such passengers as choose to ride there. Grimkie +and John, however, chose to ride on the forward seat, so that they +could see before them as they rode along. + +The coach drove first through the village and stopped at the +post-office to take the mails, where quite a little crowd of men and +boys assembled to witness the setting off. The horses were soon in +motion again, the coachman cracking his whip with a very smart air, as +the wheels ran rapidly over the pavement. From their elevated seat, +Grimkie and John could look down with great advantage upon every thing +around them. They soon came to the end of the pavement, and then the +horses trotted and cantered swiftly along over a hard and smooth road, +across the canal by a beautiful bridge, and then on among green fields, +through turnpike gates, and along the walls of gardens, and parks, and +pleasure-grounds, while pretty cottages, and porters’ lodges, and green +hedges, and milestones, and peasant girls, going or returning from +milking, and a thousand other such objects as mark the rural scenery of +Scotland in a summer evening, glided by them in rapid succession. + +In the distance all around them lofty mountains were seen, the summits +of some of them covered with snow, and the sun still high in the sky +in the northwest, though half concealed by golden clouds, promised to +accompany and cheer them on their journey for a long time. + +“It is after eight o’clock,” said Grimkie, “and see how high the sun +is!” + +“Very high,” said John. “I don’t believe the sun will set before ten +o’clock.” + +“Yes, the sun sets here a little after nine,” said Grimkie. + +“How do you know?” asked John. + +“I looked in a Glasgow almanac,” replied Grimkie. “The sun sets in +Glasgow one or two minutes after nine to night, and here it must be +some minutes later, for we are two or three degrees farther north.” + +“I don’t see why that is any reason,” said John. + +“Oh that is very plain,” rejoined Grimkie. “Don’t you see that we are +going round over the curvature of the earth toward the north?” + +As he said this, Grimkie made a gesture with his hand, pushing it out +before him in a manner to denote a motion in advance over the curved +surface of a ball. + +“Yes,” said John. + +“And don’t you see that the sun is going down over the roundness of the +earth in the same direction?” + +“Yes,” said John, “almost in the north—in the north_west_.” + +“Then don’t you perceive,” added Grimkie, “that the farther we go, on +the same course that he is going, the longer we can see him?” + +“Ah yes,” said John. “And that is the reason why we shall see the sun +longer here to-night than they will in Glasgow.” + +“Exactly,” said Grimkie. + +In the meantime the horses, having been now trotting and galloping for +about an hour over the hard and smooth road, were brought up by the +coachman somewhat suddenly at the door of an inn in a small village, +in order to be changed. The coachman descended from his seat, the +post-boys led out the fresh horses from the stable of the inn, and the +guard took the mail bags which were to be left at that place out of his +box, and threw them down into the road. + +Grimkie availed himself of this opportunity to inquire after the +welfare of his aunt and cousin. He leaned over as far as he could on +one side, toward the coach window below, and called out: + +“Auntie, are you getting along pretty well?” + +Immediately Florence’s head appeared at the window. + +“Grimkie,” said she, “where are we?” + +“We have stopped to change horses,” said Grimkie. + +“Already?” said Florence. + +“Yes,” said Grimkie. “When the horses go so fast they have to be +changed very often. Have you got a good seat?” + +“An excellent seat,” said Florence. “I have got a window all to myself.” + +“And can you see the country?” asked Grimkie. + +“Oh, yes!” said Florence, “I can see it beautifully, I have got one +window and mother has got the other.” + +“And mother says,” she added, after turning her head a moment, “that +you and Johnnie must be careful not to fall off.” + +“There is no danger, tell her,” replied Grimkie. “We have good safe +seats, with an iron railing at the two ends to keep us in.” + +By this time the fresh horses were put in, and the coachman having +mounted to his place again, the coach was soon rolling on along the +road, faster even than before. + +Soon after this the sun went down, but the clouds which he left behind +him in the western sky, were for a time almost as bright as he himself +had been, so that at half past nine there seemed to be no sensible +diminution of the light of day. The track of the sun too, in going +down, was so oblique to the horizon, that even at half-past ten his +distance below it was very small, and Grimkie and John could see the +country all about them, and the time by their watches, and the places +through which they were passing, just as well almost as ever. + +From half-past ten to eleven there was still very little change. The +children were all playing in the streets of the villages that they +passed, and groups of men and boys had collected at the doors of the +inns where they stopped, as they would have done at half-past seven +or eight o’clock in a summer evening in America. Even the hens did +not seem to know that it was night, for they were rambling about, and +scratching at every unusual appearance on the grounds, as briskly as in +any part of the day. + +“I don’t see how the children know when to go to bed,” said John. + +“Or the hens either,” said Grimkie. “A Connecticut rooster I should +think would be greatly mystified here. He would not lead his hens off +to roost until he saw it growing dark,—and then if he began to crow +again as soon as he saw any light, he would not give them any time to +sleep at all.” + +After eleven o’clock the boys found that at each succeeding village +or hamlet that they came to fewer and fewer people appeared, until +at length at twelve, and between twelve and one, the country seemed +deserted, and yet the light continued. It was a strange thing, the +boys thought, to drive into a village in broad day-light, and to find +the streets silent and solitary, and without a person being visible +at any door or window; and still more sometimes, when they stopped to +change horses, to see that the coachman was obliged to knock upon the +stable-door to wake the ostlers up, while by the aspect of the whole +scene around, there was nothing that betokened night. + +It was not much after midnight when the coach arrived at the Mickle +Ferry. The Mickle Ferry means the _great_ ferry. It is so called to +distinguish it from another smaller one in the neighborhood called +the Little Ferry. The Mickle Ferry passes across a narrow part of the +Dornoch Firth, as may be seen by the map. The firth is a mile or two +wide, at the ferry, and is crossed in a large flat-bottomed sail-boat, +sufficient to convey the passengers and their luggage in perfect +safety,——but not large enough for the coach. + +The coach was accordingly to be left on the hither side of the ferry, +another being provided on the farther side, to receive the passengers +at the landing and take them on. + +[Illustration: CROSSING THE MICKLE FERRY.] + +The company in the coach, accordingly, on arriving at the margin of +the water, descended from the coach and walked down the sloping pier to +the boat, and went on board. Mrs. Morelle had felt some apprehension +at the idea of crossing a wide ferry in an open boat at midnight, +but she found, on arriving at the spot, that there was no occasion +for alarm. The boat was very wide, and appeared very steady; and as +to midnight,—it might as well have been eight o’clock of a bright +summer evening at home. It is true that the sun was entirely below the +horizon, but the whole northern sky was brightly illuminated by his +beams, and so light was it upon the water, that Grimkie said that if he +had a newspaper, he would amuse them during the passage by reading the +news. + +The boat was wafted very rapidly, but yet with a very smooth and gentle +motion, across the water. The passengers landed on the farther side, +and the luggage was taken out, and in a few minutes the new coach was +seen coming rapidly down the road toward the landing place in order to +receive the travellers and convey them onward. + +Mrs. Morelle now proposed that the two boys should get inside, but they +were extremely desirous to continue upon the top, and as the coachman +assured Mrs. Morelle that the seat was perfectly safe for them, even +if they should fall asleep, she consented that they should remain. +Besides it was now after one o’clock, and it was growing lighter quite +fast. In a little more than an hour, as Grimkie calculated, it would be +nearly sunrise. + +The country now became very picturesque and wild, the sea being brought +continually into full view as the horses trotted swiftly round the +curves of the road, following the undulations of the coast. At one +place it descended by a winding and zigzag way into an immense ravine a +mile or two across. The sides of the ravine were covered with forest, +and there was a river and a village at the bottom of it. + +After traversing this ravine, the road followed the line of the +coast, passing by many great castles, and presenting here and there +magnificent views of the sea. Mrs. Morelle and Florence lost some of +these views, for they fell asleep; and even John, upon the top, nodded +several times, though he insisted, whenever Grimkie asked him about it, +that he was not in the least sleepy. + +At length, toward noon of Friday, the coach arrived safely at Wick. + +The passengers were all very glad to reach the termination of their +ride, for though it was a very delightful one, it was long, and the +fact that the night was not dark made it seem longer even than it +was. At least, so John thought. He said it seemed like two long days +together, without any night between. + + + + +CHAPTER XV. + +THE PRINCE CONSORT. + + +Grimkie and John had both been very curious to see how Wick would look, +and they watched for the first appearance of it with great interest. It +proved to be a small and ancient looking town, built very compactly of +gray stone, and situated at the bottom of a small bay which here sets +in from the sea. In front of it was a little port formed by two piers +built out into the water, and curved in such a manner as to enclose a +considerable space of smooth water, with a small opening between the +two ends of them, to allow the fishing boats to pass in and out. As +usual in such cases there was a light-house on the end of one of these +piers. + +“The very first thing we will do, Grimkie,” said John, “will be to go +down to the piers and see the fishing boats.” + +“After breakfast,” said Grimkie. + +It was now nearly noon and the party had had no breakfast, excepting +some cakes and oranges which Grimkie had brought in his knapsack, and +which they ate very early in the morning. + +The coach drove rapidly into the town, and stopped at the door of a +snug and neat-looking inn, where Grimkie soon engaged rooms and ordered +breakfast. The weather was cool, too, and Mrs. Morelle requested the +waiter to have a good fire made in their sitting-room. In half an hour +the breakfast was ready, and about the same time all the members of the +party, having in the meanwhile been occupied, in their several rooms, +in making their toilet, were ready to eat it. Of course their appetites +were very eager, and as the breakfast was an excellent one, consisting +of fresh herring nicely fried, beef-steaks, eggs, hot rolls, toast, +coffee with plenty of hot milk and cream, fresh butter, and other such +niceties, they all enjoyed the repast exceedingly. + +“What a nice thing a really good breakfast is,” said Florence, “when we +have waited long enough for it to get completely hungry.” + +Pretty soon after breakfast they all went out to take a walk to see +the town, and the pier. They first walked along through the principal +street, looking into the shops to see if there was anything new or +curious in them which it would be well to buy as souvenirs. Then they +went down to the water, in order to see the pier. It was rather to +please the two boys that they did this, but still Mrs. Morelle was very +willing to go, for she was curious to see what the accommodations were +for going on board the steamer in case she should conclude to embark +the next morning. + +They found that the piers were each very wide. On the inside of the +enclosure formed by them was a range of vessels and fishing boats, +which were moored to rings, and massive piles, on the margin of the +pier, and near them were cranes and other such fixtures used for +discharging cargoes. Then came a broad space to land goods upon, and +beyond a road for carts and wagons. All this was upon the top of +the pier, and on the outside was a high parapet wall to protect the +platform and road-way, above described, from the wind and the sea. + +Thus in walking along the road-way upon the piers, one could see +the fishing boats and vessels within the port, and witness all the +operations going on there, but the view seaward was intercepted by the +parapet wall. + +Mrs. Morelle was well satisfied with the appearance of the port, and +with the probable facilities for going on board the steamer, which she +supposed would come inside, so as to allow the passengers to go on +board by means of a broad plank. + +The weather, too, was very fine, and she presumed that the sea was +smooth. She had an opportunity soon of ascertaining this point, for on +arriving at the end of one of the piers there were steps leading up to +a lookout upon the top of the parapet wall, and she asked Grimkie to go +up there and look out to sea, and make a report of the appearance of +things. + +Grimkie did so and reported that the surface of the water was smooth as +glass, as far as he could see. + +“Then,” said she, “if there is no change before night we will go.” + +Mrs. Morelle and Florence soon returned to the hotel, but the boys +spent most of the afternoon in rambling about the pier, examining the +fishing boats, talking with the fishermen, and watching the various +operations which were going on in the port. When they went home to tea, +Grimkie asked what time the steamer would come the next morning, and +the porter informed him that she was due about two o’clock, but that +there was some uncertainty in respect to the time of her arrival. He +said, however, that she would remain some hours at Wick, and that he +would call them an hour before it would be time for them to go on board. + +The whole party went to bed in good season, both because they had so +little sleep the night before, and also because they were to be called +up so early the following morning. + +It was about half-past one when the porter knocked at their doors to +waken them. It was light enough to dress without candles, and they were +all soon ready. When they came down to the door they found the porter +there with a barrow. The baggage was put upon the barrow, and the +porter set forward, followed by the party of travellers on foot. It was +a bright and pleasant morning, and the air was calm. Mrs. Morelle was +greatly pleased by the prospect before her. + +After walking through several streets, they came to the pier but Mrs. +Morelle looked in vain for the steamer. + +“Why, Grimkie!” she exclaimed in surprise, “where is the steamer?” + +“She must be out _there_,” said Grimkie, pointing as he spoke to a +column of smoke which was seen rising into the air over and beyond the +parapet wall. + +“And how are we going to get on board?” asked Mrs. Morelle. + +“It must be that we are going in a boat,” said Grimkie, “but you won’t +mind that, Auntie.” + +Mrs. Morelle saw at a glance that it was too late now to retreat, and +she had the good sense to go forward boldly, acting upon the excellent +principle, that when there is anything disagreeable before us which +must be done, it is just as well to do it with a good grace. + +Mrs. Morelle found, moreover, as we often do in such cases, that the +difficulties which she anticipated disappeared as she approached them. +At a certain part of the pier, not far from the entrance, there was +a flight of stone steps leading down to the water. The boat which +was to take the passengers to the steamer lay at the bottom of these +steps. There was a small party of passengers immediately preceding Mrs. +Morelle and her company. Seeing them go down at once, Mrs. Morelle +followed, and all were soon safe on board the boat, seated in the +stern. The trunks and other packages were then handed down and placed +in the bows. + +After waiting some little time for other passengers who were seen +coming along the pier, the boat put off and was rowed easily out +through the opening, and there the steamer came into full view. They +were soon alongside of it, and without any difficulty ascended to the +deck. + +It was now nearly sunrise, but everything was very quiet on board the +steamer. The children seemed quite inclined to remain on deck to see +what would take place, but Mrs. Morelle wished first to go below and +find her berth or her stateroom. So they all went down. + +They descended a short and winding stair-way, and at the bottom of it +entered the cabin. On each side of the cabin, near the entrance to it, +there was a row of three or four staterooms partitioned off, which +made the cabin itself in this part, comparatively narrow. It was wide +enough, however, for two long tables which stood here, with comfortable +cushioned seats on each side of them. + +Beyond the staterooms the cabin widened to the whole breadth of the +ship, and was terminated toward the stern in a great semicircular +sweep, with two tiers of wide and soft sofas, covered with crimson +plush. The two tiers were parallel to each other, one above and back of +the first, like the seats of an amphitheatre, and almost all the sofas +were occupied by passengers, more or less covered with blankets and +fast asleep. There were also some sleepers lying upon the sofas near +the tables in the narrow part of the cabin, The sleepers seemed all to +be men, except that there were one or two whose faces had a feminine +expression, and Grimkie could not tell whether they were young women, +or very pretty boys. + +“Where is the ladies’ cabin?” asked Mrs. Morelle, turning to the +stewardess, who had met the party at the foot of the stairs and +followed them into the cabin. + +“Here it is, madam,” said the stewardess. “But it is pretty full.” + +So saying, the stewardess led the way to a passage behind the stairs, +and there, pulling aside a certain screen before a door, she disclosed +a room in the sides of which were berths, and on the floor sofas, +cots, and beds made of cushions, all of which were filled with female +sleepers lying in all imaginable attitudes. Mrs. Morelle and Florence +turned back immediately. It was evident that there was very little room +for them there. + +“Is not there any stateroom for us?” asked Mrs. Morelle. + +“Oh yes,” said the stewardess. And she at once led the way back to the +main cabin, and there, opening one of the doors on the side, not far +from the entrance, she ushered Mrs. Morelle and Florence into a very +nice and bright-looking stateroom. + +“Ah!” exclaimed Mrs. Morelle, the moment that she saw the interior of +it, speaking in a tone of great satisfaction. “This is exactly what we +want. Here is a berth for you and one for me. It is _exactly_ what we +want.” + +“I suppose there is something extra for the stateroom,” she added, +turning to the stewardess. + +“Four shillings each,” said the stewardess. + +“We will take it,” said Mrs. Morelle. “And as for you, boys, you must +find places to sleep on the sofas in the cabin. We can’t afford a +stateroom for you.” + +“We don’t _want_ any stateroom, mother,” said John. “I would a great +deal rather sleep in the cabin.” + +So the boys went to the cabin, and all four of the party were soon in +their several berths or upon their sofas sound asleep. The steamer was +quiet and still, except the slight jarring sensation produced by the +paddles after she began to move through the water, and the passengers +all continued to sleep after this for several hours, for although it +was near sunrise when Mrs. Morelle and her party came on board, still, +in respect to the time for sleeping, it was not much past the middle of +the night. + +There began to be a movement for getting up in the gentleman’s cabin +about seven o’clock, and soon after this time Grimkie and John rose +and went on deck. There they took out their maps and endeavored by +calculation of the distance which they had run, and the bearing of the +land which was in sight, to find out where they were. + +One of the passengers who saw what they were doing, came and informed +them that a certain large island which they were passing was Ronaldsay, +one of the Orkneys, and that the land beyond it which extended in both +directions as far as they could see, was another of the islands, and +that the steamer would arrive at Kirkwall in about two hours. They +found out the name of the steamer too,—the _Prince Consort_. She was +named thus in honor of Prince Albert, the consort of the queen. + +The boys remained on deck watching the land as cape after cape and +headland after headland came into view, for an hour more, and then +Grimkie sent John down to knock at his mother’s stateroom door, and +tell her that they were drawing near to Kirkwall. + +In about half an hour after receiving this summons, Mrs. Morelle and +Florence came upon deck. + +The steamer had turned in now among the islands, where the water was +sheltered and smooth as in a river, and the views on every side were +enchanting. The principal islands were so large that they looked like +portions of the main land, and they presented an appearance of verdure +and beauty impossible to describe. Great fields of the richest green, +separated from each other by hedges neatly trimmed, or by substantial +walls, extended in every direction as far as the eye could reach, +while elegant villas, and spacious farm-houses, and rows of cottages +appearing here and there, diversified the scene. The fields in many +cases sloped down smoothly and beautifully to the water’s edge. In +other places the line of the coast was formed of rocky cliffs with the +surf of the sea rolling in at the base of them, and far in the interior +lofty mountains were seen marking their dim blue outline upon the sky. + +“Well, Grimkie,” said Mrs. Morelle, “what do you think of the Orkneys?” + +“I don’t think much of them,” said Grimkie, with an air of +disappointment. “The sea is as smooth, and the country is as beautiful, +as any where in England. I don’t believe the Norsemen had very hard +times after all.” + +“Ah!” said Mrs. Morelle, “you ought to be here in January, when there +is as little day as there is night now.” + +The cabin and the deck of the steamer was soon all in a bustle in +consequence of the preparations which were made by the Orkney +passengers to land. The steamer turned in more and more among the +islands, until at last she approached Kirkwall, which was situated, +like Wick, at the bottom of a small bay, and had a port formed of two +piers for the protection of fishing boats and other small vessels. The +steamer came to anchor outside this port. Boats came out to receive the +passengers and their luggage. In these boats they were all conveyed +within the port, and landed at a small pier sloping down to the water’s +edge. + +Here a number of porters were assembled to take the luggage of the +passengers into the town. There were no carriages. A group of islands +is not the region in which carriages are likely to be multiplied. +Grimkie selected from among the porters one who had an honest face, +and giving him the trunk asked him to lead the way to the hotel. The +porter went on into a very narrow street—the width of it being barely +sufficient for a single carriage—between ancient stone buildings +which had more the appearance of prisons than houses—so few were the +windows, and so deep were they sunk into the massive walls—and thus +they arrived at the hotel. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + +KIRKWALL. + + +The hotel at Kirkwall, when it first came into view, presented a very +unpromising appearance. It was built upon a little paved court, the +front, containing the entrance being at the back side of the court, and +two wings one on each side extending forward to the street. A low wall, +with two gateways through it, extended along the line of the street +from one of these wings to the other. + +The building itself, like all the buildings in the town, was formed +of very thick and massive walls of stone, with windows set in so far +back in the wall, that the sashes scarcely appeared in view. Indeed in +looking along the street the windows of the houses appeared only as +openings in the wall, as if the buildings were so many stone barns. + +On entering the hotel, however, the scene was entirely changed. The +waiter conducted the party up to the second story, and ushered them at +once into a large and handsomely furnished room. There was a bright +fire blazing in the grate, and a polished mahogany dining-table in +the middle of the floor, and arm-chairs, and sofas, and carpets, and +curtains to the windows, and tables in the corners covered with books, +and stands of flower-pots with flowers in full bloom, and many other +nameless conveniences and elegancies which are comprised in the idea of +a comfortable parlor in an English inn. + +“Ah, Florence!” exclaimed Mrs. Morelle. “This is just the place for us. +How glad I am to see the fire. I did not know I was so cold.” + +The chambermaid came soon to show the ladies their chamber, and Mrs. +Morelle when she went into hers, asked Grimkie to order the best +breakfast that he could get for them. In half an hour the breakfast was +ready, and very soon after breakfast the whole party set out to take a +walk and see the town. + +They found that the town consisted chiefly of a very long and narrow +street, which followed the curvature of the shore. It was very narrow, +and seemed intended almost exclusively for foot-passengers. There was +only a narrow track in the center of it—about two feet wide, that +is, just wide enough for one horse—that was paved like a street. +The rest of the space on each side was covered with flag stones for +foot-passengers. Thus the street was almost all sidewalk. + +“We may know by the narrowness of the streets and by the looks of the +houses that they have dreadful gales of wind and storms here in the +winter,” said Grimkie. “See what thick walls, and what little windows +and how few! See how deep the windows are set in the walls, so that the +gales may not get at them to burst them in!” + +The party walked on for some time, following the windings of the +street, and looking in at the shop windows to see what sort of things +there were to sell. At one place they saw some views in the Orkneys, +hanging at the window of a print shop. There was a view of some of the +coast scenery, with lofty mountains rising abruptly out of the sea, and +tremendous precipices. There was a view also of the town of Kirkwall, +and one of Stromness, a place upon the opposite side of the island. +But the picture which most attracted the attention of Mrs. Morelle and +Florence, was one of the Stones of Stennis. It was a view of an open +plain in a wild and desolate country, with a range of gigantic stones, +like immense tombstones, set up in the ground. + +“What is this?” asked Mrs. Morelle; “what are the stones of Stennis?” + +“Ah, that is something very curious,” replied Grimkie. “I read an +account of them. They are on the road to Stromness. We must go to see +them.” + +“They look like the pictures I have seen of Stonehenge,” said Florence. + +“They are like Stonehenge,” said Grimkie. + +After going along a little farther, the party came to a sort of open +space in which there was an immense cathedral, old and ruinous, though +it bore marks of having been recently repaired. Mrs. Morelle was much +surprised to see this edifice. She wondered how there could ever have +been any occasion for a structure of such magnitude in so remote a +region, and still more how it could ever have been built. But the truth +is that the earls of Orkney, who formerly ruled over the islands like +sovereign princes, were at one time very wealthy and powerful, and +there was a time moreover, during the period in which the Catholic +religion was in the ascendency in these countries, when the cathedrals +and abbeys, and monasteries which were built in the north of Scotland, +and in the islands adjacent, were of the grandest and most gorgeous +description. + +“Would you like to go in and see the cathedral, Auntie?” asked Grimkie. + +“Do they have service in it on Sunday?” rejoined Mrs. Morelle. + +“In one end of it,” said Grimkie. “One end is finished off for a +church. The rest of it is empty.” + +“Then we shall see it to-morrow when we go to church,” replied Mrs. +Morelle, “and that will be better. I like to see such places better +when the people are in them.” + +The stones with which the cathedral had been repaired were of a red +color, which gave them the appearance of monstrous bricks. They were +really of sandstone, though of a bright color. John said that he read +in a guide book that they were obtained from a quarry in a cliff which +was named Red Head. + +Near the cathedral were the ruins of two ancient palaces, the bishop’s +and the earl’s. These ruins were very ancient and venerable, and Mrs. +Morelle and Florence were greatly interested in walking about them, and +looking up to the ivy covered battlements and towers. It was melancholy +to look upon these utterly abandoned ruins. The air of desolation and +solitude which reigned around them was greater than Mrs. Morelle had +ever observed in any ruins before. In England there are many remains +of ancient edifices, but they are all objects of great interest to +tourists, and are visited by great numbers of people, for whose +benefit the grounds are kept in order, and a certain degree of life +is imparted to the scene. But these old palaces seemed not only to +have outlived their possessors and occupants, but to have been utterly +forsaken and forgotten by all the world, and an air of solitude and +desolation reigned around them that it would be impossible to describe. + +After passing by the ruins of the palaces, Mrs. Morelle and the +children found themselves coming out into the country at a place where +the road ascended a hill. They concluded to continue their walk until +they reached the summit, in order to take a survey of the situation of +Kirkwall, and of the surrounding country. So they walked slowly on, +stopping occasionally to look at objects of interest, or to talk with +the peasant women whom they met in the road, or found standing at their +cottage doors. + +They asked one of these women about their mode of life in the winter. +Among other questions they asked her if the days were not very short at +that season of the year. + +“Yes,” said she, “very short. In fact there is not much of any day +in the winter, and it is always snowing, or blowing, or raining, or +something else, so that there is not much chance to work upon the +land. So the men stay in the barns a great deal, and thrash the grain, +and do other such things, by the light of lanterns.” + +“But I should think the ground would be frozen up in the winter,” said +Grimkie, “and that that would prevent working on the land.” + +“No,” said the woman. “The ground does not freeze much. We can always +work on the land when it is good weather.” + +“That’s very strange,” said Grimkie, “so far north as this.” + +“And is not the ground covered with snow?” asked Mrs. Morelle. + +“Not much,” said the woman. “It snows very often, but the snow does not +lie on the ground much.” + +“And don’t you travel in sleighs here in the winter then?” asked John. + +“Sleighs?” repeated the woman, looking puzzled, “what are they?” + +“Sledges perhaps you call them,” suggested Mrs. Morelle. + +“No,” replied the woman. “We never use sledges. But they do in some +countries I’ve heard tell.” + +After reaching the top of the hill, the party stopped to take a survey +of the country around, and a very magnificent spectacle presented +itself to view. The land extended in every direction farther than +they could see, but it was divided and separated into so many portions +by bays, straits, inlets, and channels formed by the sea, that the +view exhibited as charming a combination of land and water as could +possibly be imagined. The islands which were near were formed of green +and fertile slopes of land, of marvelous beauty, with pretty dells and +vales opening here and there among them, and hamlets and villages, +and farm-houses, and gentlemen’s seats, dotting the country in every +direction. Toward the west ranges of lofty mountains were seen. +Grimkie took out his map and a little pocket compass which he had, and +endeavored to ascertain the names of some of the highest peaks, by the +bearings and distances of them. He pointed out in what direction they +would go in their ride to Stromness, and where the Stones of Stennis +were,—though the spot was not actually in view, being concealed by an +intervening mountain. + +They saw great numbers of cattle and sheep feeding on the hill sides +in every direction. Indeed cattle and sheep are the staple productions +of the Orkney Islands. The climate is so wet that the grass grows +luxuriantly, and notwithstanding the high latitude the air is so +tempered by the influence of the surrounding seas that it continues +green nearly all the year. + +To the west and south, lofty mountains were seen, in the distance. +Grimkie and John were greatly taken with the view of these mountains. +They concluded that they must lie at the south of Stromness. + +“When we go to Stromness we will go up to the top of them, Johnnie,” +said Grimkie. + +John very readily assented to this proposal, and Florence said that +they must take her too. + +After remaining upon the top of the hill until they were satisfied +with studying the localities which were in sight, and with admiring +the different views, they all descended again, and returned to the +hotel. Instead, however, of going back through the main street, they +took another course which led them along the margin of the water. +Here they saw the piers which formed the little port, and the fishing +boats lying inside of them, and many other curious things. Among other +objects that arrested their attention was a small hut near the shore, +the roof of which was made of an old boat turned upside down. The boat +was supported by walls of stone which formed the sides of the hut, and +there was a door in front to go in by. John was so much pleased with +this curious hut that he took paper and a pencil out of his pocket in +order to draw it, and he remained behind, to make his sketch, while the +rest of the party went on; so that he did not return to the hotel until +some time after the others arrived. + +He had, however, made a very pretty drawing—so pretty that Florence +asked him to copy it in ink in her journal book, which John readily +promised to do. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + +THE STONES OF STENNIS. + + +Mrs. Morelle and her party remained many days at the Orkney Islands, +and during this time they made a number of excursions, some in a +carriage and some on foot. The only carriage, however, which they +could obtain was a dog-cart, which was anything but a comfortable +vehicle for ladies going out upon an excursion for pleasure. Indeed +Florence expressed the opinion, that however well adapted it might be +for the conveyance of dogs, it was the worst contrived vehicle for +human beings that she ever saw. The only redeeming quality which it +possessed was that in case it rained one umbrella would cover the whole +company—after a fashion. + +In this dog-cart they went to visit the Stones of Stennis. The road +was most excellent all the way, being macadamized in a most perfect +manner, so that it was as smooth as a gravel walk in a gentleman’s +park. The country, however, through which it passed, after a few miles +from Kirkwall, was an almost boundless expanse of moorland, wild and +desolate. After going on for some miles through this dreary country, +the carriage left the main road and passed by a sort of cart track +through the fields and over a long causeway between two lakes, till it +came to the place where the stones were situated. + +The stones could be seen for a distance of many miles, standing like so +many gigantic posts on a vast plain. When the party came to the spot, +they found that each stone was from twelve to twenty feet high, and +about five feet wide and one thick. They were of a somewhat irregular +form, being evidently slabs taken from the natural strata in the +neighborhood, and set up just as they came from the quarry. They were +arranged in an immense circle with the remains of an embankment and +ditch all around the circumference. The circle was not complete, the +stones being wanting in many places. In some cases they had fallen +and still remained upon the ground. In other places where it would +seem stones must have stood, the fragments had been taken away, it was +supposed, after they had fallen, to be used for buildings or walls, by +generations that lived in ages subsequent to that in which the stones +were set up, but which have still in their turn long since passed away. + +A great many conjectures have been made in respect to these stones, +and to the nature of the structure of which they formed a part, but +all is uncertainty in respect to them. At the very earliest periods of +which there is any account of the country, they stood as they stand +now, solitary and in ruin—an inexplicable wonder to all who saw them. + +The party went also to Stromness, a town at the western side of the +island on which Kirkwall stands, and here, while Mrs. Morelle and +Florence remained at the inn, Grimkie and John engaged a sail boat and +a man to manage it, and made a cruise of four or five hours along the +neighboring shores. There they saw some stupendous cliffs, called the +Black Craigs, and great numbers of birds flying about them, and among +other birds they saw an eagle perched upon a lofty summit, where he +stood silent and solitary, looking far and wide over the sea. Grimkie +and John had an excellent view of him through their opera glass. + +[Illustration: THE BLACK CRAIGS.] + +At one time while the party remained at Kirkwall, they were imprisoned +nearly a whole day by a pouring rain. Mrs. Morelle, when she found, +as she did after breakfast, that there was no prospect that any of +them could go out, asked the waiter if they had any books in the hotel +relating to the Orkney Islands. The waiter said he would inquire, +and pretty soon he came in bringing a number of books of different +sizes, some old and some new; some with pictures in them and some +without. Mrs. Morelle directed that a good fire should be made, and the +table cleared, and then placed these books upon the table and said that +she was going to have a school. + +“We will begin at ten o’clock,” said she. “You can take your seats at +the table, or at the windows, or where you please, and for two hours +we will all look over these books and see how much we can learn about +the Orkneys. Then we will have a luncheon. After luncheon we will each +of us take a sheet of paper and a pen and ink and write down the most +interesting thing that we have learned.” + +This plan was entered into by all the children very cordially. They +spent two hours in studying the books and looking at the pictures. +Then came the luncheon which consisted of some slices of cold roast +mutton very tender and nice, with some flat rolls of bread, sweet fresh +butter, strawberry preserves and cold coffee. + +After the luncheon all spent an hour in writing, and by that time +it had stopped raining. So it was concluded to postpone reading the +compositions until the evening. + +In the evening they were read. Florence’s was as follows: + + +“THE POISONED SHIRT.” + + “In former times there was an earl of Orkney, named Hacon. He married + a wife and had a son named Paul. After this his wife died, and then he + married a princess of Caithness, named Helga. + + “Caithness is the northern part of Scotland. It was a kingdom in those + days, now it is a county. + + “After his second marriage Hacon had another son named Harold. + + “Harold and his mother hated Paul because he was the oldest son, + and was entitled to the succession, and they did all in their power + to supplant him in his father’s affections. They succeeded so far + that the old king finally agreed that Paul should not have the whole + kingdom, but should share it with Harold. Accordingly, when the old + king died the two sons were joined in the government of the islands. + + “But they did not agree together at all. Helga was continually + maneuvering with her son Harold to gain for him more than his share of + the power. At length the two brothers came to open war, and the whole + country was desolated by their dreadful fights. + + “At last, after becoming weary of this, they agreed to make a treaty, + and become reconciled, and as a pledge of the reconciliation, it was + agreed that after the ratification of the treaty, each brother should + invite the other to a grand feast, about the time of Christmas. + + “When it came to Paul’s turn to be invited to Harold’s feast, Helga, + the mother, determined to poison him. Her plan was to make a beautiful + embroidered garment for him, as a present, in token of her entire + reconciliation to him, and then before giving him the garment to + poison it, so that it should kill him when he put it on. She kept this + plan a profound secret from all but a sister who was living with her, + named Franquart, to whom she confided her design. Franquart aided her + in embroidering the garment, and in applying the poison. + + “At length, on the morning of the feast, Harold, happening to come + into his mother’s room, saw the beautiful garment lying there, all + ready to be given to Paul when he should arrive, and asked what it + was. His mother told him that it was a present that she and Franquart + had been making for Paul. Harold was much enraged to hear this, + and said that he would not allow of their offering Paul handsomer + presents than they made for him. So he seized the garment and declared + that he would keep it for himself. His mother and Franquart were + dreadfully alarmed. They begged and implored him to put the garment + down. But they could not tell him that it was poisoned without + betraying their own guilt. In the end Harold went away with the + garment, leaving his mother and Franquart, in the utmost distress and + terror. + + “Harold immediately put on the garment, and he died that very night in + great agony. + + “The consequence was that Paul regained his whole kingdom, and when he + discovered the treachery which Helga and Franquart had attempted to + practice upon him, he drove them out of the islands.” + +Grimkie’s composition was as follows: + + +“THE EAGLE AND THE BABY.” + + “In one of the Orkney Islands named Hoy, where there are a great + many high mountains and lofty precipices near the sea, there lived a + fisherman named Halco. He had a small hut on the rocks, and a boat. + There was a little green spot near his hut where he used to dry his + nets, and where his little child, whose name was Halco too, used to + lie sometimes, and roll in the grass, and play. + + “There are a great many eagles among the rocks of Hoy, and they often + carried off the farmers’ lambs, but as Halco had no sheep or lambs he + did not pay much attention to the eagles. + + “One day when Halco was coming home in his boat, just before he + reached the shore he saw a monstrous eagle hovering over his hut, and + after wheeling round and round several times in the air, he made a + fell swoop toward the ground, and disappeared behind the hut. A moment + afterward Halco saw him come up again, and to his amazement and horror + he saw that he had little Halco in his claws. + + “The eagle rose slowly with the child, and passing directly over + Halco’s head soared to a great height, and then sailed away to his + nest on the summit of a cliff. + + “Halco was almost stupefied by the terrible shock which he had + received. He pulled like a madman to get to the shore. When he entered + his hut he found his wife in a swoon. He paid no attention to her but + seized his gun and rushed out of the hut. He climbed up the mountain + side, and after great labor he came near enough to the nest to see the + eagle perched upon the edge of it. He crept up a little nearer, and + then took aim and fired. The eagle, after balancing and tottering a + moment on his perch, fell heavily over, down the face of the cliff, + and disappeared. Halco climbed out to the place of the nest, and there + he found his little child, safe and sound, and playing with the young + eagles.” + +“Why, Grimkie!” said John, as soon as Grimkie had finished reading his +narrative, “I found a story a little like that, about an eagle carrying +off a child, but there was not half as much in it as you have told.” + +“I thought I would embellish it a little,” said Grimkie. “I presume it +is just as true after I embellished it, as it was before.” + + * * * * * + +John’s composition was very short. It was as follows: + + +“THE HOLE IN THE STONE.” + + “In one of the stones of Stennis, is a round hole passing directly + through the stone, not far from the edge. Nobody knows what this hole + was made for by the people who set up the stone, but for a great many + ages past it has been considered sacred for engagements. Whenever two + persons wish to make any solemn agreement they go to Stennis and + put their hands through this hole, and clasp them together in the + center of it and then make the promise. If they do this they consider + themselves solemnly bound. + + “Lovers used to do this when they engaged themselves to each other. + And it is said they do so now sometimes. Grimkie and I wanted to try + it, but we could not think of anything to promise each other.” + +Instead of a composition Mrs. Morelle wrote a letter to America, giving +an account of the journey and voyage to the Orkney Islands. She read +this letter to the children after they had finished reading their +compositions, and then, though it was yet very light, they all went to +bed. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII. + +THE EMBARKATION. + + +After remaining for some time in the islands, and making many +excursions, sometimes by land and sometimes by water, in one of which +Grimkie and John went out in one of the fishing boats, and had an +excellent time fishing, the party began to look forward with some +interest to the time for setting out on their return. The question +arose _how_ they should return. John was very eager to go by the mail +boat across the Pentland Firth, instead of returning by the steamer, as +they came. + +The steamer made the trip only once a week. It started from Edinburgh, +touched at Aberdeen and at Wick, then, after going to Kirkwall in the +Orkneys, proceeded to the Shetland Islands, sixty miles or more farther +north. Then returning by the same way, she went back to Edinburgh. This +voyage, with the necessary detentions at the different ports, occupied +six days, so that there was no opportunity of returning to Scotland by +the _Prince Consort_, except once a week. + +It was necessary to send the mail to the Orkneys, however, every day, +and John had found out that a special service had been organized +for this purpose over the islands toward the south by some sort of +mail-cart, and thence across the Pentland Firth, at the narrowest +place, to the coast of Scotland, in a sail boat. Thence by coach or +mail-cart to Wick, and so south toward England. + +There were three reasons why John wished to go by this route. First, +he wished to see what sort of travelling riding in a mail cart would +be. Next he had a great desire to see the Pentland Firth, and to cross +it in a sail boat. He had heard wonderful accounts of this famous +channel—of the furious tides and currents that swept through it, +producing whirlpools, and boiling surges, and roaring breakers of the +most wonderful character, and he was very curious to see them. Then, +lastly, by this route he had hoped to go and see John O’Groat’s house. + +John O’Groat’s house, the name of which has become so famous all +the world over, stands, or rather stood, upon the very extremity of +Scotland, toward the northeast, and as the opposite corner of the +island toward the southwest, is called Land’s End, there arose the +expression from the Land’s End to John O’Groat’s, to denote the whole +territory of Great Britain. + +But inasmuch as the British territory extended to the southwest to +several islands the most remote of which in that direction is Jersey, +and as it also includes on the north the Shetland Islands, the most +northern point of which is called Ska, the expression would more fully +comprehend all that is intended, if instead of being “from Land’s End +to John O’Groat’s,” it was “from Jersey to Ska.” + +The story of John O’Groat is, that he had six relatives or friends +who when they came to see him quarreled in respect to which should +take precedence in going out at the door, and in order to settle the +question, he built a six-sided house, with a door in each side, and +made a six-sided table within, with a side toward each door, so that +each of his guests might have a seat of honor, and seem to be first in +going out when the feast was over. + +John O’Groat’s house is now nothing but a name, as all traces of the +building—if any such ever existed—have long since disappeared. +Nothing marks the spot but a little green mound, which tradition says +is the one which the building formerly occupied. + +It was found on inquiry, that John’s plan for returning to Scotland, +was wholly impracticable. It was very inconvenient and very expensive, +for a single individual to go by the mail route, over the islands and +across the firth, but for a party as large as Mrs. Morelle’s, it was +impossible. There was no alternative but to take the steamer. + +“We must take the steamer, too, whatever the weather is,” said Mrs. +Morelle, “unless we are willing to remain here another whole week, with +the chance of finding worse weather still at the end of it.” + +In fact, however, when the morning arrived for expecting the _Prince +Consort_ on her return from Shetland, the weather proved to be very +fine. The steamer was expected to come into port at eight o’clock, and +to remain there several hours. + +“So that you need be in no hurry,” said the porter, who gave Grimkie +this information. “You can take your breakfast quietly, and then go +on board at your leisure. The steamer will not sail before eleven or +twelve.” + +“Why does she remain here so long?” asked Grimkie. + +“It takes some time to get the cattle on board,” said the porter. “You +see they have to take them all out in boats, and then get them on +board.” + +“Cattle!” exclaimed John. “Do the cattle go a sailing in the steamboat?” + +“Oh yes,” said the porter, smiling, “great numbers of them. There’s no +other way to get the cattle, and sheep, and other animals, that are +raised on these islands to market. They can’t get to England by land, +and so the steamer takes them. That is the main business of the steamer +in fact.” + +As soon as Grimkie and John heard this they were both eager to go on +board the steamer as soon as possible after she came into port, as they +were extremely desirous of witnessing the operation of getting cattle +and horses up to her deck from a boat out in the middle of the harbor. + +“In the first place,” said John, “I don’t see how they’ll get them into +the boats—and then when they get the boats to the side of the steamer, +I can’t imagine how they are going to make them go up such a steep and +narrow ladder.” + +John had seen no other mode of ascending and descending to the deck of +the steamer, from boats alongside, but by the step-ladder used by the +passengers, and he did not think of there being any other mode. + +Grimkie, with Mrs. Morelle’s consent, ordered breakfast at half past +seven, and he told the porter that they should wish to go on board as +soon as the steamer came in. Mrs. Morelle had no objection to this, +for they knew that the steamer being in harbor, would be at rest, and +though they expected to have to wait on board for several hours they +thought that they should be likely to find more to amuse them there +during that time than at the hotel, where they had become entirely +familiar with every thing that was to be seen. + +Grimkie and John also took pains to have every thing packed and ready +before the breakfast came upon the table, so that they might be all +prepared to go on board immediately after breakfast, in case the +steamer should arrive so soon. It was not, however, till about nine +o’clock that the porter came to call them. + +There are no cabs or hackney coaches of any kind in the Orkneys, and +so every body walks to the landing when they are going on board the +steamer. When the time arrived the porter came for the trunk, and +steadying the trunk on his shoulder with one hand, and carrying the +night valise in the other, he led the way out through the court of the +hotel. As soon as they entered the street, Mrs. Morelle and Florence +were both alarmed at the sight of a monstrous bull, which a man was +leading before them, and which was followed by a troop of men and boys. + +“Let us go slowly,” said she, “till that bull gets out of the way.” + +“I verily believe he is going on board the steamer,” said Grimkie. + +“No,” said John; “It can’t be. They might possibly get him into a +boat and row him out there, but if they think that they can get such +a fellow as that up that little narrow black step-ladder, they will +find themselves very much mistaken I can tell them. _I_ know more about +bulls than that, myself.” + +Mrs. Morelle did not gain much advantage by keeping back and walking +slowly, for when at length she reached the landing place, she found +the bull standing there surrounded by people. There were also some +curious-looking boxes there, of the form of stalls for cattle, but Mrs. +Morelle did not stop to look at them, being in haste to go past the +bull and get into the boat. She effected this object safely. A number +of other passengers went on board the boat at the same time. Their +luggage was also put in, and then the boatmen pushed off, and rowed out +to the steamer. + +Mrs. Morelle and Florence, who were beginning to be somewhat accustomed +to going on board a steamer from a boat, found no difficulty in going +up the step-ladder, however difficult such a feat might be expected to +prove for a bull. As for the boys, they liked much better embarking in +this way than to walk over a plank from a pier. As soon as they were +all on board they went below to choose a stateroom for the two ladies. +Mrs. Morelle offered also to take a stateroom for the boys, but they +preferred to be in the cabin they said, so as to see and hear what was +going on. + +As soon as the stateroom was chosen they all went up to the deck +again, and after Grimkie and John had found seats for Mrs. Morelle +and Florence, where they could see all around, and especially on the +side toward the little port, where sail boats and fishing boats were +continually coming and going, John took the opera glass, and began to +watch the boats as they came in succession out from the opening between +the two piers, which formed the entrance to the port, in order to see +when the bull came, if he could. + +After scrutinizing a number of boats, which proved to be only fishing +boats going out to sea, or passage boats belonging to private +individuals going away to some of the other islands, John saw a very +broad and heavy boat coming propelled by oars. After gazing at it a +moment with great attention through his glass, he exclaimed, in a very +excited manner, + +“Yes, Grimkie! he is coming! Here he is! I can see his horns!” + +Then after a moment’s pause he added, + +“There are a great many of them,—bulls and oxen, or something. I can +see a great many horns. Look! Grimkie. Look!” + +So saying, he gave Grimkie the glass, and by the time Grimkie had got +the boat into the field of view it had come so much nearer that he +could see very plainly that it was very large and that it had a sort +of floor in the bottom of it which was completely filled with oxen and +cows. The animals stood together as close as they could be packed, and +Grimkie could just see their heads and necks above the gunwales of the +boat. + +“I don’t understand how they got them into that boat,” said John, “and +we will see pretty soon how they make out in driving them up this +little stair.” + +“They won’t drive them up there,” said Grimkie. “That is the gangway +for the passengers. They won’t take them into this part of the steamer +at all.” + +“Where will they take them in then?” asked John. + +“Forward,” said Grimkie. + +“Then let us go forward and see,” said John. + +“Very well,” said Grimkie. “This is the way.” + +There was a broad bridge extending across from one paddle-wheel to the +other, at some distance above the main deck, and a walk, with railings +on each side, extending fore and aft from this bridge to the quarter +deck where Mrs. Morelle and Florence were sitting. The boys went along +the walk to the bridge, and there, as they looked down upon the forward +deck, an extraordinary spectacle met their view. The space was divided +into pens,—made by small iron posts set up in the deck, and strong +bars connecting them—and these pens were filled with animals of all +kinds, cows, sheep, horses, ponies, oxen, and even pigs. These animals +had all been taken on board at Shetland,—the produce of the farms +there, which the farmers were sending to market. + +Among all these animals those which most attracted the attention of +the boys, were the Shetland ponies. They stood together in a pen by +themselves. They were of various sizes, and although they all had the +general form and appearance of the horse, some of them were very +small. There was one that John said would be _too_ small even for _him_. + +These ponies were going to England to be sold there to gentlemen who +were willing to buy them for their boys, to ride about upon over the +smooth gravel roads made in their parks and pleasure-grounds. Such +ponies are used too by ladies to drive over the same kind of roads in a +small and light open chaise, called a pony-chaise. + +Before the boys had satisfied themselves with looking at the ponies, +their attention was suddenly called away by the arrival of the boatload +of cows, which now came up alongside of the steamer at a place where an +opening had been made in the bulwarks for the purpose of taking them +in. They immediately went over to that side of the steamer, and looked +down from their elevated position upon the bridge, to watch the mode of +proceeding for getting the cattle on board. + +Just beneath them was an iron crane with a small steam engine attached +to it, by which it was worked. The whole was upon a small round iron +platform, which moved upon a pivot in the deck, in such a manner that +the platform could turn in any direction, carrying with it crane, +engine, and all. There was a boy upon this platform who governed its +motions by two polished iron handles which were connected with the +different steam pipes. The boy received his orders from the men who +had the management of the cattle, pulling and pushing his handles in +different ways, according as they called out, _Lower! Hoist! Stop! +Turn!_ + +There were two men in the boat with the cattle, crowding their way +about among them, without paying the least attention either to their +horns or their heels. The people from the deck threw down two broad +bands, made of canvas or sail cloth, to these men. The men took one of +the bands and passed it under one the cows, between her fore legs and +her hind legs, and then brought the edges together over her back. In +the meantime the boy had been called upon to “lower,” and he turned his +handles in such a way as to swing the top of the crane out over the +boat and to lower the chain, which had a hook in the end of it, until +the men in the boat could reach it and hook it into certain rings in +the upper edges of the canvas over the cow’s back. + +The order was then given to the boy to “hoist,” and immediately +afterward the little steam engine began rapidly to wind up the chain +whereupon the poor cow found herself suddenly lifted off from her feet, +and rising rapidly into the air, her legs hanging down in the most +awkward and helpless condition imaginable. As soon as she was raised +fairly above the level of the deck, the men waiting there seized her +by the head and horns and swung her in on board, and then the boy +lowered her until her feet touched the planks, when she immediately +began to spring and scramble to get away. At the same time instant the +broad belt by which she had been lifted was dropped, and fell upon the +deck and the cow was free. The men led her away by means of a short +cord fastened to one of her horns, and put her in a pen with the other +cattle. + +By this process the cows were all hoisted out of the boat and landed +upon the steamer, in a rapid and unceremonious manner. While one cow +was coming up, the men in the boat were placing the second band under +another one, so as to be ready to hook the chain to her, the moment +it came down, and thus not a moment was lost. The words Lower, Hoist, +Stop, Turn, followed each other in very rapid succession, and the +little piston-rod of the engine plied its strokes in the nimblest +possible manner, as cow after cow came up, until at length the boat +was wholly cleared. + +By the time that the first boat was empty another one came. This second +one contained the bull, but instead of being free as the cows had been, +he was secured fast in one of the moveable stalls which Mrs. Morelle +had seen at the landing. The stall was a narrow box, just wide enough +for the bull to stand in it. It had a floor, two sides, two ends, but +no top. Instead of a top, there were two irons passing over from one +side to the other, above, giving the box the appearance of a monstrous +oblong pail with two bails to it. When the chain was lowered the hooks +were attached to these two bails, and the box, bull and all, was run up +rapidly to the deck, and placed there in a secure position among the +piers. + +As fast as the remaining cattle were brought up, new pens were made +upon the deck, and when at length the pens were all full, the hatches +were opened, and a great many cows, after being hoisted up from the +boat and swung round over the hatchways, were lowered down into the +hold, to some dark and dismal region there, which the boys could not +see. + +Besides the cows and a load of oxen, there was a boat full of sheep +that came on board, and also one of pigs. The pigs were hoisted two +at a time—each of them having a band passed round him, and the hook +taking hold of the rings of each band. The pigs made a frightful outcry +at being hoisted in this manner. + +There were a great many boxes containing fish, and packages of wool, +and bags of grain, and other such things, the produce of the islands, +that were also taken on board. The work of getting all the cargo in, +and on board, occupied several hours, and it was near noon before the +steamer was ready to sail. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + +CONCLUSION. + + +The sea was very smooth, and the air calm, on the day that Mrs. Morelle +and her party made the voyage back from the Orkneys to what may be +called in relation to them, the main land. Mrs. Morelle and Florence +having some misgivings in respect to the effect which the sea might +produce upon them, thought it best to remain below, at least until +the steamer should arrive at Wick, because they could lie down while +they were below, and a horizontal position is found to be the best +means, both for guarding against the approach of sea-sickness, and for +alleviating the sufferings produced by it when it comes. + +“But we will not go into our stateroom, Grimkie,” said Mrs. Morelle. +“We will lie down upon the sofas in the great cabin, and then if we can +not read we can amuse ourselves with observing what is going on.” + +Grimkie accordingly accompanied his aunt and cousin below, and found +nice sofas for them there. He put two or three soft cushions at the +head of each sofa, and when Mrs. Morelle and Florence had come down, +he spread shawls over their feet, and gave them their books. Then +leaving them to themselves he went upon deck again to join John. + +Grimkie and John remained upon the deck all the afternoon, except that +from time to time they went below to see if the ladies were doing well +in the cabin. They watched the different islands as the steamer passed +along their shores on her way to the southward, identifying them one +after another by means of the map. When at length they came opposite to +the Pentland Firth, John looked in that direction long and earnestly +to see if he could discern any signs of the whirlpools, or foaming +breakers that he read accounts of in the books,—but excepting a white +line of surf which often appeared along the rocky shores at the margin +of the water, nothing was to be seen. + +In the meantime the coast of Caithness, the northern part of Scotland, +had come fully into view, and presently the steamer, drawing nearer +and nearer to the coast began to follow the line of it, at a little +distance in the offing, toward Wick. + +The steamer remained several hours at Wick, and the boys were at first +very anxious to go on shore during the interval, but Mrs. Morelle +thought it not prudent for them to do so. They afterward concluded, +however, that they liked quite as well to remain on board, for a great +many boat loads of cattle, sheep, and other animals were brought out +and hoisted on board, and they were very much entertained in watching +the operations. + +At length, about nine o’clock in the evening, the steamer sailed again, +and now her course led her out quite into the open sea, as will appear +by an inspection of the map, which shows a great bay entering into the +land between Wick and Aberdeen, across the mouth of which the track of +the steamer lay. Mrs. Morelle and Florence determined to go into their +stateroom at once, and go to bed, hoping to sleep during the whole time +of passing across this bay. Grimkie and John remained on deck till +eleven o’clock, and then, though it was still very light, they went +below and took their places on the couches or sofas where Mrs. Morelle +and Florence had lain during the afternoon, and were both soon sound +asleep. They slept without any intermission until morning. + +After this brief and prosperous voyage the whole party landed safely +in Scotland, which seemed to them like a continent in comparison with +the smaller islands that they had been to visit. There was a railway +station very near the quay, and after spending a few hours at the hotel +to take breakfast, and to rest a little from the voyage, they took +places in the train for Perth and Edinburgh, and set out upon their +journey about ten o’clock, They met with a great many entertaining +adventures on the way toward London, but they can not be related in +this volume. + + +THE END. + + +Transcriber’s Notes + +Page 78—changed Morell to =Morelle= +Page 80—changed CHAPTER VI to =CHAPTER VII= +Page 100—changed locks to =lochs= +Page 158—changed appartus to =apparatus= +Page 175—changed househeeper to =housekeeper= +Page 186—changed discomforture to =discomfiture= + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 77259 *** diff --git a/77259-h/77259-h.htm b/77259-h/77259-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..902d406 --- /dev/null +++ b/77259-h/77259-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,7719 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html> +<html lang="en"> +<head> + <meta charset="UTF-8"> + <title> + The Florence Stories | Project Gutenberg + </title> + <link rel="icon" href="images/cover.jpg" type="image/x-cover"> + <style> + +body { + margin-left: 10%; + margin-right: 10%; +} + + h1,h2 { + text-align: center; /* all headings centered */ + clear: both; +} + +p { + margin-top: .51em; + text-align: justify; + margin-bottom: .49em; +} + +.p2 {margin-top: 2em;} +.p4 {margin-top: 4em;} + +.p80 { + font-size: 0.80em; + text-align: center;} + +hr { + width: 33%; + margin-top: 2em; + margin-bottom: 2em; + margin-left: 33.5%; + margin-right: 33.5%; + clear: both; +} + +hr.tb {width: 45%; margin-left: 27.5%; margin-right: 27.5%;} +hr.chap {width: 65%; margin-left: 17.5%; margin-right: 17.5%;} +@media print { hr.chap {display: none; visibility: hidden;} } + +div.chapter {page-break-before: always;} +h2.nobreak {page-break-before: avoid;} +h3.nobreak {page-break-before: avoid;} + + +table { + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; +} + +td.chn { + text-align: right; + vertical-align: top; + padding-left: 0.5em +} +td.cht { + text-align: left; + vertical-align: top; + padding-left: 1.5em; + text-indent: -1em +} + +td.pag { + text-align: right; + vertical-align: bottom; + padding-left: 2em +} + +div.title-page { + text-align: center; + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + padding-left: 0.5em; + padding-right: 0.5em; + max-width: 15em; + page-break-before: always; + page-break-after: always; + border: 6px double black +} + +table.autotable td, + +.pagenum { /* uncomment the next line for invisible page numbers */ + /* visibility: hidden; */ + position: absolute; + left: 92%; + font-size: small; + text-align: right; + font-style: normal; + font-weight: normal; + font-variant: normal; + text-indent: 0; +} /* page numbers */ + +.blockquot { + margin-left: 5%; + margin-right: 10%; +} + +.left {text-align: left;} + +.center {text-align: center;} + +.smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} + +.allsmcap {font-variant: small-caps; text-transform: lowercase;} + +.caption {font-weight: bold;} + +/* Images */ + +img { + max-width: 100%; + height: auto; +} + +.figcenter { + margin: auto; + text-align: center; + page-break-inside: avoid; + max-width: 100%; +} + +.width541 {max-width: 541px; + text-align: center;} + +/* Footnotes */ +.footnote {border: 1px dashed; + margin-left: 20%; + margin-right: 20%; + font-size: 0.9em;} + +.footnote .label {position: absolute; right: 84%; text-align: right;} + +.fnanchor { + vertical-align: super; + font-size: .8em; + text-decoration: + none; +} + +/* Transcriber's notes */ +.transnote {background-color: #E6E6FA; + color: black; + font-size:small; + padding:0.5em; + margin-bottom:5em; + font-family:sans-serif, serif; +} + + </style> +</head> +<body> +<div style='text-align:center'>*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 77259 ***</div> + +<div class="transnote"> +Transcriber’s notes + +<p>Changes made are noted at the <a href="#end_note" title="Go to the End Note">end of the book.</a></p> +</div> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_2">[2]</span></p> + +<div class="chapter"> +<div class="figcenter width541 x-ebookmaker-drop" id="small"> +<img src="images/small.jpg" alt=""> +</div> +</div> + +<p class="p4"></p> +<div class="chapter"> +<div class="figcenter" id="i_frontis"> +<img src="images/i_frontis.jpg" alt="" width="650" height="435"> +<p class="caption center">LANDING AT BEN NEVIS.</p> +</div> +</div> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_3">[3]</span></p> + +<p class="p4"></p> +<div class="figcenter" id="i_title"> +<img src="images/i_title.jpg" alt="" width="416" height="700"> +</div> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_5">[5]</span></p> + + + +<div class="title-page"> +<h1> THE<br> + +FLORENCE STORIES,</h1> + +<p class="center p80"> BY JACOB ABBOTT.</p> + +<p class="center p80"> EXCURSION TO THE ORKNEY ISLANDS.</p> + +<p class="center p80"> NEW YORK:<br> + SHELDON & COMPANY,<br> + 115 NASSAU STREET.</p> +<p class="center p80"> 1861. +</p> +</div> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_6">[6]</span></p> + +<p class="p4"></p> +<div class="chapter"> +<div class="blockquot">Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1860, by +SHELDON & COMPANY, +In the Clerk’s Office of the District Court of the United States for the +Southern District of New York. +</div> +</div> + +<p class="p2"></p> +<p class="center allsmcap">STEREOTYPED BY Smith & McDougal. 82 & 84 Beekman-st.</p> + +<p class="center allsmcap">PRINTED BY C. A. Alvord. 15 Vandewater-st.</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_7">[7]</span></p> + + +<p class="p2"></p> +<div class="chapter"> +<h2 class="nobreak" id="ENGRAVINGS.">ENGRAVINGS.</h2> +</div> + +<table> +<tr> + <td class="chn">I.</td> + <td class="cht"><span class="smcap">Landing at Ben Nevis</span></td> + <td class="pag"><a href="#i_frontis"><em>Frontispiece</em></a></td> +</tr><tr> + <td class="chn">II.</td> + <td class="cht"><span class="smcap">Choosing the State Rooms</span></td> + <td class="pag"><a href="#Page_23">23</a></td> +</tr><tr> + <td class="chn">III.</td> + <td class="cht"><span class="smcap">Visit to the Orkney Islands</span></td> + <td class="pag"><a href="#Page_97">97</a></td> +</tr><tr> + <td class="chn">IV.</td> + <td class="cht"><span class="smcap">On Board the Iona</span></td> + <td class="pag"><a href="#Page_127">127</a></td> +</tr><tr> + <td class="chn">V.</td> + <td class="cht"><span class="smcap">Crossing the Mickle Ferry</span></td> + <td class="pag"><a href="#Page_195">195</a></td> +</tr><tr> + <td class="chn">VI.</td> + <td class="cht"><span class="smcap">The Black Craigs</span></td> + <td class="pag"><a href="#Page_225">225</a></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<p class="p4"></p> +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_9">[9]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CONTENTS">CONTENTS.</h2> +</div> + +<table><tr> +<th class="chap"><span class="allsmcap">CHAPTER</span></th> +<th class="chn"></th> +<th class="pag"><small><small>PAGE</small></small></th> +</tr><tr> +<td class="chn">I.</td> +<td class="cht"><span class="smcap">Letter from Singapore </span></td> +<td class="pag"><a href="#Page_11">11</a></td> +</tr><tr> +<td class="chn">II.</td> +<td class="cht"><span class="smcap">Taking Passage </span></td> +<td class="pag"><a href="#Page_15">15</a></td> +</tr><tr> +<td class="chn">III.</td> +<td class="cht"><span class="smcap">Preparations </span></td> +<td class="pag"><a href="#Page_21">21</a></td> +</tr><tr> +<td class="chn">IV.</td> +<td class="cht"><span class="smcap">The Letter of Credit</span></td> +<td class="pag"><a href="#Page_36">36</a></td> +</tr><tr> +<td class="chn">V.</td> +<td class="cht"><span class="smcap">The Embarkation</span></td> +<td class="pag"><a href="#Page_51">51</a></td> +</tr><tr> +<td class="chn">VI.</td> +<td class="cht"><span class="smcap">Life on board Ship</span></td> +<td class="pag"><a href="#Page_61">61</a></td> +</tr><tr> +<td class="chn">VII.</td> +<td class="cht"><span class="smcap">Morning in Liverpool</span></td> +<td class="pag"><a href="#Page_80">80</a></td> +</tr><tr> +<td class="chn">VIII.</td> +<td class="cht"><span class="smcap">Plans Formed</span></td> +<td class="pag"><a href="#Page_87">87</a></td> +</tr><tr> +<td class="chn">IX.</td> +<td class="cht"><span class="smcap">The Railway Ride</span></td> +<td class="pag"><a href="#Page_107">107</a></td> +</tr><tr> +<td class="chn">X.</td> +<td class="cht"><span class="smcap">The Highland Glens</span></td> +<td class="pag"><a href="#Page_122">122</a></td> +</tr><tr> +<td class="chn">XI.</td> +<td class="cht"><span class="smcap">Ben Nevis </span></td> +<td class="pag"><a href="#Page_135">135</a></td> +</tr><tr> +<td class="chn">XII.</td> +<td class="cht"><span class="smcap">The Caledonian Canal</span></td> +<td class="pag"><a href="#Page_153">153</a></td> +</tr><tr> +<td class="chn">XIII.</td> +<td class="cht"><span class="smcap">The Vitrified Fort</span></td> +<td class="pag"><a href="#Page_172">172</a></td> +</tr><tr> +<td class="chn">XIV.</td> +<td class="cht"><span class="smcap">Night Ride by Daylight</span></td> +<td class="pag"><a href="#Page_188">188</a></td> +</tr><tr> +<td class="chn">XV.</td> +<td class="cht"><span class="smcap">The Prince Consort</span></td> +<td class="pag"><a href="#Page_200">200</a></td> +</tr><tr> +<td class="chn">XVI.</td> +<td class="cht"><span class="smcap">Kirkwall</span></td> +<td class="pag"><a href="#Page_212">212</a></td> +</tr><tr> +<td class="chn">XVII.</td> +<td class="cht"><span class="smcap">The Stones of Stennis</span></td> +<td class="pag"><a href="#Page_222">222</a></td> +</tr><tr> +<td class="chn">XVIII.</td> +<td class="cht"><span class="smcap">The Embarkation</span></td> +<td class="pag"><a href="#Page_234">234</a></td> +</tr><tr> +<td class="chn">XIX.</td> +<td class="cht"><span class="smcap">Conclusion</span></td> +<td class="pag"><a href="#Page_249">249</a></td> +</tr> +</table> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_11">[11]</span></p> + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<h2 class="nobreak" id="THE_ORKNEY_ISLANDS">THE ORKNEY ISLANDS.</h2> +</div> + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_I">CHAPTER I.</h2> +</div> + +<p class="center">LETTER FROM SINGAPORE.</p> + + +<p>On one occasion, when Mrs. Morelle went +down to New York with Grimkie and her two +children Florence and John, while her husband +was in the East Indies, she heard that a letter +had arrived from him that very day, and that it +had just been sent to the post-office in order to +be conveyed to her at her house up the North +River. The letter, she was told, came from +Singapore.</p> + +<p>Singapore is a large English port situated just +about half way round the world from America, +on the way to the East Indies. It is a sort of +center and rendezvous for all ships navigating +those seas, and letters go and come to and from +it in all directions.</p> + +<p>It is often visited, moreover, by ships of war, +cruising in those seas.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_12">[12]</span></p> + +<p>Grimkie went down to New York with his +aunt and cousins, on this occasion, because it +was holiday at his school at the Chateau. Every +Saturday was holiday at the Chateau.</p> + +<p>His aunt and also his cousins were always +very glad to have him go to New York with +them when they went, but he never left his +school to go on such excursions, except upon +the regular holidays.</p> + +<p>Mrs. Morelle would have been very impatient +to reach home if she had supposed that her husband’s +letter would arrive there before she did. +But she knew very well that the mail from New +York did not get in till about eight o’clock, and +that the letter would not be brought up to the +Octagon until about half-past eight. She was, +therefore, not in any special haste to reach the +end of the voyage, but amused herself talking +with the children very quietly and contentedly +all the way.</p> + +<p>The steamboat arrived between four and five. +Grimkie obtained a carriage at the pier, and, +after assisting Mrs. Morelle and the children to +get into it, he bade them good-by, and turned +his own steps toward the Chateau.</p> + +<p>At half-past eight o’clock the letter came. +Mrs. Morelle, who had been watching for the +coming of the boy who brought the mail, took<span class="pagenum" id="Page_13">[13]</span> +the letter from him at the door, and went at +once into her little room to read it. It was as +follows:</p> + +<div class="blockquot"> +<p> +Singapore, August 16.<br> +<br> +“My very dear wife:<br> +</p> + +<p>“I have just arrived at this port from Calcutta, +on my way to Canton, and in consequence +of letters which I have received here I find that +next summer I shall have occasion to go to London. +I hope to reach there about the first of +September.</p> + +<p>“Now I have a plan to propose to you, though +I do not know what you will think of it. It is +no less than this—that you should take the children +and come out to England and meet me. I +shall be able to spend four or five weeks in England, +and then I must return to Canton again. +I might come to America in that time to see you, +instead of asking you to cross the Atlantic to see +me, but if I were to do so, the voyage would occupy +nearly all the time that I should have to +spare, and thus leave me only a very few days to +spend in your company; whereas, if you come to +London, I can enjoy the pleasure of being with +you and the children a whole month.</p> + +<p>“Besides, I think it might perhaps be agreeable +to you, and also improving to the children, +to make a little tour in England and France.</p> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_14">[14]</span></p> +<p>The facilities for travelling are such now that I +think you will have no difficulty in coming out +alone. If you approve of this plan, I would +recommend to you to cross early in June, and +spend a little time in rambling about England +before I come. By sending your address to my +bankers from time to time, I could come to you +immediately on my arrival. Let me know what +you think of this plan.</p> + +<p>“The overland mail is just closing, so I can +not write any more at this time, I shall, however, +write you again very soon, and in the meantime +I am your very affectionate husband.”</p> + +<p> +James Morelle.<br> +</p> +</div> + +<p>The children came into the room just as their +mother had finished reading her letter, and so she +read it aloud to them. They were very much +excited at the idea of making a voyage to England, +and they asked their mother if she thought +she would go.</p> + +<p>“Yes,” said Mrs. Morelle. “I <em>rather</em> think +I shall.”</p> + +<p>The children clapped their hands with delight +at hearing this answer.</p> + +<p>“I wish that Grimkie could go with us,” said +Florence.</p> + +<p>“So do I,” said John.</p> + +<p>“Ah!” responded Mrs. Morelle, shaking her +head, “I am afraid that will be impossible.”</p> +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_15">[15]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_II">CHAPTER II.</h2> +</div> + +<p class="center">TAKING PASSAGE.</p> + + +<p>While Mrs. Morelle was reflecting upon the +arrangements which she should make for her +intended voyage, she thought a great deal of the +suggestion which Florence had made, namely, +that she should take Grimkie with her.</p> + +<p>“I wish I <em>could</em> take him with me,” said she. +“He would be a great help to me, and a great +reliance. He is so capable, and at the same time +so considerate; besides, he would be a great deal +of company for the children, and would make +the tour not only doubly pleasant, but doubly +profitable for them.”</p> + +<p>But then there was the difficulty of his studies. +He was fitting for college; and Mrs. Morelle +knew very well that his father was always extremely +unwilling to allow any thing to interfere +with his studies in school.</p> + +<p>At first, Mrs. Morelle thought that this difficulty +was insurmountable, and that it was +wholly out of the question that Grimkie should +accompany them on the proposed tour. But on<span class="pagenum" id="Page_16">[16]</span> +reflecting more fully upon the subject, she recollected +that it was not usually considered well +for a boy to enter college until he was about sixteen +years of age, whereas Grimkie was not yet +fourteen. She knew also that he was already +pretty nearly fitted for college, and she thought +it possible that his father might think that he +could now spare a year from his studies as well +as not. It would undoubtedly be greatly promotive +of his health, she thought, and of the +strength of his constitution, to spend a year in +travelling, and thus enable him to enter upon +his college course with more vigor and energy. +He might travel with her and the children a +year, she thought, and still leave a year for +school, to complete his preparations for the college +examination, before it would be time for +him to be offered.</p> + +<p>So she determined to propose the plan to +Grimkie’s father, though she did it with great +doubt and hesitation.</p> + +<p>“It will be exactly what I want for him,” +said Mr. Jay, when he heard the proposal. “I +have been quite at a loss to decide what to do +with him for the two coming years. I thought +seriously of sending him to some farmer for a +year. A boy ought not to be kept at his studies +all the time, while he is growing.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_17">[17]</span></p> + +<p>“But it seems to me, sister,” he added, after a +moment’s pause, “that you show a great deal of +courage in undertaking the charge of three such +children, in making the tour of Europe. I +should think your own two children would be +charge enough for you.”</p> + +<p>“That is just it,” said Mrs. Morelle. “They +are too much of a charge, and so I want Grimkie +to go with us to help me take care of them.”</p> + +<p>Mr. Jay made no further objection, and so it +was arranged that Grimkie should go.</p> + +<p>Mr. Jay made it a condition, however, that +Grimkie should have all the charge of the baggage +and of the accounts during the tour, so as +to learn to do such business properly.</p> + +<p>Grimkie was, of course, greatly pleased when +he heard of the plan which had thus been formed +for him, and it was determined that the very +next Saturday the whole party should go to +New York and take passage in the Cunard line +of steamers. It was necessary for Grimkie to +go, for this was a part of the business which he +was bound to attend to, according to the arrangement. +Grimkie wished that Mrs. Morelle +should go, in order that she might choose the +staterooms which the party were to occupy, and +Florence and John must go for the pleasure of +being of the party.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_18">[18]</span></p> + +<p>“Besides,” said Florence, “we want to go on +board the ship and see the staterooms.”</p> + +<p>“Ah! but we are not going on board the +ship,” replied Grimkie: “we are only going to +the office.”</p> + +<p>“Then how is mother going to choose the +staterooms that we are to have,” said Florence, +“if she does not see them.”</p> + +<p>“She will see a plan of them,” said Grimkie. +“They have plans of all the ships at the office, +with the plans and shapes of all the staterooms +laid down upon them.”</p> + +<p>“Ho!” said John, in a tone of disappointment; +“I don’t care any thing about seeing a +plan. Nevertheless,” he added, after a moment’s +pause, “I should like to go.”</p> + +<p>So it was agreed that they should all go together.</p> + +<p>It was necessary to go immediately, too; for +the berths and staterooms in the Atlantic steamers +are usually engaged long beforehand. Mrs. +Morelle asked Grimkie to inquire which was the +best steamer in the Cunard line; for as the precise +time of their sailing was not material, they +could go a little sooner or later, for the sake of +having one of the best ships.</p> + +<p>Grimkie accordingly inquired, and he learned +that the <em>Persia</em> was the largest of the ships,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_19">[19]</span> +though in other respects they were all nearly +equally good. Mrs. Morelle accordingly determined +to take passage in the <em>Persia</em>, provided +she found that that ship was going at any time +near the first of June.</p> + +<p>Accordingly, on the first Saturday morning +after it was concluded that Grimkie should go, +the whole party set out together to go to New +York to engage the passages. They went down +by the railroad, and arrived at the Chambers-street +station about ten o’clock.</p> + +<p>“This is just right,” said Grimkie. “The +office opens at ten, I suppose.”</p> + +<p>So Grimkie selected a nice looking carriage +from among those that were standing at the station, +and after assisting his aunt and his cousins +to enter it, and also getting in himself, he directed +the coachman to drive to the office of the +Cunard Company. The office was situated at +the foot of Broadway, opposite the lower end of +the Bowling Green.</p> + +<p>They all descended from the carriage, and +went up the steps which led to the office. On +entering it they found a large room, in the front +part of which was a counter with a desk at one +end of it, and on the counter were lying one or +two immense books containing plans. The books +were about a yard long, and perhaps two feet<span class="pagenum" id="Page_20">[20]</span> +wide, and each leaf contained a plan. The +leaves were very stiff, as if the plans had been +pasted upon sheets of pasteboard, in order that +they might be turned over easily, and also to +protect them from injury by constant handling.</p> + +<p>In the back part of the room were other desks, +where several clerks were engaged in writing.</p> + +<p>Grimkie accosted the clerk who stood at the +desk near the counter, saying,</p> + +<p>“We came, sir, to engage passages in one of +your ships.”</p> + +<p>The clerk bowed politely to Mrs. Morelle, and +after some conversation in respect to the time +when she wished to sail, and the steamer which +she preferred, he looked into his books, and +found that the <em>Persia</em> would be coming to America, +instead of going to Europe, about the first +of June; also that the ship which would sail +from New York nearest to that time, namely, +on the 23d of May, was full. All the staterooms +were engaged. There were, however, +some excellent staterooms at liberty in the Boston +steamer, which sailed on the following week, +namely, the 30th of May.</p> + +<p>And here, perhaps, it is necessary to explain +that there are two branches to the Cunard line +of steamers, one of which connects Liverpool +with Boston, and the other with New York. A<span class="pagenum" id="Page_21">[21]</span> +ship of each line sails alternately from Boston +and New York—one week from Boston, and the +next from New York.</p> + +<p>As soon as Grimkie heard that there were +good staterooms disengaged in the Boston steamer +of the 30th of May, his eye brightened up at +once, and he proposed that they should go that +way.</p> + +<p>“But that will make us an extra journey +from here to Boston,” said Mrs. Morelle.</p> + +<p>“Yes, Auntie,” said Grimkie, “that is just +the thing. We shall have the journey to Boston +into the bargain, and without paying anything +for it, for the price is less from Boston, +and a good deal more than enough less to pay +the expenses of going.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, mother,” said Florence, “let us go that +way.”</p> + +<p>“Besides,” said Grimkie, “the Boston steamers +touch at Halifax, into the bargain.”</p> + +<p>“Is that so?” said Mrs. Morelle, turning to +the clerk.</p> + +<p>“Yes, madam,” said the clerk, smiling; “but +I think the passengers do not usually consider +the touching at Halifax any special advantage +in favor of the Boston line.”</p> + +<p>“Why? Does not the ship stop long enough +for them to go on shore?” asked Mrs. Morelle.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_22">[22]</span></p> + +<p>“She stops usually two or three hours,” replied +the clerk; “and the passengers can go +ashore, if they please.”</p> + +<p>“Then let us go that way, mother,” said +Florence.</p> + +<p>“We <em>must</em> go that way for aught I see,” said +Mrs. Morelle, “if there are no staterooms for us +in the New York steamers.”</p> + +<p>The clerk looked into his books again, and +said that there were no two continuous staterooms +disengaged in the New York steamers +until after the middle of June. He, however, +then opened one of the big books, and showed +Mrs. Morelle the plan of the <em>Europa</em>, which was +the Boston steamer that was to sail on the 30th, +and pointed out upon the plan two staterooms +lying contiguous to each other, which were disengaged.</p> + +<p>One of them was what was called the family +stateroom, being nearly square in form, with +two berths, one over the other, at the end, and a +settee along the side, upon which a third person +might sleep, if necessary.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_23">[23]</span></p> + +<p>“<em>I</em> could sleep on the sofa, mother,” said +John, “just as well as not.”</p> + +<p>“Then what should we do with Grimkie,” +asked Mrs. Morelle.</p> + +<p class="p2"></p> +<div class="chapter"> +<div class="figcenter" id="i_023a"> +<img src="images/i_023a.jpg" alt="" width="650" height="429"> +<p class="caption center">CHOOSING THE STATE ROOMS.</p> +</div> +</div> +<p class="p2"></p> + +<p>“We might give the young gentleman a separate<span class="pagenum" id="Page_25">[25]</span> +berth in another stateroom,” said the +clerk; “and then you would have only three +passages to pay for. But in that case,” added +the clerk, “you might find it more convenient +to let the young lady sleep upon the sofa, as the +upper berth is pretty high, and her brother +could climb up to it perhaps more easily than +she could.”</p> + +<p>“<em>I</em> can climb,” said John, eagerly. “I can +climb up to the upper berth, just as well as +not.”</p> + +<p>Mrs. Morelle found, on further conversation +with the clerk, that if she took only a single +berth in the second stateroom, the other berth +would be occupied by some stranger, who might +or might not be very agreeable company for +Grimkie. So she concluded to take two staterooms +herself, with a view of letting Grimkie +and John occupy one of them, while she and +Florence occupied the other. The clerk accordingly +put down her name for two staterooms +contiguous to each other, one of the large ones +for herself and Florence, and a smaller one, next +to it, for Grimkie and John. Mrs. Morelle paid +the money and took a receipt, and then the +whole party left the office and returned to the +carriage.</p> +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_26">[26]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_III">CHAPTER III.</h2> +</div> + +<p class="center">PREPARATIONS.</p> + + +<p>Many weeks intervened between the time +when Mrs. Morelle took her passage and the +day appointed for sailing. During this interval +all parties were very much occupied with making +the various preparations necessary for such a +tour. Mrs. Morelle bought three trunks all +alike and of medium size. One of these trunks +was for herself, one for Florence and John, and +one for Grimkie.</p> + +<p>These trunks were all of a medium size, that +is, about as large as could be conveniently +handled when full, by one man. Mrs. Morelle +had learned by former experience in travelling in +Europe, that occasions would often occur when +it was very inconvenient to have a trunk which +it required two men to lift and carry away.</p> + +<p>Besides these trunks Mrs. Morelle bought a +sort of valise as large as she thought Grimkie +could conveniently carry in his hand, which contained +a set of night dresses and certain toilet<span class="pagenum" id="Page_27">[27]</span> +conveniences for the whole party. This she called +the night valise.</p> + +<p>“Because you see,” she said in explaining the +arrangement to Florence, “we are liable sometimes +to be separated from our trunks for a night, +but this valise we can keep with us at all times. +Besides we shall sometimes wish to make a little +excursion off from our main route, to be gone +only a single night, and then we shall not wish +to take our trunks with us. In such cases as +this the night valise will be very convenient. +Then it will be just the thing for me to use as a +stool to put my feet upon in the railway carriages.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t see how we can ever get separated +from our trunks,” said Florence. “They will +always go with us in the same train.”</p> + +<p>“But accidents happen,” said her mother. +“In travelling, we have not only to make arrangements +for the ordinary course of things, but +we must also provide for accidents.”</p> + +<p>“What kind of accidents?” asked Florence.</p> + +<p>“Every kind that you can imagine,” said Mrs. +Morelle.</p> + +<p>“But tell me of one kind, mother,” said +Florence.</p> + +<p>“At one time,” replied Mrs. Morelle, “your +father and I arrived in Liverpool late in the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_28">[28]</span> +evening. It was eleven o’clock before we got +through the custom-house. The ship could not +go into dock because the tide was so low. So we +were obliged to go ashore in a tender, which is a +small steamer somewhat like a Brooklyn ferry-boat, +but not half so large. It was dark and +rainy, and the wind was blowing a heavy gale. +We had to go down a long black ladder from the +steamer to the tender. One of the officers of the +ship held a lantern at the top, and a sailor held +one below. We wished to take our trunks with +us, but they said we could not do that. We +must say what hotel we were going to, and they +would send them there.</p> + +<p>“So we told them that we were going to the +Waterloo Hotel, and they marked all our trunks +with a big W in chalk.</p> + +<p>“Then we went down the ladder to the tender, +and were sent on shore. When we landed we +took a cab, and drove to the Waterloo Hotel. +But we found that we could not have rooms +there, for the hotel was full. So we were obliged +to go to another and another. We went to three +before we could get in.</p> + +<p>“It was now about midnight, and we were +very tired, and we would have liked very much +to go to bed. If we had had night dresses with +us we might have gone to bed at once, and let<span class="pagenum" id="Page_29">[29]</span> +our trunks remain at the Waterloo until morning. +But we had nothing of the kind, and so your +father had to take a cab and go back to the +Waterloo and wait there till the trunks came, +and he did not get to our hotel so that we could +undress and go to bed till nearly two o’clock.”</p> + +<p>“That was curious,” said John, who had been +standing by all the time, listening to the conversation. +“But I don’t understand very well +what you mean about not getting into the docks.”</p> + +<p>“Ah, you’ll find out all about that,” said his +mother, “when you get to Liverpool.”</p> + +<p>“Tell us some more accidents, then, mother,” +said John.</p> + +<p>“No,” said his mother. “I can not tell you +of any more, but you will experience plenty of +them, you may depend, if we travel about much +in Europe, before we meet father.”</p> + +<hr class="tb"> + +<p>One of the most important things to be arranged +in making a tour in Europe is the question +of funds. We can not take American +money with us, for American money is not +known, and does not circulate in foreign countries. +We must have for each country which +we wish to travel through, the kind of money +that belongs to that country, except that in +some cases we can use the money of a neighboring<span class="pagenum" id="Page_30">[30]</span> +country, when it happens to be well known. +We can use the principal gold coins of England +and France, namely, the sovereign and the +Napoleon, almost all over Europe, for they are +almost universally known. With the exception +of these, we require always the money of the +country which we are travelling in.</p> + +<p>Besides this, even if American money would +circulate in foreign countries, it would be very +inconvenient to take a sufficient quantity of it +for a long tour, on account of the weight of it. +I speak now, of course, of real money, that is, +of gold or silver coin. Bank bills, as doubtless +most of the readers of this book are aware, are +not in fact money, but only the promises of +banks to pay money. They pass as money in +the country where the bank issuing them is +situated, because every one knows that he can +go with them to the bank and get the coin—that +is, if he thinks the bank is good, and that it will +keep its promises. But in foreign countries, +where of course the banks issuing the bills are +beyond the reach of the holders, the bills would +be good for nothing except to sell at a loss to +somebody who could send them across the Atlantic, +and make arrangements for having the +coin sent back to him.</p> + +<p>The arrangements for furnishing travellers<span class="pagenum" id="Page_31">[31]</span> +with the money they require, are made by the +great banking houses. The <em>banking houses</em> +must not be confounded with the banks. They +are private establishments, conducted by men +of great wealth. They have branches of their +establishments in all the great cities and towns +in Europe and America, and large supplies of +money at all of them. At each branch they +have money of the country where the branch +is situated. An American traveller going to +Europe, can go accordingly to one of these banking +houses in New York, and make arrangements +there to be furnished with any amount of money +at any of the great towns in Europe, and of such +kinds as they require, on condition of repaying +the value of it in American money in New York, +as soon as the news of its having been paid can +come over.</p> + +<p>The document which the banker in New York +gives to the traveller, instructing the branches in +Europe to pay him the money he may require, is +called a letter of credit. A letter of credit may +be given for any sum of money, and continue in +force for any period of time.</p> + +<p>There are several precautions and conditions +to be attended to in making arrangements for a +letter of credit. In the first place, the banker +requires some security that the money which is<span class="pagenum" id="Page_32">[32]</span> +advanced to the traveller in foreign lands, will be +promptly repaid to him in America, as soon as +notice arrives in this country of his having received +it. This security is given in various ways. +Sometimes the traveller knows some responsible +merchant in New York, who will guarantee that +the money will be paid. When he does not +know any such person, or does not wish to ask +any person to become surety for him, he can deposit +bank stock, or railway stock, or bonds, or +any other sure and good titles to property which +he happens to have, and give the banker authority +to sell them, and pay himself with the proceeds, +in case the traveller fails to make other +provision for the repayment of the money advanced +to him.</p> + +<p>Another precaution which it is necessary to +take, is one to prevent any other person than the +traveller himself from getting any money with +the letter of credit, in case he should steal it, or +in any other way get it into his possession. +Otherwise, in case the letter should be lost, and +any dishonest person should find it, or in case it +should be stolen, the wrongful holder of it might +go with it to one of the bankers in foreign countries +and ask for some money, and thus either +the banker or the traveller would be robbed.</p> + +<p>To prevent this, it is customary for the banker<span class="pagenum" id="Page_33">[33]</span> +to send specimens of the traveller’s hand-writing +to all the branches in Europe where the traveller +thinks he shall wish to draw money. The +traveller writes his name on several slips of +paper, and the banker in New York sends one +of the slips to each of the branches in Europe, +where the traveller thinks he may wish to procure +money. The clerks at these branches, when +they receive these slips, which are sent to them +by mail, paste them into a big book with a great +many other slips of the same kind received before. +Then, when the traveller arrives and calls +for his money, they write a paper for him to +sign, directing the person in New York who is +to do the business for him there, to pay the +amount to the banker in New York as soon as +the paper reaches him. This paper is called a +draft. When the traveller has signed the draft, +the clerk at the branch in Europe takes it to the +big book, and compares the signature with the +one upon the slip of paper which he had received +by mail. If he finds the hand-writing is the +same, then he knows that all is right, and he +pays the money. If it is not the same, then he +knows that the person who has called with the +letter of credit is not the person he pretends to +be, and so he sends out at once for a police +officer, and has him taken into custody.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_34">[34]</span></p> + +<p>In respect to the security to be lodged with +the banker for the letter of credit, Grimkie had +nothing to do, the merchants who had charge of +Mrs. Morelle’s funds having made arrangements +for it; but Mr. Jay wished that Grimkie should +attend to the business of procuring the letter +himself, in order that he might learn how to do +business at a banker’s, and he recommended that +Mrs. Morelle should go with him, so as to see +how the business was done, and also to give +specimens of her signature.</p> + +<p>“You might write the specimens at home,” +he said, “and send them to the banker’s; but I +think it is a little better for you to go to the +office. I could go with you just as well as not, +but if you go alone you will see how easily the +business is done, and you will have more confidence +and self-possession in going to the banking +houses in Europe. So I think I had better not +go with you, but leave you altogether to Grimkie’s +care.”</p> + +<p>Mrs. Morelle entirely approved this arrangement; +and, accordingly, on the morning of the +day before she was to set out for Boston, she +went with Grimkie and obtained the letter. It +was on Monday that she did this. She had left +her home on the North River the Saturday before, +with a view of spending Sunday in New<span class="pagenum" id="Page_35">[35]</span> +York, and then, after attending to this and some +other business in New York on Monday, of proceeding +to Boston on Tuesday, so as to be ready +to sail in the steamer on Wednesday, that being +the appointed day.</p> + +<p>How Grimkie succeeded in doing the business +at the banker’s, will appear in the next chapter.</p> +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_36">[36]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_IV">CHAPTER IV.</h2> +</div> + +<p class="center">THE LETTER OF CREDIT.</p> + + +<p>Persons who are not much accustomed to +travelling, or to doing business for themselves in +strange places, sometimes feel a good deal of +solicitude when called upon to act in such cases, +from not knowing beforehand exactly what they +are to do. But there is never any occasion for +such solicitude. It is not at all necessary when +you have occasion to go to a bank, or to an office +of any kind, or to a railway-station where a great +many different trains are coming and going, that +you should know beforehand what you are to do +when you get there. All that is necessary is that +you should simply know <em>what you want</em>, and +that you should be able to state it intelligibly. +It is the business of the clerks, or of the persons +in charge of the establishment, whatever it may +be, to show you how the business is to be done, +when you once tell them what it is.</p> + +<p>It was about eleven o’clock on Monday morning +that Grimkie was to set out with Mrs. +Morelle to go and get the letter of credit.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_37">[37]</span> +Florence and John were to go too, as they did +not wish to be left at the hotel, but they were to +remain in the carriage while Grimkie and his +aunt went into the office.</p> + +<p>Grimkie’s father was at the hotel at the time +that they set out.</p> + +<p>“Now, Grimkie,” said he, while Mrs. Morelle +was putting on her bonnet and shawl, “do you +know where you are going?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir,” said Grimkie, “you gave me the +address of the banker, and I have got it in my +pocket.”</p> + +<p>“Very good,” said his father.</p> + +<p>“And now do you know how to do the business +when you get there?”</p> + +<p>“No, sir,” said Grimkie.</p> + +<p>“Very good again,” said his father. “It is +not necessary that you should know how to do +the business. It is not your duty to know. It +is the duty of the clerks there to do the business +for you. But do you know what the business is +that you wish to have done?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir,” said Grimkie. “To get a letter +of credit.”</p> + +<p>“In whose name?” asked his father.</p> + +<p>“Mrs. Jane Morelle’s,” said Grimkie.</p> + +<p>“For how much?” asked his father.</p> + +<p>“For five hundred pounds,” said Grimkie.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_38">[38]</span></p> + +<p>“How long to run?” asked his father.</p> + +<p>“For one year,” said Grimkie.</p> + +<p>“Very good,” said his father. “That is all +you want to know. And remember, in all your +travels, that if you have any business to do of +any kind, in any strange place, all that is necessary +for you is to know distinctly what you want, +and to be able to state it intelligibly. The people +of the establishment will attend to all the +rest.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir,” said Grimkie. “I will remember +it.”</p> + +<p>Mrs. Morelle, who had been standing before +the glass putting on her bonnet and shawl during +this conversation, listened to it with much interest, +and she felt great satisfaction and relief in +hearing it. She had very naturally felt some +uneasiness and apprehension in setting out upon +such a tour, at the thought of being called upon +often, as she knew she must be, at railway stations, +and public offices of various kinds, to +transact business without knowing at all how +the business was to be done.</p> + +<p>But if all that is necessary in such places, she +said to herself, is that I should know what I +want, and be able to state it intelligibly, I think +I shall get along very well.</p> + +<p>In fact, Grimkie’s father meant what he said<span class="pagenum" id="Page_39">[39]</span> +much more for Mrs. Morelle than for Grimkie. +He knew very well that boys of Grimkie’s age +were not usually very diffident, or distrustful of +themselves, in regard to the transaction of business +of any kind, and that they did not usually +stand in need of any special encouragement.</p> + +<p>When Grimkie entered the banking-house +where he was to procure the letter, he was at +first somewhat abashed by the scene which presented +itself to view. He saw a very large room +with doors opening in various directions into +other rooms, all full of desks, and clerks, and +people going and coming. There was a long +counter with high desks, surmounted by little +balustrades rising above it, and open spaces here +and there, where people were receiving money, or +delivering papers, or transacting other business. +Grimkie was for a moment quite bewildered, but +after a moment’s hesitation he recalled to mind +the instructions which he had received, and he +went boldly up to the clerk who was nearest to +him and said,</p> + +<p>“I came to see about a letter of credit.”</p> + +<p>“Second desk to the right,” said the clerk, +pointing with his pen, but without raising his +eyes from his work.</p> + +<p>Grimkie, followed by Mrs. Morelle, went in +the direction indicated. The desk was a very<span class="pagenum" id="Page_40">[40]</span> +large and handsome one, and an elderly gentleman +of very respectable appearance was sitting +at it writing a letter. He went on with his work, +but in a moment, glancing his eye at Grimkie, +he said,</p> + +<p>“Well, my son?”</p> + +<p>“I came to see about a letter of credit,” said +Grimkie.</p> + +<p>“What name?” asked the gentleman.</p> + +<p>“Mrs. Jane Morelle,” replied Grimkie.</p> + +<p>“Ah!” said the gentleman, and looking up +from his work his eye fell upon Mrs. Morelle, +whom he now for the first time saw. He immediately +rose from his seat and offered Mrs. Morelle +a chair.</p> + +<p>“It is all arranged about your letter of credit,” +said he, as he resumed his seat, “except to take +your signatures. You will only wish to draw in +London and Paris, I understand?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir,” said Mrs. Morelle. “Mr. Jay +thought that that would be all that we should +require.”</p> + +<p>The gentleman then called to a handsome-looking +young clerk who was writing at a desk +near by, and asked him if he would be kind +enough to take Mrs. Morelle’s signature. So the +clerk conducted her to a table at a little distance, +near a window, where there were writing<span class="pagenum" id="Page_41">[41]</span> +materials, and asked her to write her name +three or four times, at some little distance apart, +upon a sheet of paper which he gave her. Grimkie +followed his aunt to the table, and the clerk, +after having given the directions, went away and +left Mrs. Morelle to write at her leisure.</p> + +<p>“I’m all in a trepidation,” said Mrs. Morelle, +taking the pen, “and it won’t be written well.”</p> + +<p>“That will be just right, then, Auntie,” said +Grimkie, “for you will be all in a trepidation +when you go to draw the money in the foreign +cities, and so the writing will be the same.”</p> + +<p>Mrs. Morelle smiled, and then proceeded to +write her name four times, in a column on the +left hand side of the paper, each signature being +at the distance of two inches from the other.</p> + +<p>By the time that she had finished writing, the +clerk came and took the paper. He then said to +her that if she would remain seated a few minutes, +he would bring the letter of credit to her.</p> + +<p>Accordingly, in a few minutes he returned, +bringing with him a letter folded and enclosed +in a very strong envelope. Mrs. Morelle took +the envelope, and then bowing to the clerk, and +also to the gentleman at the desk, she and Grimkie +retired.</p> + +<p>As soon as they had returned to the hotel, +Grimkie was curious to open the letter of credit<span class="pagenum" id="Page_42">[42]</span> +and read it. He found that it was a handsomely +printed form, covering one side of a sheet of letter +paper, with the blanks filled up by a pen. +It was as follows:</p> + +<div class="blockquot"> +<p> +“New York, <em>May 28, 1860</em>.<br> +<br> +“<em>Messrs. de Rothschild Brothers, Paris.</em><br> +<br> +“<em>Messrs. N. M. Rothschild and Son, London.</em><br> +<br> +“<em>Gentlemen</em>:<br> +</p> + +<p>“This letter will be presented to you +by <em>Mrs. Jane Morelle</em>, in whose favor we beg to +open a credit with you collectively, for the sum +of £500—<em>say Five Hundred Pounds</em>, to which +extent be pleased to furnish payments in sums +as required, without deduction, and against receipts, +inscribing the amounts paid on the reverse +of this letter, and reimbursing yourselves +in accordance with our letter of advice, transmitting +receipts at the same time.</p> + +<p>“(Signed) Yours, most respectfully,</p> + +<p> +“<em>August Belmont and Co.</em>”<br> +</p> + +<p>“This credit is in favor for <em>two years from +date</em>.”</p> +</div> + +<p>The parts of the letter which are printed in +Italics, were in manuscript in the original. The +rest was the printed form. You will observe +that the parts which were in manuscript comprise<span class="pagenum" id="Page_43">[43]</span> +all those portions of the letter which would +require to be varied for different travellers applying +for letters, while the printed portion consists +of what would be the same for all.</p> + +<p>Besides the letter of credit, Grimkie’s father +recommended to Mrs. Morelle to take a considerable +supply of English gold with her—as much +as she could conveniently carry—to use when +she first landed; for she might desire, he said, +to travel about England for a while before going +to London, which was the first place where her +letter of credit could be made available.</p> + +<p>“Besides,” said he, “it is a little cheaper for +you to carry gold. The gold which you buy +here and take with you, does not cost quite so +much as that which you obtain there, through +your letter of credit; for, besides being repaid +for the actual value of the gold, the bankers require +something for themselves, as their profit +on the transaction.”</p> + +<p>“That’s fair,” said Grimkie. “But then +why can’t we take it <em>all</em> in gold, and so get it +all cheaper?”</p> + +<p>“Because then you lose in interest money +more than you save,” said his father. “Suppose, +for example, a person is going to spend +three thousand dollars in a year, in travelling in +Europe—fifteen hundred dollars the first six<span class="pagenum" id="Page_44">[44]</span> +months, and fifteen hundred in the second. Now +the last fifteen hundred, if he leaves it at home, +well invested, will bring in, during the first half +of the year, say forty or fifty dollars, which will +much more than pay the banker’s commission. +So it is better for him to leave it invested, and +take it from the banker’s when the time comes +for using it. And then, besides, the danger of +being robbed is very much greater in taking a +very large sum in gold with you. It is best, +therefore, for you to rely upon your letter of +credit, except for what you require at the outset, +and that it is well to take with you in gold.”</p> + +<p>So it was arranged that Grimkie should go +with Mrs. Morelle to a money broker’s in Wall-street, +whose address his father gave him, to get +some sovereigns.</p> + +<p>A money-broker is a man who keeps the different +kinds of money of all the different foreign +nations for sale. Merchants, shipmasters, travellers +and other persons coming home from foreign +parts, are always bringing home certain +quantities of this money. As it will not pass +current in this country, they usually take it to a +money-broker’s and sell it. He pays them for it +a little less than its intrinsic value. In this way +he keeps a supply of all kinds of foreign money +constantly on hand, and in passing by his office<span class="pagenum" id="Page_45">[45]</span> +you often see these coins in the window for sale, +just as you see books in the window of a bookstore, +or toys in that of a toy-shop, and travellers +who wish to visit any foreign countries, or +persons who wish to send money there for any +purpose, go to these brokers and buy the kind +of money which they require—though, of course, +they have to pay for it a little <em>more</em> than its +intrinsic value, just as those who brought it into +the country were obliged to sell it for a little +less. The difference is the broker’s profit.</p> + +<p>The coin which Mrs. Morelle wished to buy +was sovereigns. The value of the sovereign is a +pound. It is divided into twenty shillings, +which are represented by silver coins of nearly +the size of an American quarter of a dollar.</p> + +<p>The sovereign is a gold coin, nearly as large as +an American five dollar piece. There is gold +enough in a new sovereign fresh from the mint, +to come to four dollars and eighty-six cents, as +determined by the assaying officers of the United +States. The average amount of gold in the sovereigns +in circulation is, however, only four dollars +and eighty-four cents. That is, the new +ones have two cents worth of gold in them more +than the average of those in circulation.</p> + +<p>How much you have to pay for sovereigns +when you go to buy them at a broker’s depends<span class="pagenum" id="Page_46">[46]</span> +upon how many he has in hand, or expects soon +to receive, and upon the demand for them. +When a great many sovereigns are wanted and +the supply is not large, of course the price rises, +and in a reverse of circumstances it falls. Grimkie’s +father told him that probably he would +have to pay four ninety, or four ninety-one for +them on the day when he went with Mrs. +Morelle to purchase them.</p> + +<p>If, instead of purchasing sovereigns at the +broker’s, the traveller obtains them of the banker’s +through a letter of credit, they cost him, on +account of commissions and charges, nearly five +dollars apiece. American travellers, therefore, +generally reckon the sovereigns which they expend +in Europe in their travels, and in the purchases +which they make, as so many times five +dollars.</p> + +<p>On entering the broker’s office, Mrs. Morelle +and Grimkie at once heard a great chinking of +coin, as people were counting it out, either paying +or receiving it. There was a long counter on +one side of the room, with clerks behind it, and +beyond the clerks, against the wall, were shelves, +with boxes of coin, and little heaps of coin, some +in piles, and some in rolls, enveloped in paper. +A man, who looked like a seafaring man, was +standing at the counter in one place, with a bag<span class="pagenum" id="Page_47">[47]</span> +of gold which he had just opened, and he was +now pouring out the coin from it. It was a bag +of doubloons which he had brought from some +Spanish country. Near by was a young man, +who was just counting and putting into a bag a +quantity of sovereigns which he had been purchasing. +There were various others at different +places along the counter engaged in similar +transactions.</p> + +<p>Mrs. Morelle had concluded to reserve about +seventy-five dollars, for her expenses in going to +Boston, and to invest all the rest of the money +which she had with her in sovereigns. But +Grimkie, who seemed to want to get hold of as +many sovereigns as possible, said to her as they +were coming in the carriage toward the office +that he thought that seventy-five dollars was +more than would be necessary to take them to +Boston. But she said that possibly some accident +might happen which would lead to extra +expense, and it was always best to have enough.</p> + +<p>“And then if I have anything left over,” said +she, “we can purchase sovereigns with it in +Boston, the morning before we sail.”</p> + +<p>Accordingly Grimkie, holding in his hands +eight bills of a hundred dollars each, went with +Mrs. Morelle to a vacant place at the counter,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_48">[48]</span> +and said that he wished to buy some sovereigns, +and asked the price.</p> + +<p>“How many will you want?” asked the clerk.</p> + +<p>“About a hundred and sixty,” said Grimkie. +He had previously made a calculation that he +could have rather more than a hundred and sixty +for the eight hundred dollars.</p> + +<p>“I have got eight hundred dollars here,” said +Grimkie, “which I wish to change into sovereigns.”</p> + +<p>“We can let you have them for four ninety,” +said the clerk.</p> + +<p>Then taking a little slip of paper and a pencil +he made a calculation, and presently said,</p> + +<p>“You can have a hundred and sixty-three +sovereigns, and a little over, for the eight hundred +dollars.”</p> + +<p>“How much will one hundred and sixty-five +cost?” asked Mrs. Morelle.</p> + +<p>The clerk, after figuring a little more on his +paper, said that they would come to eight +hundred and eight dollars and fifty cents exactly.</p> + +<p>“Then let us take a hundred and sixty-five,” +said Mrs. Morelle, “and I will pay the eight +dollars fifty.”</p> + +<p>So Mrs. Morelle took eight dollars and fifty +cents from her purse, and put it with the eight<span class="pagenum" id="Page_49">[49]</span> +hundred dollars, and Grimkie gave the whole to +the clerk. He counted it and put it away, and +then proceeded to count out the sovereigns, laying +them in piles, as he counted them, of fifty +each.</p> + +<p>“Would you like a bag to put them in?” +asked the clerk.</p> + +<p>Grimkie said he would like one very much.</p> + +<p>So the clerk gave him a small, brown linen +bag, large enough to contain the coin. While +Grimkie was putting the money into the bag, it +occurred to him that perhaps it would be well to +have a little English silver.</p> + +<p>“We shall also have need of a little change, +Auntie,” said he, “when we first land, for the +porters or the cabmen.”</p> + +<p>“I can give you silver for one of the sovereigns,” +said the clerk, “if you wish.”</p> + +<p>So Grimkie gave back one of the sovereigns to +the clerk, and the clerk in lieu of it counted out +twenty silver coins not quite so large as a quarter +of a dollar. He left them on the counter for +Grimkie to count over after him, and began to +attend to another customer.</p> + +<p>“That’s right, Auntie,” said Grimkie: “twenty +is right. Twelve pence make a shilling; twenty +shillings make a pound.”</p> + +<p>Grimkie wrapped up the twenty shillings in a<span class="pagenum" id="Page_50">[50]</span> +piece of paper, and put them into the mouth of +his bag, and then putting the bag in his pocket, +he assisted Mrs. Morelle into the carriage, and +after getting in himself, he ordered the coachman +to drive to the hotel.</p> +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_51">[51]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_V">CHAPTER V.</h2> +</div> + +<p class="center">THE EMBARKATION.</p> + + +<p>On Tuesday morning, when Mrs. Morelle and +her party arrived at Boston, they learned from +an advertisement in the newspaper that they +must be on board the next morning at eight +o’clock, as the steamer was to sail at nine.</p> + +<p>“I am glad of that,” said Grimkie; “for now +the sooner we are off the better. Only,” he +added, after a moment’s pause, “we shall not +have a chance to change the rest of our money.”</p> + +<p>“True,” said Mrs. Morelle; “and I think I +shall have nearly forty dollars over, after I have +paid the bill at the hotel.”</p> + +<p>“That would get us eight sovereigns more,” +said Grimkie.</p> + +<p>“I don’t know what I shall do with that +money,” said Mrs. Morelle. “It is in bank bills, +which will be of no use in England, and it will +make me considerable trouble to carry them with +me all the time of my tour.”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps we might get five-dollar gold pieces +with the money here at the hotel,” said Grimkie,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_52">[52]</span> +“and that would be much better than to carry +the bills, for we can sell the gold pieces in Liverpool +to the brokers there, for nearly as much +as they are worth.”</p> + +<p>“That will be the best thing that we can do,” +said Mrs. Morelle.</p> + +<p>So Grimkie took the money and went to the +bar of the hotel, and the barkeeper said he could +change it into gold just as well as not. He +accordingly gave Grimkie eight half-eagles, and +Grimkie, after wrapping them up carefully in a +paper by themselves, put them into the top of +his money bag, with the rest of the coin, and +then put the whole carefully away in his aunt’s +trunk.</p> + +<p>The next morning, at half-past seven, a coach +which Grimkie had ordered the night before, +came to the private door of the Tremont House, +in Tremont Place, and took the whole party in, +with their luggage, and conveyed them to East +Boston, where the steamer was lying.</p> + +<p>As soon as they arrived upon the pier, they +found themselves in the midst of a scene of great +bustle and excitement.</p> + +<p>Carriages were arriving in rapid succession, +bringing passengers to the ship. Piles of trunks +and carpet-bags were lying upon the pier, and a +line of sailorlike-looking men were engaged in<span class="pagenum" id="Page_53">[53]</span> +taking them on board. As soon as Grimkie’s baggage—for +from this time he called it all his, since +he had now the exclusive charge of it—was set +down, Grimkie paid the fare, and the coachman, +mounting upon the box, wheeled his carriage +round, and drove away. Very soon one of the +porters from the ship came and took up one of +the trunks to carry it on board.</p> + +<p>“Johnnie,” said Grimkie, “you go with Aunt +and Florence on board, after this man, and see +where he puts this trunk, and then come back +here. I’ll stay in the meantime, and watch the +rest.”</p> + +<p>So John led the way in following the porter +over the plank, while his mother and Florence +followed <em>him</em>. As soon as he got on board, he +saw the porter put down the trunk in a sort of +open space in the middle of the deck, with a +great many others, and in a moment afterward +several more were piled up upon it and around +it, so that it rapidly disappeared from view.</p> + +<p>John found a place near by where Mrs. Morelle +could stand, a little out of the way of the +crowd, and then immediately hastened back over +the plank to where he had left Grimkie on the +pier.</p> + +<p>“Grimkie,” said he, “they have covered our<span class="pagenum" id="Page_54">[54]</span> +trunk all up with fifty others, and I don’t see +how we shall ever get it again.”</p> + +<p>“Never mind,” said Grimkie; “we’ll wait +and see how the other passengers get theirs.”</p> + +<p>Just at this moment some porters came and +took up the two remaining trunks, and heaving +them up upon their shoulders, began to walk +with them on board. Grimkie and John followed, +bringing with them the valise and several +other similar things. When they arrived on +board they saw the two trunks deposited with +the other baggage, and where they soon began +rapidly to disappear from view.</p> + +<p>“Now,” said Grimkie, “we will go down and +put the valise in our state-room.”</p> + +<p>The deck and all the passages leading below, +were crowded with people going and coming. +A large proportion of these people were friends +of the passengers, who had come to accompany +them on board, in order to see the ship and the +staterooms which their friends were to occupy. +Grimkie led the way through this crowd, working +forward slowly, as well as he could, and followed +by the rest of his party. Indeed there +were two lines of people moving in contrary +directions, and Grimkie supposed that by following +the one that was going on, he should sooner +or later find his way below.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_55">[55]</span></p> + +<p>He was right in this calculation. He was +soon conducted to a door which led into a narrow +but very elegant passage-way. In the middle +of this passage-way was a door to the right, +leading into a magnificent saloon, with a walk +up and down the middle of it, and rows of long +tables on each side. The aspect of this room +was very brilliant, but Grimkie had only time to +glance at it, for opposite to it, on the other side +of the passage-way were three other openings, +the center one opening into a most spacious and +elegant china closet, and each of the two side +ones leading down a flight of winding stairs, +with very bright brass hand-rails on the sides to +take hold of in descending.</p> + +<p>On reaching the foot of the stair-case, the +party entered a bewildering mass of passages +and open spaces, all elegantly finished, with +highly polished woods, and handsomely carpeted, +and lighted moreover with strangely placed sky-lights +and panes of glass placed in rows near the +ceiling. Grimkie thought that he knew from +the plan exactly where to look for his aunt’s +state-room, but he found himself completely +bewildered and lost. There were various state-room +doors opening all around him. He went +into one or two of them and looked at the numbers<span class="pagenum" id="Page_56">[56]</span> +inscribed upon the berths, but they were +not the right ones.</p> + +<p>At length he met a very respectable middle +aged woman, who seemed to belong on board. +She was in fact the stewardess. Grimkie asked +her if she would show him state-room number +twenty-three and twenty-four.</p> + +<p>“Ah yes,” said she, “with a great deal of +pleasure. This is it. It is one of the three best +staterooms in the ship.”</p> + +<p>Grimkie stood back and allowed his aunt to +go into the state-room first, and then the other +children and finally he himself, followed.</p> + +<p>The state-room was in size like what in a +house on land would be called a large closet, +being about seven feet wide and eight feet long. +Across the end of it, and against the side of the +ship, were two berths one above another, with +pretty curtains before them, and a space underneath +the lowermost berth, where trunks might +be placed. Along one of the sides there extended +a wide settee, covered with a haircloth +cushion, and on the other side two wash-stands +in the two corners, with a short and narrow seat, +also covered with a haircloth cushion, between +them. There was a looking-glass over the settee, +and various little shelves, with ledges upon +the outer edge of them, to prevent the things<span class="pagenum" id="Page_57">[57]</span> +from rolling off in a heavy sea. There were also +sundry large brass pins for hanging cloaks and +dresses upon, and brass rings projecting from the +walls in the corners to put tumblers into.</p> + +<p>Opening into the upper berth was a small, +round window, deep set in the thickness of the +ship’s side, and there was also a very thick piece +of glass, of prismatic shape, set in the deck +above, making a sort of window there, six inches +by three. Over the door, too, and extending +along the whole of that side of the state-room, +was a row of panes of glass, which admitted +light from the passage-way, and from other +panes set in mysterious recesses above.</p> + +<p>Mrs. Morelle as soon as she had entered the +state-room, drew back the curtain of the lower +berth, and laid her shawl and her parasol upon +the bed, while Grimkie placed the valise under +the little seat between the two wash-stands.</p> + +<p>Mrs. Morelle then sat down upon the settee +and looked around to take a survey of the place, +and then at the sky-light above. At the same +time she drew a long breath and said,</p> + +<p>“Ah me! This is rather a small cell to be +shut up in as a prisoner fur two weeks.”</p> + +<p>“Oh mother!” exclaimed Florence, “we shall +not be shut up here. We can go about all over +the ship.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_58">[58]</span></p> + +<p>“You children will do that,” said Mrs. +Morelle, “but I shall be shut up here. I shall +be sick.”</p> + +<p>“But mother you will not be sick all the +voyage,” said Florence.</p> + +<p>“Perhaps not,” said she. “I am sure I shall +not be very sick, all the voyage. After a day or +two I shall be only comfortably sick, and you +will all be perfectly well I am quite sure, and +can run about wherever you please.”</p> + +<p>Then rising from her seat she said,</p> + +<p>“But I need not begin my imprisonment yet. +Let us go up on deck and see the people come on +board.”</p> + +<p>So they all left the state-room, and making +their way through the crowd as well as they +could, they went up to the upper deck, where +they found a great number of ladies and gentlemen +assembled in various groups—some standing +and others sitting upon settees and camp-stools, +while the pier, which was here in full +view, was crowded with other parties coming +and going, and with porters bringing more +trunks and baggage on board.</p> + +<p>Grimkie found seats for his party, and they +all sat down. They remained in these places an +hour, amusing themselves with the extraordinary +spectacle which was exhibiting itself around them.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_59">[59]</span> +As the time drew nigh for the sailing of the +ship, the excitement of the scene was increased +by the steam which having now been raised in +the boilers to its full tension, and not yet being +allowed to expend its energies in turning the +paddles, made its escape through the waste-pipe +with a thundering roar which made it almost +impossible for the friends who were taking leave +of each other to hear the parting word. From +time to time the bell was rung, loud and rapidly, +to warn those who were only on board as visitors +to go on shore. A long and crowded procession +of these visitors poured over the bridge to the +pier, and when all were gone the bridge itself +was raised, and hoisted to the shore, by a vast +tackle and fall. The noise of the steam now +suddenly ceased. The hawsers at the bow and +at the stern were cast off, the paddle-wheels commenced +their motion, and the ship began slowly +to move away from the pier. A moment afterward +two guns were fired one after another from +the bows of the ship, with a deafening sound. +The passengers standing along the hand-railing +of the upper deck waved their hats and handkerchiefs +to their friends who thronged the pier, +and who waved their hats and handkerchiefs in +return. Many of them were in tears. Mrs. +Morelle herself might have experienced some<span class="pagenum" id="Page_60">[60]</span> +misgivings and have felt a little homesick and +sad, at parting thus from her native land, and +setting out upon so long a voyage with only +three children, as it were, for her companions,—but +she was going to meet her husband; and +when a wife is going to meet a husband that she +loves, or a mother to her son, she rarely experiences +any misgiving. Her heart reposes with so +much confidence and hope, upon the end of her +journey, that she seldom shrinks very much +from any thing to be encountered on the way.</p> +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_61">[61]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_VI">CHAPTER VI.</h2> +</div> + +<p class="center">LIFE ON BOARD SHIP.</p> + + +<p>The party enjoyed a very excellent opportunity, +as the ship sailed down the harbor, of +viewing the scenery of the shores, and of seeing +the other ships, steamers and sail-boats, that +were going in various directions to and fro. +While Mrs. Morelle remained at this seat, Grimkie +and John went to take a walk about the +ship to see what they could see. There was no +difficulty now in going where they pleased, for +since the visitors had left the ship and none but +the regular passengers remained, there was ample +room for all.</p> + +<p>Accordingly, Grimkie and John took a long +ramble all about the ship. They looked down +into the engine-room, and there, at a vast depth +below the deck, they saw half-naked stokers +shoveling coal into the furnace. They walked +along by the ranges of offices which extended on +each side of the main deck through the whole +middle portion of the ship, like two little streets +of shops in a town. They saw the cow—a monstrous<span class="pagenum" id="Page_62">[62]</span> +one—shut up in a pen, with the sides of it +covered with carpeting and well padded, like the +back of a sofa, to prevent the cow from being +hurt when thrown against them by the rolling +of the ship in a storm. They went into the +saloon and were much struck with the brilliancy +and magnificence of it. There was one arrangement +which particularly attracted their attention. +This was a row of hanging shelves extending +up and down the room over the tables. +These shelves were made of some highly polished +wood and were so ornamented with brass mountings +that they made quite an elegant appearance. +They were all loaded, too, with cut-glass +and silver-ware—such as decanters, tumblers, +wine-glasses of different colors, castors, and silver +spoons,—which added greatly to the brilliance +of the effect. The shelves were double, +or, as one might say, two stories high, the upper +story of each having holes and openings in it of +various forms, suited to the various articles +which they were to contain. In these openings +of the upper board the various vessels were +placed, while the bottoms of them rested on the +lower board. Each one had thus its own little +nest, where it could rest in safety, no matter +how much the ship might pitch or roll.</p> + +<p>Grimkie found that cards were pinned along<span class="pagenum" id="Page_63">[63]</span> +the sides of the table to mark the places where +the different passengers were to sit, and there +were also in the saloon two or three gentlemen +who had cards in their hands, and were looking +out for vacant places to put them.</p> + +<p>“Ah, yes!” said Grimkie, “we must choose +our places at the tables. Father told me about +this and I have got the cards in my pocket all +ready. I came very near forgetting it.”</p> + +<p>So he took out the cards and one of the stewards +who was there, helped him to choose good +places. After he had pinned the cards to the +table-cloth, opposite the seats which they were +intended to secure, he and John went up to the +upper deck again to where Mrs. Morelle and +Florence were sitting. Mrs. Morelle asked John +how he liked the ship.</p> + +<p>He liked it very well he said. Every thing +was complete and secure. The chairs and tables +were all screwed down to the floor, and there +were nests for all the tumblers, and a sofa for the +cow.</p> + +<p>The ship was now gradually getting out of the +harbor, and coming upon the open sea where she +met with a gentle swell over which she rose and +fell in a manner very graceful and charming to +the eye, but very bewildering and dizzying in its +effects upon the brain. Mrs. Morelle and Florence<span class="pagenum" id="Page_64">[64]</span> +soon went below, where, with the help of +Mrs. McGregor, the stewardess, who was extremely +kind and attentive to them, they undressed +themselves and went to bed. Mrs. +Morelle got into the lower berth, but as Florence +felt a little afraid to climb up into the upper one, +Mrs. McGregor made a bed for her upon the settee, +where she could lie very comfortably.</p> + +<p>Grimkie and John remained up and about the +decks all that day. At times they felt sick and +uncomfortable, but they were so much excited by +the new and strange scenes which continually +attracted their attention that they were extremely +unwilling to go to their state-room. From time +to time they paid Mrs. Morelle and Florence a +visit, but they found them lying silent and motionless, +and very little inclined to talk. At +twelve o’clock there was a grand luncheon in the +dining saloon, with nearly all the passengers at +the tables. At four a still grander dinner, though +the places of the ladies were generally vacant.</p> + +<p>The ship’s bells tolled the hours regularly +through the afternoon and evening watches, and +at eight o’clock both Grimkie and John were +very ready to go to bed. Grimkie allowed John +to have the lower berth because it was so much +easier to get into. There was no real difficulty +however in respect to the upper berth, for Mrs.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_65">[65]</span> +McGregor, when the boys were ready to go to bed, +brought in a very nice step-ladder with iron +hooks at the upper end of it to hook into the +edge of the berth. She hooked the ladder on the +berth and planted the lower end of it upon the +floor, and then went away, saying that the ladder +could remain there all night.</p> + +<p>“It is a very nice ladder,” said John, “and it +must be easy going up. But I never saw a ladder +with hooks in it before. A ladder will stand +steady enough without hooks.”</p> + +<p>“On <em>land</em> it would,” said Grimkie. “But at +sea, when the ship is rolling heavily in a gale of +wind, the ladder must have claws to hold on by.”</p> + +<p>“I hope we shall have a good gale of wind,” +said John, after a brief pause. “I want to see +if I can go up that ladder in it.”</p> + +<p>John was however evidently not much inclined +to talk. He undressed himself in silence and +crept into his berth. Grimkie also mounted the +ladder and climbed over from the top of it into +his. After covering himself up with the bed +clothes and getting as well settled as was possible +in so hard and narrow a bed, he extended his head +over the edge of his berth so as to look down +toward John’s berth below, and said,</p> + +<p>“Johnnie, are you comfortable?”</p> + +<p>“Yes,” said John.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_66">[66]</span></p> + +<p>“Are you sleepy?” said Grimkie.</p> + +<p>“No,” said John, “but I am sick.”</p> + +<p>“Never mind,” said Grimkie. “Say your +prayers to yourself, and then shut up your eyes +and go to sleep, and forget all about it.”</p> + +<p>For several days after this time the condition +of our party of travelers was quite forlorn. +Grimkie himself, in fulfillment of a positive resolution +which he had made, clambered down from +his berth, and went up to the saloon to all his +meals, though frequently without being able to +eat any thing when he got there. On these occasions +he always went into Mrs. Morelle’s state-room, +to see how his aunt and Florence were. +He found them generally lying in their beds, Mrs. +Morelle in the berth, and Florence upon the settee, +silent and motionless, and not at all inclined +to conversation. His aunt opened her eyes and +smiled faintly when he came in and usually asked +him some questions about the progress of the +ship. The weather was cold, rainy and foggy, +and although the air was in itself tolerably calm, +the motion of the ship through the water produced +a raw and chilly wind across the decks, +which made it impossible to remain there long +without extreme discomfort.</p> + +<p>On the second night out, about eight o’clock, +the engine stopped. Grimkie, who was always<span class="pagenum" id="Page_67">[67]</span> +ready at a moment’s notice to go into his aunt’s +stateroom whenever she knocked upon the partition +to call him, or there was any other occasion +for going in to see her, and who for this purpose +undressed very little during all the first part of +the voyage, immediately climbed down from his +berth, and slipping on a great coat which he kept +always at hand, in lieu of a dressing gown, he +opened his aunt’s door.</p> + +<p>The moment that he opened it, Mrs. Morelle +raised her head suddenly, and asked him in a tone +of alarm, what was the matter.</p> + +<p>“I don’t think any thing at all is the matter, +Auntie,” said he. “They are always stopping +the engine on these voyages—to tighten up a +screw or something or other.”</p> + +<p>“But Grimkie,” said she, “I wish you would +go and see if you can not find out what is the +matter. I am afraid that something has happened.”</p> + +<p>There was, indeed, something almost awful in +the solemn stillness which reigned throughout the +ship, now that the engine had ceased its motion, +and the ship lay rocking upon the waves as if +powerless and helpless. Grimkie immediately left +the stateroom in order to go upon deck, and Mrs. +Morelle’s alarm was very much increased a moment +after he had gone, by a burst of steam from<span class="pagenum" id="Page_68">[68]</span> +the steam-pipe, which suddenly began to be +heard, occasioned by the letting off of the surplus +steam, which, as it could now no longer be +employed in driving the paddle-wheels, it was +necessary to allow to escape into the atmosphere.</p> + +<p>A moment after this sound began to be heard +however, Mrs. McGregor came into the cabin, to +say to Mrs. Morelle, that she must not be alarmed +at the stopping of the engine, for there was +nothing the matter.</p> + +<p>“They have only stopped to sound,” said she. +“You see we are drawing nigh to Halifax, and it +is very thick and dark, and they can not see the +land. So they have to sound and go on cautiously. +We shall go on again presently.”</p> + +<p>So saying Mrs. McGregor went away in order +to convey the same relief and reassurance to the +ladies in the other staterooms.</p> + +<p>Grimkie went up on deck, but he could see +nothing. The night was dark, and a heavy mist +mingled with rain, was driving along the decks. +He could hear the voices of some of the sailors +occasionally, talking in ordinary tunes, in the forward +part of the vessel, and now and then a command +given by an officer, but otherwise all was +still.</p> + +<p>Grimkie returned to the stateroom, and there +found how much his aunt had been relieved by<span class="pagenum" id="Page_69">[69]</span> +having learned that they had stopped the ship to +sound.</p> + +<p>“I was sure there could not be anything the +matter,” said Grimkie. “So you must shut +your eyes, Auntie, and go to sleep, and not pay +any attention after this to any thing you hear. +There are ever so many things going on in such +a ship, and when any thing unusual happens we +must not mind it. Whenever there is any danger—or +at least whenever there is any thing for +us to do, Mrs. McGregor will be sure to come and +tell us.”</p> + +<p>“That is true,” said Mrs. Morelle, “and I will +try not to be afraid again.”</p> + +<p>“But if you <em>should be</em> afraid at any time, +Auntie,” continued Grimkie, “just knock at the +head of your berth and I shall hear.”</p> + +<p>So saying Grimkie bade his aunt good night +and went back to his stateroom. As for John +he heard nothing of all this, having slept soundly +through the whole.</p> + +<p>The steamer was soon put in motion again, but +in the course of an hour she stopped anew. +Grimkie was asleep, but the stopping wakened +him. He knew it was not midnight by the +stateroom light which was still burning. There +was a little three-cornered box partitioned off in +a corner between the two staterooms, with a door<span class="pagenum" id="Page_70">[70]</span> +opening into the passage-way, and ground glass +sides toward the staterooms. Into this box a +lighted candle was placed by a steward standing +in the passage-way, every evening, as soon as it +was dark, and this gave a dim and indistinct +light in the two staterooms adjoining it, through +the ground glass panes. This was all the light +for the staterooms that was allowed.</p> + +<p>Moreover, as this light was put out at midnight, +it afforded the passengers the means of +knowing, when they awoke in the night, whether +it was before or after midnight, by observing +whether their light had gone out or was still +burning.</p> + +<p>Grimkie was awakened from his sleep by the +stopping of the engine the second time, and he +remained awake long enough to observe that his +light was still burning. He, however, soon fell +asleep again.</p> + +<p>He awoke after this several times during the +night and found the ship sometimes at rest, and +sometimes in motion. On one of these occasions +he heard a great sound of trampling upon the +deck, as of persons going to and fro, and a sort +of thumping, such as would be occasioned by the +moving heavy boxes about upon deck. He determined +to go up and see what was the matter.</p> + +<p>So he climbed down from his berth, put on his<span class="pagenum" id="Page_71">[71]</span> +great coat, his overshoes, and his cap, and went +up to the deck. He saw lights, and the dim +forms of many men were going to and fro forward +and on the side of the ship a long range of black +masses which looked so strange that they quite +bewildered him. The wind blew, and the mist +and rain were driven into his face so as almost to +blind him. As he stood at the head of the +stairs looking out, a passenger came by to go in.</p> + +<p>“What is it?” asked Grimkie.</p> + +<p>“Halifax,” said the passenger. “I’m thankful +that we have got in at last. We lost five +hours beating about outside in the fog before we +could get in.”</p> + +<p>Grimkie was determined to see Halifax, so he +went out upon the main deck and thence along +to the foot of a narrow winding stair which led +up to the upper deck, and thence forward to the +great funnel where he thought he could find a +little shelter. He saw some lights glancing +about upon the pier, and the dark and indistinct +forms of men moving to and fro, and a range of +black spectral looking roofs extending along the +shore. But it was so cold, and the mist and +rain were driven so furiously into his face by the +wind, that he was glad to go below, saying to +himself as he went,</p> + +<p>“We may have better luck perhaps when we<span class="pagenum" id="Page_72">[72]</span> +come back, and get to Halifax in the day +time.”</p> + +<p>When he awoke the next time he knew by the +jar, and by the rocking motion of the ship, that +they were not only on their way again, but were +once more out upon the open sea.</p> + +<p>Everything went on much in this way for a +day or two longer. It was cold and wet upon +the decks, and dreary and silent below. The +horizon in every direction was obscured by fogs +and mists, and the decks were kept always wet +by driving rains which were continually sweeping +over the sea. Grimkie went up regularly to +his meals, but he was glad to come back again +as soon as possible to his berth, and the rest of +the party kept their berths all the time. Mrs. +McGregor brought them soup, and porridge, +and tea and toast, and other things, at regular +intervals, but often they were taken away again, +scarcely touched, and during the intervals of +these visits Mrs. Morelle and Florence remained +in their berths, sometimes hour after hour without +speaking a word.</p> + +<p>The only amusement which they had was to +listen for the sound of the ship’s bells as they +tolled the slow progress of the hours, and to +hear the news which Grimkie brought in to them<span class="pagenum" id="Page_73">[73]</span> +from time to time, in respect to the progress of +the voyage.</p> + +<p>During a great portion of this time Mrs. +Morelle was kept in a constant state of uneasiness, +by the blowing of a monstrous steam trumpet +which was attached to the engine, and which +was sounded every two or three minutes, when +the fog was too thick ahead to allow them to +see whether any vessels were in the way. The +intention in blowing this trumpet is, that if +there should be any such vessels in the line of +the steamer’s advance, they may hear the sound +and blow horns or fire guns in response, and +then the steamer might be turned to one side to +avoid them.</p> + +<p>This blowing of the steam trumpet in a fog, +is an example of the extreme caution and care +which marks the whole management of the +Cunard steamers, and which inspires the public +with so great a degree of confidence in them. +Many steamers in such cases push boldly on, +without making any signals, trusting to the +chance of not meeting anything by the way. I +once heard the captain of a steamer say, when +we were going on through a dense fog, on the +Atlantic, without taking any of these precautions, +that there was about as little chance of a +steamer’s coming into collision with another vessel<span class="pagenum" id="Page_74">[74]</span> +when pursuing her way upon the ocean, as +there would be of hitting a bird by firing a gun +at random into the air.</p> + +<p>There is, however, something rather trying to +the nerves of timid lady passengers, in hearing +the unearthly scream of this awful trumpet +sound its note of alarm, at regular intervals at +midnight, while they lie sick, miserable and +helpless in their berths. When for a time the +sound ceases, indicating that the horizon has +become so cleared ahead that the lookout-men +can see, their hearts revive within them, only to +sink again however when a few minutes later +perhaps, or perhaps a few hours, the frightful +sound is heard again, sending its screaming note +of alarm far and wide over the sea.</p> + +<p>In a day or two after leaving Halifax, the ship +came upon the banks of Newfoundland, a vast +area of foggy and stormy sea, the darkest, +dreariest and most dangerous portion of the +Atlantic. Indeed upon these banks almost all +conceivable dangers of the sea seem to congregate. +The water is shallow upon the banks and +that brings fish, and the fish bring fishermen in +immense numbers, and the steamers in dark and +foggy nights and days are in constant danger of +running foul of them. The gulf stream brings +a vast quantity of comparatively warm water<span class="pagenum" id="Page_75">[75]</span> +here from the Gulf of Mexico and the tropics, +while at the same time the winds and currents +from Baffin’s bay float down immense fields and +mountains of ice, which chill the air and produce +fogs, mists, rains and driving storms.</p> + +<p>The steamer was two or three days in crossing +the banks, and during almost all this time she +was enveloped in thick misty rains, which kept +the decks continually wet, and covered the surface +of the sea in every direction, concealing the +fishing vessels, and the icebergs, and all other +dangers entirely from view. The trumpet was +kept continually blowing, by which means it was +probable that fishermen might be warned,—but +the greatest danger was from icebergs, for which, +of course, no warning could be of any avail.</p> + +<p>At length, on Monday evening, Mrs. McGregor +comforted all the ladies, by saying, that the next +morning the ship would be off the banks, and +that then in all probability they would find good +weather. This proved to be the case. Grimkie +went up to the deck before breakfast, and he +found instead of thick mists and rain covering +the whole surface of the water, only a stratum +of clouds in the sky, while the horizon was open +and clear in every direction around. Mrs. Morelle +and Florence too, had now become somewhat +accustomed to the motion of the ship, and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_76">[76]</span> +their appetites began to return. And when at +length, about the middle of the forenoon, a sun-beam +made its appearance in the little prismatic +piece of glass which was set in the ceiling of the +stateroom, overhead, they began to feel quite +cheerful and happy. The same effect was produced +in many other staterooms, occupied by +ladies. They began to feel as if they could get +up and dress themselves, so as to eat their dinners +in a somewhat civilized manner.</p> + +<p>Things improved after this every day. The +ladies of the different staterooms began to become +somewhat acquainted with each other +through Mrs. McGregor, who informed them of +each other’s condition, and conveyed messages +of politeness and good will to and fro. There +were a number of children too, who played in the +passages, and thus became acquainted with each +other, and were brought in by each other to visit +their mothers still lying perhaps upon their settees +or in their berths.</p> + +<p>Mrs. Morelle became so well acquainted with +one of her neighbors who occupied the stateroom +opposite to hers, across the passage-way, one +which was quite small and confined, that she +often invited her to come and dine with her. +Sometimes Florence was of the party too, but +generally from this time Florence preferred to go<span class="pagenum" id="Page_77">[77]</span> +up to the great saloon, and take dinner there with +Grimkie and John. In such cases she would +come after leaving the table and look in at her +mother’s stateroom, where she usually found her +mother and her visitor enjoying themselves very +well indeed, with nice beef-steaks, fried potatoes, +and tumblers of iced lemonade.</p> + +<p>After this time every thing went on smoothly +and prosperously till the end of the voyage. +After leaving the banks there are no special dangers +to be apprehended by a Cunard ship, in +crossing the Atlantic, and every body on board +was now in good spirits, looking forward with +great pleasure to the approaching termination of +the voyage.</p> + +<p>At length, on Saturday afternoon, about four +o’clock, news came down to the ladies in the +staterooms that land was in sight. The land +first seen consisted of certain high mountains in +the vicinity of the town of Killarney, in the +southwestern part of Ireland. A few hours later +the ship passed Cape Clear, which is the southernmost +point of Ireland, and then bearing a +little to the northward followed the coast toward +the Cove of Cork, where she was to touch in order +to land passengers and mails.</p> + +<p>She reached this place between eight and nine +o’clock. A tender came off from Queenstown,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_78">[78]</span> +which is a town situated at the mouth of the +harbor, to take the mails and the passengers that +were to be landed here. The other passengers, +who were to go on with the ship to Liverpool, +and who were now all in excellent spirits as they +considered their voyage substantially over, established +themselves upon camp-stools and settees +upon the upper deck, watching the operation of +putting the mails on board the tender, or looking +upon the green shores of Ireland, which as the +sun had but just gone down, were brightly illuminated +by the golden radiance of the western +sky.</p> + +<p>The passengers all seemed to feel a peculiar +pleasure in thus approaching the land again; +and they watched the shores, until, as it grew +dark, one after another they went below for the +night. Grimkie and John remained some time +after Mrs. Morelle and Florence had retired.</p> + +<p>The next day being Sunday, divine service was +held in the saloon, and though the ship was out +of sight of land for a large part of the day, the +ladies were nearly all well enough, not only to +attend service in the saloon, but also to sit upon +the upper deck nearly all the afternoon, to watch +for the reappearance of the land, and to talk +about what they were to do after their arrival. +As for Mrs. Morelle she had concluded to postpone<span class="pagenum" id="Page_79">[79]</span> +forming any definite plan in respect to her +tour, until she was safe on shore.</p> + +<p>The children, who had become acquainted on +the voyage, finding they were so soon to bid +good-by to their new friends, made various projects +of excursions together, in case they should +meet each other in the course of their travels.</p> +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_80">[80]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_VII">CHAPTER VII.</h2> +</div> + +<p class="center">MORNING IN LIVERPOOL.</p> + + +<p>Most heartily glad were Mrs. Morelle and +Florence to set foot once more upon dry land. +Grimkie and John, though on the whole well +pleased to arrive at the end of the voyage, had, +nevertheless, found so much to amuse them, and +to occupy their minds, on board the ship, especially +during the last few days, that they had +not been at all impatient to reach the shore. +Immediately on landing they all got into a cab +and drove to the Waterloo Hotel, where rooms +had been ordered for them beforehand by Mr. +Jay, who had written to Liverpool for that purpose, +the week before the <em>Europa</em> sailed.</p> + +<p>They found the rooms all ready for them,—a +parlor and two bed-rooms. The parlor was on +the front of the house, and looked out upon the +street. The bed-rooms were in the rear. One +of the bed-rooms was for Mrs. Morelle and +Florence, and the other for Grimkie and John.</p> + +<p>Of course they all went to bed early. They +found it inexpressibly delightful to have a good<span class="pagenum" id="Page_81">[81]</span> +wide and soft bed to get into, and to go to sleep +without being rocked, though Mrs. Morelle and +Florence still continued to feel the rocking motion +of the ship whenever they shut their eyes.</p> + +<p>In an English hotel the usages are entirely +different from those which prevail in America. +There are no stated hours for meals, and no public +room except one for gentlemen. In an American +hotel there is no objection to a little bustle +and life. Indeed one of the charms of traveling +in America is the pleasure of witnessing the +bustle and life of the hotels. In England, on +the other hand, the hotels are kept as still and +quiet as possible. The idea is, especially when +a lady arrives at one, to make it as much as +possible like her own private house. Often the +landlord, the landlady, the porter, the waiter +and the chambermaid, meet her at the door +when she comes, and receive her just as if they +were her own private servants, and the house +was her own private house. The porter receives +and takes care of the baggage, the landlady conducts +the guests to their parlor, and from the +parlor the chambermaid presently shows the way +to her chambers. The lady establishes herself +in these rooms just as if she were at home. She +has all her meals with her own party, in her +own room, ordering just what she likes, and fixing<span class="pagenum" id="Page_82">[82]</span> +the hours to suit her own convenience. The +fact that there may be other parties in the hotel, +living in the same way, is kept as much as possible +out of view. Thus it happens that a lady is +sometimes several days at a hotel, and one of her +best friends is there too all the time, living in +another wing or in rooms approached by some +other passage-way, while she knows nothing +about it.</p> + +<p>Of course there was a great deal to be done +that evening before the members of our party +were ready to go to bed, but when finally bed-time +arrived, Mrs. Morelle said that she should +not wish to have breakfast very early the next +morning, but the children might get up, she +added, as early as they pleased, and if they +wished, go out and take a walk.</p> + +<p>“Only you must be back by a quarter to +nine,” said she, “for I intend to have breakfast +at nine. And Florence,” she added, “if you +are up in time, I should like to have you order +it.”</p> + +<p>“How shall I order it, mother?” asked +Florence.</p> + +<p>“When you go out into the parlor you will +find the table already set. The waiters always +set all the tables in the different parlors early in +the morning, when they arrange the rooms.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_83">[83]</span> +You must then ring the bell and the waiter will +come. Tell him that your mother will have +breakfast at nine o’clock, and also tell him what +you will have.”</p> + +<p>“And what shall we have mother?” asked +Florence.</p> + +<p>“You may have whatever you please,” said +Mrs. Morelle, “only I should like a fried sole +for one thing.”</p> + +<p>The sole is a remarkably fine fish, in some +sense peculiar to England. It is particularly +nice when fried, and the Americans generally +count a great deal upon having one for breakfast +on the morning after they arrive in Liverpool +from a voyage across the Atlantic.</p> + +<p>Liverpool lies so far to the north, that the +sun, in the middle of June, rises very early,—between +three and four o’clock—and it is quite +light at half past two. Grimkie was deceived +by this very early dawn, and he got up about +three o’clock on the following morning, and +began to dress himself, but happening to look +at his watch he saw how early it was, and so he +went to bed again.</p> + +<p>When he next awoke, it was half past six. +So he determined to get up. John got up too. +They both dressed themselves and went out into<span class="pagenum" id="Page_84">[84]</span> +the parlor, but they found that the shutters +were not open.</p> + +<p>“John,” said Grimkie, “the waiters are all +asleep. We will go out and take a walk and +come back again by and by.”</p> + +<p>So the two boys passed down stairs and went +out into the streets. There were milk carts and +other such things going about, but the shops +were all shut, and there were no signs of opening +them.</p> + +<p>“John,” said Grimkie, “the shopmen are all +asleep too, and there is nothing to see here—but +let us go down to the landing. We shall find +somebody awake there you may depend.”</p> + +<p>Now there is something very curious at Liverpool +in respect to the arrangements made for the +shipping, something that is especially well calculated +to interest such boys as Grimkie and John, +and that is the system of docks and landings. +The tide rises and falls so much that the ordinary +system of fixed piers for vessels to lie at, +and rise and fall with the tide, will not answer. +Accordingly there have been built a range of immense +docks, extending along the shore for many +miles. The ships go into these docks through +vast gates which are opened at high tide, when +of course the river and the docks are both full. +Then the gates are shut to keep the water in, and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_85">[85]</span> +thus although the tide in the river may go down +very low, the ships within the docks, are kept +afloat all the time—the water there being kept +up by the resistance of the gates, which are made +of immense size and strength, in order to enable +them to sustain the pressure.</p> + +<p>Thus in sailing up the river opposite to Liverpool +the voyager sees nothing for miles along the +shore but a lofty wall, of prodigious size interrupted +here and there by towers, gateways, and +other curious structures—and beyond it a forest +of masts and steamboat funnels, rising above it, +in countless thousands. The wall is the outer +line of the docks, and the masts and funnels seen +beyond belong to the ships and steamers which +are lying within.</p> + +<p>Grimkie and John went down to the shore and +rambled about for an hour or more among these +docks. They saw immense numbers of ships +floating in the basins—which were full of water, +although it was low tide in the river outside—and +the draw-bridge and gates connecting one +lock with another, and vessels loading and unloading, +and men hoisting boilers and machinery +into steamers by means of prodigious iron cranes, +and other such spectacles.</p> + +<p>They also saw the landing-stage, which is one +of the wonders of Liverpool. It is an immense<span class="pagenum" id="Page_86">[86]</span> +floating wharf which rises and falls with the tide +so as always to preserve the same level in respect +to the water. Here all the ferry boats, and tug +boats, and tenders, and other small steamers land, +as well as row boats and sail boats innumerable, +the coming and going of which make the great +landing-stage one of the busiest places in the +world.</p> + +<p>The boys were so much interested in what they +saw, that instead of getting back to the hotel at +eight o’clock as they had intended, it was a quarter +of nine when they arrived. They found that +Florence had ordered breakfast, and that the +table was set. There was also a pleasant little +coal fire burning in the grate, for the morning +was cool. In a short time Mrs. Morelle appeared, +and soon afterward the whole party sat down to +breakfast.</p> +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_87">[87]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_VIII">CHAPTER VIII.</h2> +</div> + +<p class="center">PLANS FORMED.</p> + + +<p>“Now children,” said Mrs. Morelle, while she +and the children were at breakfast, “since we +are safe on shore, we can begin to talk about our +plans. It is now about the middle of June. +Mr. Morelle will not arrive in London until September. +So that we have two months and a half +to spend in rambling about. And the question +is where we shall go.”</p> + +<p>“<em>You</em> must decide that mother,” said Florence.</p> + +<p>“Yes,” replied Mrs. Morelle, “I will decide it, +but first I wish to hear what you all have to say +about it. You may all propose the plans which +you would prefer, and then I will take the subject +into consideration and decide.”</p> + +<p>The children then all began to talk about +the different tours which they had heard the +passengers speak of on board the ship, toward +the end of the voyage, when they had become +well enough to take out their maps and +guide-books, and to consult together about the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_88">[88]</span> +tours which they were to make. Florence said +that there was a beautiful region called the lake +country, full of mountains and lakes, which lay +to the north of Liverpool, in the counties of +Cumberland and Westmoreland. The Isle of +Wight was proposed too, which is a very charming +island lying off the southern coast of England, +and a great place of resort for parties travelling +for health or pleasure.</p> + +<p>John said that for his part he would like to go +directly to Paris. His motive for this was partly +the long and rapid journey by railway and steamboat +which it would require, but chiefly because +he wished to see the performances at the Hippodrome, +a famous place in Paris for equestrian +shows, of which he had heard very glowing accounts +before he left America.</p> + +<p>When it came to Grimkie’s turn to propose a +plan, he said that what he should like best, if he +thought that his aunt and Florence would like it, +would be to go to the Orkney Islands.</p> + +<p>“To the Orkney Islands!” exclaimed Mrs. +Morelle in a tone of surprise; “why they are beyond +the very northern extremity of Scotland.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, Auntie, I know they are,” said Grimkie; +“that is the reason why I want to go and see +them.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_89">[89]</span></p> + +<p>Mrs. Morelle paused a moment, and seemed to +be thinking.</p> + +<p>“Florence,” said she, at length, “go into our +bedroom and get my little atlas. You will find +it on the table there. I took it out of the trunk +this morning.”</p> + +<p>Mrs. Morelle always carried a small atlas with +her, especially when travelling with the children, +for she found that occasions were continually +arising in which it was necessary, or at least +very desirable, to refer to the map.</p> + +<p>Florence went out, and in a few minutes returned +bringing the atlas with her.</p> + +<p>Mrs. Morelle took the atlas and opened it at +the map of Scotland. After examining the map +attentively, she turned to the map of North +America.</p> + +<p>“The Orkney Islands extend as far up as latitude +fifty-nine and a half,” said she, “and the +lower point of Greenland is only sixty. So that +you would take us to within half a degree of the +latitude of Greenland.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, Auntie,” said Grimkie, “that is just +it. To think that we can go so far north as +that and have good roads and good comfortable +inns all the way.”</p> + +<p>“But we should have to go a part of the +way by sea,” said Mrs. Morelle. “The Orkneys<span class="pagenum" id="Page_90">[90]</span> +are islands at some distance from the main +land.”</p> + +<p>“Only six miles, Auntie,” said Grimkie. “It +is only across the Pentland Firth, and that is +only six miles wide.”</p> + +<p>“But are not the seas in that region very +stormy?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, Auntie,” said Grimkie, “they are the +stormiest seas in the world. Those are the +seas that the old Norsemen used to navigate, +between the coasts of Norway and Scotland, and +the Orkney and Shetland Islands and Iceland. +The Norsemen were the greatest sailors in the +world. They lived almost always on the water, +and the harder it blew the better they liked it. +I want to go and see where they used to sail.”</p> + +<p>Grimkie had recently been studying history at +the Chateau, and it was there that he had learned +about the wonderful exploits which those old sea +kings, as they were sometimes called, used to +perform in the ships in which they navigated +these stormy northern seas. They were very +rude and violent men, and they seemed to consider +that they had a right to everything that +they could find, no matter where, provided they +were strong enough to take it. The richest or +the most daring among them, who found means +to build or buy one or more vessels, would enlist<span class="pagenum" id="Page_91">[91]</span> +a party of followers, and with this horde make +descents upon any of the coasts in all those regions, +and plunder the people of their cattle, or +seize their little town. Sometimes they would +take possession of certain places on the coast +and make agreements with the people living +there, that if they would give them a certain +portion of their cattle every year, they would +protect them from any other marauders who +might come to rob them. This the people +would consent to do, and thus the foundation +was laid for territorial governments, on the different +coasts adjoining these northern seas.</p> + +<p>In process of time the Norsemen and their +descendants extended their incursions not only +to the islands north of Scotland and to Scotland +itself, but also to the coasts of England and Ireland, +and at last even of France, where they +settled a country, which, from their occupancy +of it, received the name of Normandy, which +name it retains to the present day.</p> + +<p>It was among these rude men, and in these +boisterous and terrible seas, where a dismal twilight +reigns almost supreme for half the year, +and winds and fogs and ice, and sweeping and impetuous +tides, have almost continual possession +of the sea, that the progenitors of the present +race of British and American seamen had their<span class="pagenum" id="Page_92">[92]</span> +origin. The case is often referred to in history, +as affording a conspicuous illustration of the +effect which the encountering of difficulty and +danger produces, in stimulating the exertions of +men, and developing the highest capacities of +their nature.</p> + +<p>“There is another reason,” said Grimkie, +“why I should like to go <em>now</em> to the Orkney +Islands, and that is because it is so near the +summer solstice. I have a great desire to get as +far north as I can in the time of the summer +solstice. Even here the sun rises now between +three and four, and it is quite light at two. In +the Orkneys there can scarcely be any night at +all.”</p> + +<p>Grimkie it seems had been studying astronomy +as well as history, at the Chateau, and so he +was quite learned about the summer solstice and +other such things. It may be well, however, for +me to explain, for the sake of the younger portion +of my readers, that the phrase summer solstice +refers, for the northern hemisphere, to that +portion of the year, when the sun, in his apparent +motion, comes farthest to the north, as the +winter solstice relates to that portion of the year +when the sun declines farthest to the south.</p> + +<p>The summer solstice occurs on the twenty-first +or twenty-second of June, and the winter solstice<span class="pagenum" id="Page_93">[93]</span> +on the twenty-first or twenty-second of +December.</p> + +<p>In the summer solstice the days are longest +and the nights shortest. In the winter solstice +the days are shortest and the nights longest—that +is, to all people living in northern latitudes.</p> + +<p>Now it is a very curious circumstance, the +cause of which it would be somewhat difficult to +explain without showing it by means of a globe, +that the difference in length between the days +and the nights increases greatly the farther +north we go. On or near the equator the difference +is very little, at any part of the year. The +days throughout the whole year are very nearly +twelve hours long, and the nights too. At the +pole, however, if it were possible for any one to +reach the pole, the day would continue during +the whole twenty-four hours for six months in +the year, and then the night would continue +through the whole twenty-four hours during the +remaining six months. In the latitude of the +southern part of Greenland, the days, at the +time of the summer solstice, are more than +eighteen hours long, and the nights not quite six.</p> + +<p>There is another remarkable phenomenon too, +to be observed in high northern latitudes, in the +time of the summer solstice, which Grimkie was +very desirous of verifying by his own observation,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_94">[94]</span> +and that is the long continuance of the twilight, +and the very early appearance of the dawn. The +reason of this is that the path of the sun is so +oblique to the horizon, or in other words the sun +goes down in so slanting a direction, that it is a +long time after sunset before he gets low enough +to withdraw his light entirely from view.</p> + +<p>“I should think,” said Grimkie, “that in the +Orkney Islands it would be light nearly all night. +The sun does not set there now till after nine +o’clock, and it rises again before three, and so +I should think the twilight would not be over +before the dawn would begin. And I want to +go and see if it really is so.”</p> + +<p>“It would be very curious indeed,” said Florence, +“to have it light all night, and no moon. +I should like to see it myself, if it really is so.</p> + +<p>“But then,” she added, after a pause, “we +should have to sit up all night to see it.”</p> + +<p>“No,” said Grimkie. “We might get up from +time to time, and look out the window. Or perhaps +we might be travelling all night somewhere, +and then we should see it.”</p> + +<p>After some farther conversation, Mrs. Morelle +said that she would not decide at once in respect +to Grimkie’s plan, but would wait until she had +obtained some farther information.</p> + +<p>“Or rather,” she said, “until <em>you</em> have obtained<span class="pagenum" id="Page_95">[95]</span> +some farther information for me. After +breakfast you may go to a bookstore and buy a +good travelling map of Scotland, and also a railway +guide. Florence and John may go with you, +if they please. Then some time during the day +you may study out the different ways of going, +and see which you think is the best way. You +must find out where the steamer sails from too, +to take us across the six miles of water. Then +at dinner to-day you can tell me what you have +found out, and show me by the map, exactly +which way we shall have to go, and what sort of +conveyances we shall have for the different portions +of the journey. Then when I have all the +facts before me I can decide.”</p> + +<p>Grimkie accordingly bought the map and the +guide book, and he spent more than two hours +that day in studying them so as to make himself +as thoroughly acquainted as possible with every +thing pertaining to the route. Mrs. Morelle did +not assist him in these researches. In fact she +was out shopping during most of the time while +Grimkie was making them. Besides she thought +it best to leave him to investigate the case as well +as he could himself, in the first instance, without +any aid.</p> + +<p>Accordingly, when the party were assembled +for dinner that day, and just before the waiter<span class="pagenum" id="Page_96">[96]</span> +brought the dinner in, Mrs. Morelle asked Grimkie +what sort of report he had to make about +the way of reaching the Orkney Islands.</p> + +<p>“I have some bad news for you, in the first +place,” said Grimkie. “We shall have a great +deal more than six miles to go in a steamer.”</p> + +<p>“How is that?” asked Mrs. Morelle.</p> + +<p>“Because there is no steamer that goes across +in the shortest place,” said Grimkie. “There is +a sail boat that goes that way, to take the mails, +but we could not go in the sail boat very well. +The only large steamer is one that goes from Edinburgh. +The only places where it stops are Aberdeen +and Wick. Wick is the last place it +touches at. And from Wick to Kirkwall, which +is the town where we land in the Orkneys, it is +about sixty miles. So that we should have a +steamer voyage of five or six hours to take.”<span class="pagenum" id="Page_97">[97]</span></p> + +<p>“That is bad news indeed,” said Mrs. Morelle.</p> + +<p>“But then there is one thing favorable about +it,” continued Grimkie, “and that is that there +is only six miles of the voyage that is in an open +sea. We should be sheltered by the land on one +side all the way, excepting for about six miles. +We might at any rate go as far as Wick, and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_98">[98]</span> +then see how the weather is. If the sea is smooth +and calm, then we might go on board the steamer. +If not we might wait for the next steamer or give<span class="pagenum" id="Page_99">[99]</span> +it up altogether. All the way from here to Wick +there will be no difficulty. It will be a very +pleasant journey.”</p> + +<p class="p2"></p> +<div class="chapter"> +<div class="figcenter" id="i_097a"> +<img src="images/i_097a.jpg" alt="" width="428" height="700"> +<p class="caption center">Visit to the Orkney Islands</p> +</div> +</div> +<p class="p2"></p> + +<p>Grimkie then unfolded his map in order to explain +to his aunt the general features of the +country so far as they affected the different modes +of travelling to the north of Scotland.</p> + +<p>“Here is Wick,” said Grimkie, pointing to the +situation of that town on the northwest coast of +Scotland. It lies as the reader will see by the +map, north of a great bay formed by the union +of Murray and Dornock Firths. Grimkie pointed +out the situation of Wick and also that of Inverness, +which lies in the bottom of the bay, at the +head of Murray Firth.</p> + +<p>“The steamer,” he says, “sails from Edinburgh +once a week. She touches at Aberdeen, +for that is directly in her way, on the eastern +coast.”</p> + +<p>Here Grimkie pointed out the situation of +Aberdeen.</p> + +<p>“But she does not go to Inverness,” continued +Grimkie, “although that is a very large and important +town, because that would take her too +much out of her way. So she steers right across +the mouth of the bay, where she must be in the +open sea for some time, and makes for Wick. +There she takes in freight and passengers, and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_100">[100]</span> +then sails again north along the coast to the +Orkney Islands. The town where she stops in +the Orkneys is Kirkwall. After that she sails +on and goes to the Shetland Islands, fifty or +sixty miles farther over the open sea.”</p> + +<p>“But Grimkie,” said Mrs. Morelle, “why did +not you propose to go to the Shetland Islands +instead of the Orkneys, while you were about +it? You would be still more among the Norsemen’s +seas there, and the nights would be still +shorter.”</p> + +<p>“Ah!” said Grimkie, “that was my discretion, +Auntie. I should like very much to go on +to the end of the route, and to see the Shetland +ponies, but I knew that you and Florence would +not like so long a voyage, and so I only proposed +going to the Orkneys.”</p> + +<p>“That <em>was</em> discretion indeed,” said Mrs. +Morelle. “But tell us the rest of the plan. +How about getting to Wick?”</p> + +<p>“The next stage this side of Wick,” said +Grimkie, “is Inverness. From Inverness to +Wick we should go by stage-coach. That we +should all like. You said the other day, on +board ship, that you would like one more good +ride in an English stage-coach, and here is an +excellent chance. The road winds in and out to +pass round the lochs and firths, and then coasts<span class="pagenum" id="Page_101">[101]</span> +along the sea delightfully. At least so my +guide book says. There is one splendid pass +which it goes through, equal to Switzerland.”</p> + +<p>“I should like that very much,” said Mrs. +Morelle. “And now how about getting to +Inverness?”</p> + +<p>“There are three ways,” said Grimkie. “We +can go by the railroads on the eastern side of +the island, or by coaches and posting up through +the center, or by inland steam navigation on the +western side.”</p> + +<p>Grimkie then went on to explain what he had +learned by long study of the maps and guide +books during the day. The information which +he communicated was substantially as follows:</p> + +<p>The western part of Scotland north of Glasgow +is so mountainous, and so intersected in +every direction with long and narrow bays setting +in from the sea, and also with inland lakes, +that no railroad can well be made there. By +connecting these lakes, however, and by cutting +across one or two narrow necks of land, and +making canals and locks along the sides of some +rapid rivers, a channel of inland navigation has +been opened, by which steamers can pass all the +way from Glasgow to Inverness, through the +very heart of the country. The route of the +steamers in taking this voyage, for some portion<span class="pagenum" id="Page_102">[102]</span> +of the way, lies along the shore of the sea, but it +is in places where the water is so sheltered by +islands and by lofty promontories and headlands, +that the ocean swell has very little access to it +in any part of the way.</p> + +<p>On the eastern coast, on the other hand, the +country is comparatively smooth and well cultivated, +and a line of railroad extends on this +side all the way from Edinburgh to Inverness. +Thus the party might, as Grimkie explained the +case to them, either go, up to Inverness from +Edinburgh by railroad, on the eastern side, +through a smooth and beautiful country filled +with green and fruitful fields, and with thriving +villages and towns,—or by steamboat from Glasgow +on the western side, among dark mountains +and frowning precipices, and wild but beautiful +solitudes. Florence voted at once and very +eagerly in favor of the mountains.</p> + +<p>“Then there is a third course still that we can +take,” said Grimkie; “we can go up through +the center of the island.”</p> + +<p>“And how shall we travel in that case?” +asked Mrs. Morelle.</p> + +<p>“There is no railroad yet through the center,” +said Grimkie, “and no steamboat route. +So we should have to go by coach, or else by a +hired carriage.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_103">[103]</span></p> + +<p>“And what sort of a country is it?” asked +Florence.</p> + +<p>“Some parts of it are very beautiful,” said +Grimkie, “and some parts are very wild. We +should go through the estates of some of the +grandest noblemen in Great Britain. The guide +book says that one duke that lives there planted +about twenty-five millions of trees on his grounds, +but I don’t believe it.”</p> + +<p>“It <em>may</em> be so,” said Mrs. Morelle.</p> + +<p>“Twenty-five millions is a great many,” said +Grimkie.</p> + +<p>“I don’t see where he could get so many +trees,” said John.</p> + +<p>“Probably he raised them from seed in his +own nurseries,” said Mrs. Morelle.</p> + +<p>“He could not have nurseries big enough to +raise so many,” said John.</p> + +<p>“Let us see,” said Grimkie. “Suppose he +had a nursery a mile square and the little trees +grew in it a foot apart. We will call a mile five +thousand feet. It is really more than five thousand +feet, but we will call it that for easy reckoning. +That would give us five thousand rows +and five thousand trees in a row—five thousand +times five thousand.”</p> + +<p>Grimkie took out his pencil and figured with it<span class="pagenum" id="Page_104">[104]</span> +for a moment, on the margin of a newspaper, and +then said,</p> + +<p>“It makes exactly twenty-five millions. So +that if he had a nursery a mile square, and +planted the trees a foot apart, he would have just +enough.”</p> + +<p>“Never mind the Duke of Athol’s trees,” said +Mrs. Morelle. “Let us finish planning our journey.”</p> + +<p>But here the door opened and two waiters came +in bringing the dinner. So the whole party took +their seats at the table. Afterward, while they +were sitting at the table, Mrs. Morelle asked +Grimkie what he had concluded upon as the best +way for them to take of all the three which +he had described, in case they should decide to +go to the Orkney Islands.</p> + +<p>“You see, Auntie,” said he, “we shall of course +go by railway from here to Glasgow, and it will +make a pleasant change to take the steamboat +there. It is a beautiful steamboat and excellently +well managed. It is used almost altogether for +pleasure travelling, and every thing is as nice in it +as a pin. Then it must be very curious to see the +green glens and the sheep pastures, and the highland +shepherds on the mountains, as we are sailing +along. Then when we got to Inverness we +shall change again into the stage-coach, to go to<span class="pagenum" id="Page_105">[105]</span> +Wick, and at Wick we shall take the deep sea +steamer. So we shall have a series of pleasant +changes all the way.”</p> + +<p>“I am not sure how pleasant the last one will +be,” said Mrs. Morelle.</p> + +<p>“If we have pleasant weather and a smooth +sea, I think it will be very pleasant indeed,” said +Grimkie. “It will be amusing to think how far +we are going away, and also to see what kind of +people there will be going to the Orkney and +Shetland Islands.”</p> + +<p>“But suppose it should not be pleasant weather +and a smooth sea.”</p> + +<p>“Then we will not go,” said Grimkie. “We +will stop at Wick and come back again, if we do +not wish to wait for the next steamer. It will +be a very curious and interesting journey to Wick, +even if we do not go any farther at all.”</p> + +<p>Mrs. Morelle said that she would consider the +subject, and give her decision the next morning.</p> + +<p>The next morning she told the children that +she had concluded to go, and to follow the plan +which Grimkie had marked out for the journey.</p> + +<p>“But there is one thing that we must not +overlook,” said she. “We must be sure that we +have got money enough. So you must make a +calculation how long it will take us to go, and +how much it will cost. Of course you can not<span class="pagenum" id="Page_106">[106]</span> +calculate exactly, but you can come near enough +for our purpose. When you have made the calculation, +put down the items on paper and show +it to me.”</p> + +<p>Grimkie made the calculation as his aunt had +requested. He did not attempt to estimate the +expense of each day precisely. That would have +been impossible. He reckoned in general the +hotel expenses, all the way, at so much a day, +from the number of days which it would require, +and then from the railway guide and other books +he found what the fares would be for the travelling +part of the work. He also made a liberal +allowance for porterage, coach hire, and other +such things. When he had made out his account +he gave it to Mrs. Morelle, and she showed it to +the keeper of the hotel, and asked him if he +thought that was a just estimate. Mr. Lynn, +after examining it carefully, said that he thought +it was a very good estimate indeed, and that the +allowances were all liberal; and as the total came +entirely within the amount which Mrs. Morelle +had with her in sovereigns, she concluded that it +would be safe to proceed.</p> + +<p>The party accordingly went to the station that +very afternoon and took passage for Carlisle, a +town near the frontier of Scotland, and on the +way to Glasgow.</p> +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_107">[107]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_IX">CHAPTER IX.</h2> +</div> + +<p class="center">THE RAILWAY RIDE.</p> + + +<p>“Now, Florence,” said Grimkie, when the cab +arrived at the station, and stopped for the party +to get out, “now we shall see which is the best—an +English railroad ride, or an American one.”</p> + +<p>A man in a peculiar velveteen dress of a bronze +green color, and with a badge upon his arm to +mark his official character, came with a barrow, +and in a very respectful manner asked where the +party were going.</p> + +<p>“To Carlisle,” said Grimkie.</p> + +<p>“Very well,” said the man. “If you will follow +me to the platform I will show you where to +get the tickets.”</p> + +<p>So saying the porter put the trunks and all the +parcels carefully upon his barrow, and led the +way through an arched passage into the interior +of the station. Grimkie paid the cabman, and +then, with the rest of the party, followed the +porter.</p> + +<p>When they entered the station, a remarkable +scene presented itself to view. Florence looked<span class="pagenum" id="Page_108">[108]</span> +about with great surprise and admiration. She +saw an immense space covered with a glass roof, +with platforms flagged with stone along the sides, +and great numbers of trains on the different +tracks in the center. Great hissing locomotives +were moving to and fro, on these tracks, and parties +of travellers, with porters wheeling their +trunks and parcels on their barrows, were moving +in various directions along the platforms. +There were doors opening into pretty rooms, with +signs over them, marked, First Class Waiting +Rooms, and Second Class Waiting Rooms, and +First Class Refreshment Rooms, and the like. +One of the objects which most strongly attracted +Florence’s attention, was a very elegant little +book stall, with a great variety of entertaining +books displayed on the shelves of it, together +with prints, newspapers and periodicals, all neatly +arranged on open shelves, or behind glass sashes.</p> + +<p>But there was not time to stop and look at +these things, for the porter went on, and it +seemed necessary to follow him. He took the +barrow near to one of the trains which was +standing upon the track, and stopping there, he +said to Grimkie,</p> + +<p>“You have plenty of time, sir. The train +does not go for twenty minutes. Your luggage +will be quite safe here, and if you will come<span class="pagenum" id="Page_109">[109]</span> +with me I will show you the waiting-room, and +then I will come and tell you when it is time to +get the tickets.”</p> + +<p>“Can’t I get the tickets now?” asked Grimkie.</p> + +<p>“Not quite yet, sir,” said the porter. “The +ticket office for this train will be open in about +ten minutes.”</p> + +<p>So saying, the porter led the way to the first +class waiting room, and the whole party went in. +They found a spacious and handsomely furnished +room, with a great table in the center, and very +comfortable-looking sofas and arm-chairs against +the walls. On one side was a door opening into +the refreshment room, where they saw a large +table elegantly set, as if for a sumptuous dinner. +Beyond was a counter loaded with decanters, +plates of fruits, tarts, pies, and all sorts of delicacies, +and with one or two very tidy-looking +girls behind it, ready to wait upon customers.</p> + +<p>“What nice rooms!” said Florence.</p> + +<p>“Yes,” said Grimkie. “These are for the +first class passengers.”</p> + +<p>“How did the porter know that we were going +first class?” asked Florence.</p> + +<p>“He knew by our looks,” said Grimkie; +“besides, he knew by our being Americans. +Americans always take the first class. They +don’t go for marking themselves publicly as<span class="pagenum" id="Page_110">[110]</span> +second rate people, and so whether they are rich +or poor, they all rush into the first class carriages.”</p> + +<p>“Who told you that?” asked Florence. +Florence knew very well that Grimkie was +quoting what somebody else had said, for the +language did not sound at all as if it were original +with him.</p> + +<p>“A gentleman on board the steamer,” said +Grimkie, coolly.</p> + +<p>“Mother,” said Florence, turning to Mrs. +Morelle, who had seated herself comfortably +upon one of the sofas, “let us go out on the +platform again. It is a great deal more amusing +there than here.”</p> + +<p>“I think so, too,” said Mrs. Morelle. So saying, +she rose from her seat, and they all went +together out upon the platform, and began to +walk up and down, amusing themselves with +observing what was going on. Grimkie and +John began to read the placards and notices +which were posted up along the walls. Some +of them were adorned with pictures printed in +colored inks, and were mounted in handsome +frames.</p> + +<p>While they were looking at these things, the +porter came again and told Grimkie that the +ticket office was now open, and he proceeded to<span class="pagenum" id="Page_111">[111]</span> +show him the way to it. Grimkie bought the +tickets, and then the porter led the way toward +the night train. Mrs. Morelle and John went +on together after him, and Grimkie and Florence +followed.</p> + +<p>“This is very nice,” said Florence, “to have +a man wait upon us in this way, and show us +exactly what we are to do.”</p> + +<p>“Yes,” said Grimkie, “but then we have to +pay for it.”</p> + +<p>“No,” replied Florence, “for I saw a notice +posted up that the men were not allowed to receive +anything whatever from the passengers. +If they do take anything they are to be dismissed.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t mean that we have to pay the +<em>men</em>,” said Grimkie, “but the <em>company</em>. The +fares are a great deal higher in England than in +America. Here they have plenty of servants to +wait upon us at the stations, and they charge +accordingly. In America every man takes care +of himself and saves his money.”</p> + +<p>“Not all of it,” said Florence.</p> + +<p>“No, not all of it,” replied Grimkie, “but all +that part which the company would require to +employ servants at all the stations to take care +of him. Besides, this porter will expect a sixpence +from me, and I have got one all ready to<span class="pagenum" id="Page_112">[112]</span> +give to him. You will see how he will manage +to get it slily. The gentleman on board the +steamer told me all about it.”</p> + +<p>By this time the porter had come to the train. +The train was not composed, as in America, of a +few long cars, but of a larger number of carriages, +each of which contained three separate +compartments, with doors at the sides. The +porter went to one of these carriages, marked +First Class, and opened the door. Grimkie +put in some of the small parcels of the luggage, +and the porter put the trunks upon the top. +He kept one bag in his hands and told Grimkie +that he would hand it to him after he got in. +So Grimkie got into the carriage and took his +seat, and the porter, after he had put up the +trunks upon the top, within the railing which +had been made there to keep them from falling +off, and had covered them with a tarpaulin, took +the bag and put it into the carriage, contriving +at the sane time, when he shut the door, to hold +his hand inside of it a moment, in such a way +that Grimkie could give him the sixpence.</p> + +<p>“You will not change carriages, sir,” said he +to Grimkie, “until you get to Carlisle, and then +you will find your luggage on the top quite safe.”</p> + +<p>“Grimkie,” said Florence, as soon as the man +had gone. “You ought not to have given that<span class="pagenum" id="Page_113">[113]</span> +man a sixpence. He is liable to lose his place +for taking it.”</p> + +<p>“Yes,” said Grimkie. “Provided any body +saw him take it.”</p> + +<p>“That makes no difference,” said Florence, +“whether any body saw him take it or not. It +makes not the least difference in the world. You +have broken the law.”</p> + +<p>“No,” said Grimkie. “<em>I</em> have not broken any +law. There is no law against the traveller’s giving +the sixpence, but only against the porter’s +taking it. <em>He</em> may have broken a law, but I +have not.”</p> + +<p>“Oh Grimkie!” said Florence.</p> + +<p>Florence was no match for Grimkie in the logical +management of an argument, and she did +not know exactly how to reply to his reasoning +in this instance, though she felt very confident +that he was wrong. Her thoughts were, however, +for the present, at once diverted from the subject, +for the train began to move, and in a very few +minutes it appeared that it was entering a dark +tunnel. The interior of the carriage, however, +did not become dark, for in proportion as the day-light +faded away the illumination which it had +produced was replaced by a lamp-light which +gradually began to appear. Where this lamp-light +could come from was at first a mystery,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_114">[114]</span> +but, on looking up, the children saw a lamp burning +brightly in a glass which was set into the top +of the carriage over their heads, with a reflector +above it which threw the light down. This light +made it very cheerful and pleasant within the +car while the train was passing the tunnel.</p> + +<p>On emerging from the tunnel at the other end +a marvelous picture of verdure and beauty met +the view of the travellers, and filled them with +delight. Florence particularly was charmed with +the aspect of the scene. She looked out first at +one window and then the other, scarcely knowing +which way to turn in her fear that something +would escape her. The rich and deep green of +the fields, the hawthorn hedges, in full flower, +the gardens, the beautiful villas, the charming +cottages, half covered with eglantine and ivy, +the little railway stations, which the train passed +from time to time, built substantially of stone, +in very picturesque and endlessly varied forms, +and with the prettiest ornamental gardens which +can be imagined surrounding them, or extending +from them each way along the sloping banks +which bordered the track—these and a hundred +other objects which came into view in the most +rapid and ever changing succession, kept her in a +continual state of excitement.</p> + +<p>It was about one o’clock when the train left<span class="pagenum" id="Page_115">[115]</span> +Liverpool, and it reached Carlisle about half past +five. The distance was about a hundred and +thirty miles. The time passed, however, very +rapidly. A short time before the train arrived, +Mrs. Morelle asked Grimkie what he was going +to do about a hotel.</p> + +<p>“You know,” said she, “that the agreement +is that you are to take the whole care of the +party, just as if you were my courier.”</p> + +<p>A courier is a travelling servant, who is employed +by a gentleman travelling, or by a lady, +or a family, to conduct them wherever they wish +to go on their journey. He takes care of all the +luggage, knows which are the good hotels, makes +bargains with the keepers of them, and settles +the bills, makes arrangements for horses and carriages +when travelling, and in a word relieves his +employers of all trouble and care, and enables +them to make their journey with as much ease +and quiet of mind as if they were merely taking +a morning’s drive on their own grounds at home.</p> + +<p>That is to say, this is the case when the employer +of the courier understands how to manage +properly. It is with travelling couriers as with +all other servants; every thing depends upon the +principles of management adopted by the master +or mistress. A courier is a means of great +convenience and comfort in travelling, or a source<span class="pagenum" id="Page_116">[116]</span> +of continual vexation and trouble, according to +the tact or want of tact displayed by the traveller +himself, in employing and directing him.</p> + +<p>Grimkie looked a little at a loss when his aunt +asked him what hotel he was going to. He said +he had intended to have asked some gentleman +in the cars, supposing that the cars would be +large, as in America, and that there would be a +great many people in them. But in fact there +had been no one in their compartment of the carriage +all the way. He had looked into his guide +book, and the guide book gave the names of two +or three of the hotels in Carlisle, but did not say +which was the best.</p> + +<p>“Read us the names, Grimkie,” said Florence. +“We can judge something by the sound of +them.”</p> + +<p>So Grimkie opened the book and began to read.</p> + +<p>“There’s the Royal Hotel,” said he.</p> + +<p>“We won’t go there,” said John, “at any +rate. We are republicans.”</p> + +<p>“And there’s a hotel called the County +Hotel,” continued Grimkie. “It is in the station.”</p> + +<p>“In the station?” repeated Florence; “let +us go there. It will seem very funny to be at a +hotel that is in the station. May we go to any +hotel that we choose, mother?”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_117">[117]</span></p> + +<p>“You may go to any one that Grimkie +chooses,” replied Mrs. Morelle. “He is responsible +for finding us comfortable quarters for the +night.”</p> + +<p>“I’ll see how the station hotel looks when we +get there,” said Grimkie to Florence, “and if +it looks pleasant we will stop there.”</p> + +<p>This plan for deciding the question in respect +to the Station Hotel seemed to be in theory a +very good one, but it proved unfortunately impracticable, +for when the train stopped, and +Grimkie had helped his party out from the carriage +to the platform, he found no signs of the +hotel to be seen, except two or three porters who +wore the badges of the hotel upon their caps, +and one of whom stood ready at once to take +charge of Grimkie’s luggage and to show the +way to the hotel. Grimkie, who had no time +for reflection, decided at once to accept the offer, +and as soon as the trunks were handed down +and put upon the hotel porter’s barrow, he followed +with Mrs. Morelle and the children where +the porter led.</p> + +<p>They went for some distance along the platform, +and then turned to a side door which led +to a long passage gently ascending. At the end +of this passage they ascended some steps and +entered a door, and there turning to the left they<span class="pagenum" id="Page_118">[118]</span> +came into another long passage which looked +like the entry of the hotel. Apartments of +various kinds opened from it on each side, and +waiters were seen carrying dinners and suppers +to the different rooms. At the end of this passage +was a sort of office, and turning round the +corner an elegant stair-case came into view, leading +to the stories above. A pretty looking +young woman met the party at the office door. +Grimkie said they wanted a sitting-room and +two bed-rooms. The young woman led the way +up stairs to show the rooms.</p> + +<p>In about half an hour after this time the +whole party were sitting down, in excellent +spirits, and with great appetites, to a very nice +dinner, in an elegant little room, with windows +looking out upon a great area filled with omnibuses +and cabs that were waiting for the arrival +of the next train, and upon a street which +passed by a spacious castle-like building that +seemed to stand at the entrance to the town.</p> + +<p>After dinner they all went out to take a walk, +On entering the town they found themselves in +a narrow street with very ancient but very solid +and substantial looking buildings on either side +of it, the whole entirely unlike any thing which +they had ever seen in America. They passed +by several inns which were so quaint and curious<span class="pagenum" id="Page_119">[119]</span> +in their structure, and looked so snug and so +neat, and so much like the representations of +English inns which they had seen in pictures +and drawing-books, that Florence began to be +sorry that they had stopped at the Station Hotel, +which was modern and new, and the rooms in +which were very much like those of a nice hotel +in America.</p> + +<p>“Grimkie,” said she, “we made a mistake. +We ought to have come to one of these little +old fashioned inns here in the town. See what +nice curtains at the chamber windows. If we +had only known about these.”</p> + +<p>“Ah yes,” said Grimkie. “If we could only +manage when we are coming into a strange town, +to have a chance to see all the hotels and inns +beforehand, we could choose a great deal better.”</p> + +<p>“You made a great mistake this time,” said +Florence.</p> + +<p>“Next time then <em>you</em> shall choose,” said +Grimkie.</p> + +<p>Florence was prepared for some sort of tart +reply from Grimkie, to her finding fault with +him, but when she heard so kind and polite a +reply, it produced a reaction in her own feelings. +After a moment’s pause she said,</p> + +<p>“Grimkie, it was <em>I</em> that chose this time.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_120">[120]</span> +Going to the Station Hotel was my plan, after +all.”</p> + +<p>“Was it?” said Grimkie; “well you shall +choose the next time too, if you like.”</p> + +<p>The principal object of the walk which our +party were taking at this time, was to visit the +Cathedral of Carlisle. It was the first cathedral +which the children had had an opportunity of +seeing. They found a very ancient and venerable +pile, with ruins around it, and several little +streets, and open spaces, with pretty houses +fronting them, all of which seemed to belong to +the cathedral, for they were enclosed with it in a +wall which separated the whole precinct from +the rest of the town. This precinct is called +the cathedral close. It pertains exclusively to +the cathedral, and is under ecclesiastical jurisdiction, +in a measure, and contains the dwellings of +the various clergymen and laymen that are attached +to the cathedral service.</p> + +<p>There was a certain air of solemn stillness and +repose reigning about the precincts of the cathedral, +when our party entered the close, which was +very impressive. The venerable walls of the +cathedral itself crumbling with age, the old inscriptions +and sculptured images, now in some +cases almost wholly effaced by the decay of the +stone,—the masses of ruined walls, the remains<span class="pagenum" id="Page_121">[121]</span> +of ancient cloisters or chapels which were seen +here and there rising from the patches of greensward,—the +smooth and solitary walks—and +above all the mournful chirping of the rooks and +swallows and daws that were flying about among +the turrets and parapets far above, or in the tops +of the ancient trees—combined to impart a peculiar +expression of solemn and melancholy +grandeur to the scene, which was wholly indescribable.</p> + +<p>After rambling about the town and the environs +till after ten o’clock, the party returned +to the Station Hotel, where they all went to bed +without candles, for it was not yet dark.</p> + +<p>The next morning, soon after breakfast, Grimkie +paid the bill, and they all went down to the +platform to take the train which was to leave +about half-past eight o’clock for Glasgow. They +were soon all comfortably seated in the carriage, +and five minutes afterward the train was in motion. +They had a delightful journey to Glasgow, +where they arrived safely a little after +noon.</p> +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_122">[122]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_X">CHAPTER X.</h2> +</div> + +<p class="center">THE HIGHLAND GLENS.</p> + + +<p>“Now,” said Grimkie, when the party arrived +at the hotel in Glasgow, “we have come to +the end of the first stage of our journey, that is +the railway stage of it. The next is the steamboat +stage.”</p> + +<p>“I am glad of that,” said Florence. “The +railway ride was very pleasant, but I am ready +for a change.”</p> + +<p>Grimkie had learned in the course of the conversations +which he had held with his fellow-passengers +on board the ship at sea, that it was +best, in travelling in Scotland, especially among +the Highlands, to take as little baggage as possible.</p> + +<p>“On whichever side of Scotland you go up,” +said one of these gentlemen, “you will be likely +to come down on the other side, so that your +journey will either begin at Glasgow and end at +Edinburgh, or it will begin at Edinburgh and +end at Glasgow. You will find it better therefore, +when you are ready to set out from either<span class="pagenum" id="Page_123">[123]</span> +of those towns, to put all that you will want for +the journey in one trunk, and send all the rest of +your baggage across to some hotel in the other +town, to wait there for you till you come back.”</p> + +<p>Grimkie explained all this to his aunt, at the +breakfast table at their hotel in Glasgow. Mrs. +Morelle looked at her travelling map of Scotland, +and she saw that Edinburgh and Glasgow were +in fact situated as is represented above.</p> + +<p>“We shall probably come down from the Orkneys +on that side of the island,” said she, “and +I think it would be convenient to have our +trunks go there, all except one—but then, Grimkie, +we don’t know how to send them there. I +suppose there is some kind of express, if we only +knew where the office was.”</p> + +<p>“Ah, but you remember, Auntie, that father +told us that all we had to do was to be able to +tell distinctly what we wanted, and the people +here would find out how it was to be done.”</p> + +<p>“That was in the public offices,” said Mrs. +Morelle.</p> + +<p>“It will do just as well in the hotels I expect, +Auntie,” said Grimkie. “May I ring the bell +and try?”</p> + +<p>Mrs. Morelle gave the required permission, and +Grimkie rang the bell. Very soon the waiter appeared.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_124">[124]</span></p> + +<p>“I want to see about sending some baggage to +Edinburgh,” said Grimkie.</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir,” said the waiter. “I’ll send up +Boots directly.”</p> + +<p>Boots is the familiar name by which the porter +is designated in the English inns. In these +inns moreover every servant has his own definite +duties to perform, and these are never on any account +intermingled. It is the porter’s duty to +know about railway trains, and conveyances of +all kinds, and about baggage, and sending letters +and parcels, and all such things. The waiter’s +duty, on the other hand, is confined entirely to +the service of the table, and to acts of personal +attendance upon the guests within the hotel. If +any question arises pertaining to transportation +or conveyance of any kind, he has but one answer—“Yes, +sir, I’ll send Boots.”</p> + +<p>In a few minutes the porter appeared, cap in +hand.</p> + +<p>“We want to inquire about sending some of +our luggage to Edinburgh,” said Grimkie. “We +are going to make a tour in the north of Scotland, +and we thought it would be best to send +most of our luggage to Edinburgh to wait there +till we come.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir,” said the porter, “that will be much +the best way for you.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_125">[125]</span></p> + +<p>“And how shall we manage it?” asked Grimkie. +“What have I to do?”</p> + +<p>“You have nothing at all to do,” said the porter, +“except to tell me the name of the hotel +where you will go—or put it upon your luggage, +and leave it in your room here when you go +away. I will attend to it all, and you will find +it quite safe at the hotel when you arrive there.”</p> + +<p>“And how about paying?” asked Grimkie. +“Shall we pay you?”</p> + +<p>“No, sir,” said the porter, “you will have +nothing to pay here. It will not be much, and +they will pay at the hotel in Edinburgh and put +it in your bill.”</p> + +<p>“That will be exactly the thing, Auntie,” said +Grimkie. “Only,” he added, “we do not know +what hotel we shall go to.”</p> + +<p>On being asked by Mrs. Morelle, the porter +gave them the address of a good hotel in Edinburgh, +which he said was in a pleasant situation, +and a well kept house. He also brought Grimkie +a package of gum labels, such as are used in +England for labelling baggage. Grimkie wrote +Mrs. Morelle’s name on several of these labels, +and also the name of the hotel which the porter +had given him, and then, after his aunt had selected +from all the trunks what she thought +would be required for the whole party during the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_126">[126]</span> +tour in Scotland, and had put them in the one +which she was to take, Grimkie with the assistance +of the porter locked and strapped the others, +and put the labels upon them.</p> + +<p>The party spent the rest of the day in rambling +about Glasgow, and in amusing themselves with +the various objects of interest which met their +view in the streets and in the environs, and the +next morning before breakfast, they went on +board the steamer Iona, which was to take them +to Inverness.</p> + +<p>They enjoyed the voyage exceedingly although +at first Florence was somewhat disappointed in +respect to the steamer, which she had expected +would be as much superior, in respect to its size, +and its decorations, to those plying upon the +North River, as Europe is generally considered +superior to America. Instead of this, the Iona +was comparatively quite small, but it was very +neatly arranged, and there was a small, but +richly furnished cabin below, which looked exceedingly +snug and comfortable.</p> + +<p>After rambling about the steamer until they +had explored it in every part, the children went +with Mrs. Morelle and chose a place upon the +deck at a corner near the companion-way, where +they could enjoy the views on every side, and +at the same time, could be comfortably seated all<span class="pagenum" id="Page_127">[127]</span> +the time, if they chose, on camp-stools and +benches.</p> + +<p class="p2"></p> +<div class="chapter"> +<div class="figcenter" id="i_127a"> +<img src="images/i_127a.jpg" alt="" width="650" height="429"> +<p class="caption center">ON BOARD THE IONA.</p> +</div> +</div> +<p class="p2"></p> + +<p>Here they remained for several hours enjoying +the most charming succession of views of mountain +scenery that can be imagined. Grimkie, by<span class="pagenum" id="Page_129">[129]</span> +means of the maps and guide books, followed the +course of the steamer, and found out the names +of all the villages, and castles, and country seats, +which came successively into view, and pointed +them out to his aunt and Florence who examined +them attentively, especially the old castles, +by means of the opera glass.</p> + +<p>The course of the steamer lay through a succession +of channels, lakes and sounds, most of +which were connected with the sea, but they +were so hemmed in by the promontories and +islands which bordered them, as to make it seem +to the party as if they were navigating inland +waters altogether. The channels of water were +so narrow too, in most cases, that the land was +very near. It was generally more like sailing +upon a river, than upon an arm of the sea. The +land was everywhere very mountainous too, and +seemed to rise very abruptly from the water’s +edge, though often it was bordered near the margin +of the water, by villages and towns, and elegant +country seats with green fields and beautiful +gardens adjoining them, and parks and pleasure<span class="pagenum" id="Page_130">[130]</span> +grounds, all of which presented a succession +of most charming pictures to the view.</p> + +<p>In other places the shores of the <em>loch</em>, as the +Scotch call such sheets of water as these, were +wild and solitary,—immense sheep pastures extending +up the mountain sides to a great height, +with flocks of sheep, and dogs, and Highland +shepherds seen here and there, standing motionless +to gaze upon the steamer as it glided swiftly +by.</p> + +<p>As this line of steamers was intended almost +exclusively for the accommodation of tourists, +journeying for health or pleasure, the arrangements +on board were all made with reference +to rendering the voyage as comfortable and as +agreeable as possible. One of the arrangements +made with this view was to stop at night, half +way between Glasgow and Inverness, at a place +situated in the midst of some of the grandest +and most romantic scenery, in order to give the +passengers a quiet night’s sleep, at a spacious +and elegant hotel, built there expressly for the +purpose. The steamer was to touch too at a +great many different places along the route, +wherever there was a pretty village on the margin +of the water, or any grand or picturesque +scenery at a little distance in the interior. +When Mrs. Morelle and her party came on<span class="pagenum" id="Page_131">[131]</span> +board, they had not determined whether to proceed +directly to Inverness, or to stop at Rothsay, +or Oban, or Fort William, or at some other interesting +point, with a view of continuing their +journey on a subsequent day.</p> + +<p>“We will not decide,” said Mrs. Morelle, +“until we get on board the steamer, and see +how we like it, and what the weather is.”</p> + +<p>When, however, the party had embarked and +the voyage was begun, they were all for the first +hour so much interested in the wonderful beauty +and grandeur of the scenery which everywhere +met their view, that they did not think of the +question how far they should go, until Grimkie +saw the man coming round among the passengers +to receive their money, and give them +tickets. Before he had time to say anything +about it, the man came to where Mrs. Morelle +was sitting and said he would take the fare.</p> + +<p>“How much is it, sir?” asked Grimkie.</p> + +<p>The man replied by asking how far they were +going. Grimkie looked to his aunt, not knowing +himself exactly what to say.</p> + +<p>“We are going to Inverness,” said she, “but +we had not fully decided whether to go directly +through, or to stop somewhere, for a day.”</p> + +<p>“You can pay through, madam,” said the +man, “and take a ticket, and then you can<span class="pagenum" id="Page_132">[132]</span> +break the journey where you please. The tickets +are good for a month.”</p> + +<p>“Ah,” said Grimkie, “that will be just the +thing for us.” So he took out his purse and +counted out the number of sovereigns which the +man required, and received the tickets.</p> + +<p>The tickets were made in a very curious manner. +They were printed upon thin paper, and +lined upon the back with green morocco, and +were then folded in three, that is, the upper part +was folded down, and the lower part up, and in +this condition they looked like so many little +green wallets. Florence and John were very much +interested in examining their tickets, and they +wished to have the custody of them themselves. +But Grimkie said no. He was responsible for all +the payments, and he must take charge of the +tickets himself—but they might have them to +look at as often as they pleased.</p> + +<p>John was very much taken with the ticket man’s +phrase “break the journey,” and he began to be +quite desirous that <em>their</em> journey should be +broken at some point or other along the route. +His mother said that she had no objection to +that. So she commissioned Grimkie to look over +the map and the guide books, and read the descriptions +of the different places along the route, +and of the objects of interest to be seen in the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_133">[133]</span> +vicinity of them, and so select a place where in +his opinion it would be best to stop.</p> + +<p>Grimkie immediately set himself to this work, +and after a good deal of patient investigation and +research, he came to the conclusion to recommend +that they should stop at Ben Nevis. Ben Nevis, +he found, lay close upon their course.</p> + +<p>Ben Nevis has usually been considered as the +highest mountain in Scotland. It is any rate altogether +the most celebrated. There is a little +village at the base of it, named Fort William, +where travellers land who wish to ascend the +mountain. This village is at the head of a loch, +and all the environs of it are romantic and beautiful. +Grimkie found a picture of Fort William +in one of the guide books, and showed it to his +aunt, and to Florence and John. He also read +what the guide book said about the place, and +the environs of it, and the mode of ascending +the mountain.</p> + +<p>“I have only one objection to stopping there,” +said Mrs. Morelle, “and that is that I do not like +climbing mountains very well.”</p> + +<p>“But, Auntie,” said Grimkie, “we need not +go up the mountain unless we choose to do it.”</p> + +<p>“True,” said Mrs. Morelle, “but I am pretty +sure you children will want to go up, and I shall +not like to have you go, unless I go too.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_134">[134]</span></p> + +<p>“Then, Auntie, how would you like to stop at +Oban?”</p> + +<p>“What is there remarkable at Oban?” asked +Mrs. Morelle.</p> + +<p>“It is a pretty little town on the western +coast, built along the curve of a bay, under high +hills,” said Grimkie, half reading from his guide +book. “It is a sort of central point and rendezvous +for travellers in the western Highlands, being +the place of departure for many excursions.”</p> + +<p>“What sort of excursions?” asked Mrs. Morelle.</p> + +<p>“The principal are steamboat excursions +among the outlying islands,” said Grimkie, +“such as to Fingal’s cave on the island of Staffa, +and the old monastery in Iona.”</p> + +<p>“Should we be exposed to the swell of the sea +in going to those islands?” asked Mrs. Morelle.</p> + +<p>“I think from the map that we should,” said +Grimkie.</p> + +<p>“Then,” said Mrs. Morelle, laughing, “I +would rather stop at Ben Nevis. I would +rather take the mountain than the sea.”</p> + +<p>“I thought so, Auntie,” said Grimkie.</p> + +<p>And so it was decided that the party should +land at Fort William, at the base of Ben Nevis.</p> +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_135">[135]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XI">CHAPTER XI.</h2> +</div> + +<p class="center">BEN NEVIS.</p> + + +<p>Mrs. Morelle was charmed with the appearance +of Ben Nevis and its environs when the +steamer drew near. The slopes of the mountain +seemed to commence almost at the margin of the +water, and they rose in solemn grandeur to a +vast height, the portions near the summit being +covered with great patches of snow. Lower +down, the mountain sides were rounded and +smooth, and covered with rich green and brown +vegetation, which glowed in the setting sun and +seemed as soft as the richest velvet. Along the +margin of the water were extended the buildings +of the town, with vessels of various size lying at +anchor near.</p> + +<p>The steamer stopped at some distance from the +shore, just as Grimkie and John, who had been +forward to see about getting out the trunk, came +back to see if Mrs. Morelle and Florence were +ready. Mrs. Morelle looked alarmed.</p> + +<p>“Why, Grimkie!” said she, “are they going<span class="pagenum" id="Page_136">[136]</span> +to land us in a boat. I thought they would go +up to the pier. I am afraid to land in a boat.”</p> + +<p>“Then we can go on,” said Grimkie, “to the +end of the sail. It is not a great deal farther.”</p> + +<p>“But I should like to stop and see Ben Nevis, +too,” said Mrs. Morelle hesitating—“if it were +not for landing in a boat—going down such a +steep and narrow ladder.”</p> + +<p>“There can’t be any real danger, Auntie,” +said Grimkie, “but still we will go on if you +prefer. They land by boats at half the places +where we stop.”</p> + +<p>This was very true, and Mrs. Morelle had +taken great interest in watching the progress of +such landings, several times during the day. It +was very curious to see the boat in such cases +come out from the land, and lie upon its oars on +the water in the track of the steamer, until the +steamer came up, and the paddle-wheels were +backed. Then the man standing on the guard +would throw a rope to the boat, which would be +caught by a man at the bows of it, and immediately +made fast, by which means the boat would +be drawn on through the water, by the steamer +which was not yet entirely at rest.</p> + +<p>The boat was soon pulled in under the little +step-ladder leading from the deck, which had +previously been let down, and then the passengers<span class="pagenum" id="Page_137">[137]</span> +who were to land would descend, guarded +carefully, by strong boatmen reaching up from +the boat to the outer side of the ladder, to prevent +the possibility of their falling into the +water, in case of any misstep.</p> + +<p>As fast as the passengers reached the boat, +they stepped over the thwarts and took their +seats in the stern. Then the trunks and other +parcels of baggage were passed down. Then +the boatmen would take the oars again, the rope +was cast off, the boat was pushed away, the paddle-wheels +recommenced their motion, and the +steamer went on, leaving the boat behind to +struggle with the waves as best it could, and +make its slow way to the shore.</p> + +<p>All this had been very interesting to see, as it +appeared to the passengers who stood leaning +over the bulwarks and looking down upon it +from the deck above, but Mrs. Morelle thought +that it would not be very agreeable to go through. +She was afraid, in the first place, to go down such +a steep and narrow ladder, especially when the +resting place was so unstable and insecure at the +bottom. Then she was still more afraid of the +pitching and tossing of the boat, in the surges +made by the paddle-wheels when the steamer +moved away.</p> + +<p>She did not, however, hesitate long, for a moment’s<span class="pagenum" id="Page_138">[138]</span> +reflection convinced her that these fears +were imaginary. There could not possibly be +any real danger in the mode of landing adopted, +as the ordinary and usual method for such a +class of travellers as those on board this steamer. +So she banished her fears, and rising from her +seat, said that she would go.</p> + +<p>By this time the boat had made fast along +side the steamer, and the passengers who were +to go on shore were going down the ladder. +Mrs. Morelle found no difficulty in following +them, Florence and John followed her. Grimkie +remained at the head of the ladder to the +last. When all had descended that were going, +the trunks were put down, and then the boat +pushed off, and the steamer resumed her voyage.<a id="FNanchor_1" href="#footnote_1" class="fnanchor">[1]</a></p> + +<div class="footnote"> + +<p><a id="footnote_1" href="#FNanchor_1" class="label">[1]</a> See Frontispiece.</p> + +</div> + +<p>The next morning, while at breakfast at the +inn at Fort William, Grimkie proposed to his +aunt that they should all make an excursion up +the mountain.</p> + +<p>“Not to the top of it, Auntie,” said he, “but +only so far as you find you will like to go. We +will get a guide and set off together. We will +ride to the foot of the mountain. Then we will +begin to walk up. You shall go first and we +will follow you, and we will not ask to go any +farther than you like. We will go as slowly,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_139">[139]</span> +and stop to rest as often, as you please; and +then when we get high enough for a good view, +we can turn about and come back again.”</p> + +<p>There could of course be no objection to so +exceedingly reasonable a proposal as this, and +Mrs. Morelle said at once that she should like +to make an excursion up the mountain, on those +conditions, very much indeed.</p> + +<p>“If I walk slowly,” said she, “I can walk two +hours.”</p> + +<p>“That will take us up pretty high,” said +Grimkie. “It only takes two hours and a half +to get to the top. So you and Florence may get +ready Auntie, and John and I will go down and +see about a carriage and a guide.”</p> + +<p>The usual mode would have been for Grimkie +to have rung the bell and called for Boots, and +so have made the arrangement for the carriage +and the guide through him. But there were +some preparations that he wished to make +secretly, and so he left his aunt and Florence, +and went down to the coffee-room of the hotel. +He took his seat there at one of the tables, near +a window, and asked the waiter to send Boots +in to him.</p> + +<p>When Boots came, Grimkie told him that +they were going a little way up the mountain, +and made an arrangement with him to have a<span class="pagenum" id="Page_140">[140]</span> +dog-cart got ready immediately, to take them as +far as they could go in a carriage, and also to +engage a guide, and to send the guide in to the +coffee-room to see him. In a few minutes the +guide came.</p> + +<p>He was a nice tidy-looking young man, with +a frank and good-humored countenance, and a +broad Scotch accent in his speech. Grimkie +explained the case to him.</p> + +<p>“We are going up the mountain a little way,” +said Grimkie. “We want to go as far as we +can, but my aunt is not used to climbing mountains +much, and so we must go very slowly.”</p> + +<p>“Oh, aye,” said the guide, “the slower ye +gang, the higher oop y’ell get.”</p> + +<p>The guide had had great experience with travelling +parties attempting to ascend the mountain, +and he had known many ladies to become tired +and discouraged before reaching the top, just because +they could not be contented to go slowly +enough at the beginning.</p> + +<p>After some further discussion and consultation, +the plan for the excursion was matured in all its +details. The guide was to go forward on foot, +carrying with him a supply of provisions which +Grimkie was to have made ready, and to wait at +the end of the carriage road until the party in +the carriage should come up. The provisions—which<span class="pagenum" id="Page_141">[141]</span> +the waiter at the coffee-room subsequently +made ready under Grimkie’s directions—consisted +of a bottle of coffee, another of milk, a cold +roast chicken, some sandwiches, two buttered +rolls, a little paper of salt, one plate, one knife, +four forks, and a tumbler. All these the waiter +packed carefully in two round wooden boxes, and +put the boxes in a bag. That was the way he +said that the guides liked to have their burdens +packed.</p> + +<p>The bag thus arranged was to be put into the +dog-cart, to be carried in that way as far the cart +could go, with a view of being taken by the +guide there, and carried by him over his shoulder +for the rest of the ascent.</p> + +<p>When Grimkie had completed these arrangements +he went up to his aunt’s room again, and +there he found John who had gone up a moment +before him, remonstrating in a somewhat urgent +manner with Florence against a plan which she +entertained of carrying a large guide book up the +mountain, to press flowers in.</p> + +<p>“You can’t carry such a big book as that,” +said John. “It’s ridiculous. We must have +every thing as light as possible, in going up a +mountain, Grimkie says so.”</p> + +<p>“But this is the only book I have got,” said +Florence, “and I must take some book. It is<span class="pagenum" id="Page_142">[142]</span> +very important for me to get some specimens +from Ben Nevis, to carry home for souvenirs.”</p> + +<p>“Then you must bring them down in your +hand,” said John. “We can’t possibly take such +a big book as that; can we Grimkie?”</p> + +<p>“I will see about that presently,” said Grimkie. +“Come with me, John. I want you to go +somewhere.”</p> + +<p>So John laid down the big book and followed +Grimkie down stairs. Grimkie led the way into +the street.</p> + +<p>“Where are you going, Grimkie?” asked John.</p> + +<p>“I am going to see if I can find a bookseller,” +said Grimkie. “But you should not contradict +a young lady in that short way. That’s boyish.”</p> + +<p>“How boyish?” said John.</p> + +<p>“Why boys fly in their sisters’ faces in that +way sometimes, but no gentleman ever does.”</p> + +<p>“But Grimkie,” said John, “it is perfectly +ridiculous to think of carrying such a big book +as that up a high mountain.”</p> + +<p>“That’s the very reason why you ought to be +more gentle in setting her right,” replied Grimkie. +“Do you think a lady likes to have it made +to appear to her face that any thing she says or +does is ridiculous?”</p> + +<p>“Then what shall I do?” asked John.</p> + +<p>“You must be more gentle,” said Grimkie.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_143">[143]</span> +“A lady is like a steamboat; you can’t turn her +short about, by a sudden twitch, when she is +going wrong. You must bring her round by a +sweep—in a grand circle—gently and gracefully. +I’ll show you how.”</p> + +<p>By this time the boys arrived at the door of a +small bookstore, and Grimkie immediately went +in. John followed him. Grimkie asked a young +woman who stood behind the counter if she had +any blotting paper. She immediately produced +half a quire, and Grimkie bought six sheets of +it. These sheets he cut in two with a paper +knife, and then after folding them, cut them +again. He then folded them again, thus bringing +them into a snug compass for carrying, that +is, as the bookbinders would say, into an <em>octavo</em> +form. The paper as it was when he bought it, +was in a folio form. After he had cut and folded +it the first time, it was in a quarto form, and +now after a second folding, by which means each +sheet formed eight leaves, it was put into the octavo +form. Another folding still, which would +have made sixteen leaves to the sheet, would have +produced what is called the sixteenmo form.</p> + +<p>Grimkie and John immediately returned to the +hotel, carrying the paper with them. As soon as +they arrived, Grimkie went to his room and took +a small portfolio off his table. This portfolio was<span class="pagenum" id="Page_144">[144]</span> +simply the cover of a blank book Grimkie had +used at the Chateau for some of his exercises. +When it was full and he had no further occasion +to use it, he had cut out the inside neatly, in order +to save the cover, which was quite a pretty +one, being made of green morocco. He thought +it would make a nice portfolio. He had accordingly +stocked it with small note papers and envelopes, +and had made it serve the purpose of a +stationery case, for his travels.</p> + +<p>He now took out the note paper and his envelopes +from it, and then compared the blotting-paper +in its octavo form with the size of the +cover. He found that by folding it once more, +that is into the sixteenmo form, it would fit the +cover very well. So he cut it open at the octavo +folding, and then after folding it again he slipped +it into the cover and went to find Florence.</p> + +<p>“Florence,” said he, “how do you think this +will do to put your little flowers in up the mountain? +It is made of blotting paper, and that +is much better than the paper of books to press +plants in, for it absorbs the moisture, and so +dries the plants quicker, and that makes them +preserve their colors better.”</p> + +<p>“That will be excellent,” said Florence, taking +the book and looking at it with great interest. +“But how did you know about that?”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_145">[145]</span></p> + +<p>“Our professor of botany at the Chateau,” +said Grimkie, “told us that it is better to have +a book made of blotting paper. Only this book +is not sewed. Could you sew it?”</p> + +<p>“I can sew it in a moment,” said Florence.</p> + +<p>“Then it will do nicely,” said Grimkie. “If +you can sew the leaves together so as to make a +book of them, then we can slip them into the +book cover, and that will be all we shall want. +I can carry it in my pocket. You see you don’t +want large specimens. The smaller and more +delicate they are the better. Our professor told +us that.”</p> + +<p>“Your professor?” repeated Florence.</p> + +<p>“Yes,” replied Grimkie; “he lectured us +about it. ‘Young gentlemen,’ said he, ‘the mode +of procedure is very different both in the selection +of flowers and in the method of preserving them, +according to the object you have in view, whether +to procure botanical specimens for purposes +of science, or souvenirs and tokens for purposes +of sentiment and love.’”</p> + +<p>Grimkie repeated these words in a tone and +manner imitative of a lecturer making a discourse +before an audience, producing thus a very +comical effect, so that both John and Florence +laughed outright.</p> + +<p>“Oh, Grimkie!” exclaimed Florence.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_146">[146]</span></p> + +<p>“I don’t believe he said any such things,” +added John.</p> + +<p>“We verily did,” replied Grimkie. “‘Young +gentlemen,’ said he, ‘when you have advanced +a little farther along the verdant and flowery +path of life, you will sometimes have occasion, +in your various wanderings, to prepare plants +and flowers as tokens of remembrance, or of +other sentiments, or as souvenirs of travel. In +such cases, gentlemen, select small and delicate +specimens—of graceful forms and pretty colors. +Press them till they are dry between leaves of +blotting paper. If necessary, separate the leaves +and stems so as to press and preserve them +separately. You can recompose your flower +afterward. Examine the specimens from time +to time while they are drying, and see that the +stems lie in natural and graceful curves, and +that the leaves and petals are smooth, and fully +extended. Then when they are thoroughly dry, +arrange the parts anew, and gum them delicately +upon a small piece of white paper, with a +suitable inscription beneath, and enclose the +paper in a tinted envelope of the right size to +contain it,—and then when you present it to +the Mary, or the Lucy, or the Ellen, for whom +it is intended, she will perceive that you are a<span class="pagenum" id="Page_147">[147]</span> +young gentleman of taste and skill, as well as +of science.’”</p> + +<p>Grimkie finished this recitation of a portion +of the professor’s lecture with such an air of +mock gravity, that Florence and John both +laughed louder than ever.</p> + +<p>“Oh, Grimkie!” said John, “did the professor +really say that?”</p> + +<p>“Yes,” said Grimkie, “and we all clapped +him.”</p> + +<p>“It seems to me you have pretty funny doings +at the Chateau, Grimkie,” said Florence.</p> + +<p>“We do sometimes,” said Grimkie. “But +hark!” he added, “I thought I heard wheels +coming. No they are not coming yet, but we +must not waste any more time. We must get +ready. The dog-cart will be here very soon.”</p> + +<p>“Good!” said John, at the same time cutting +a caper, to express his joy.</p> + +<p>“But what kind of dogs will they be?” he +added, turning to Grimkie. “Will they be +Esquimaux dogs?”</p> + +<p>“There they come,” said Grimkie; “run to +the window and see.”</p> + +<p>John supposed that a dog-cart was a cart +made to be <em>drawn</em> by dogs. In this idea he +was greatly mistaken, a dog-cart being made to +<em>carry</em> dogs, and not to be drawn by them. It is<span class="pagenum" id="Page_148">[148]</span> +quite a curious vehicle, having its origin in the +wish of sportsmen to provide some means of +transporting their dogs, as well as themselves +and their guns, when going into the field, so that +the dogs may be fresh and in good condition for +their work, when they arrive there.</p> + +<p>It is a very handsomely made vehicle, in the +form of a cart. The seat is double, there being +places for two persons to sit on the front part, +facing the horse, and two directly behind them, +with their backs against those of the first two. +Underneath this double seat is a box or recess, +for the dogs. The lid which shuts this box, is +behind, and is made to open down in such a +manner that when it is opened it is sustained by +a support which holds it in nearly a horizontal +position, where it forms a foot-board for the two +persons riding behind to rest their feet upon.</p> + +<p>The children were all very much interested in +examining the form and construction of the dog-cart +when they went down to the door. The +coachman took the right hand front seat. Mrs. +Morelle took the other front seat. John and +Florence and Grimkie took the seat behind, +where they were so much crowded at first, that +John said he had a great mind to play that he +was a pointer or a setter, and crawl into the box +below.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_149">[149]</span></p> + +<p>After having been shaken together a little +while by the jolting of the carriage—for a dog-cart +moves, even upon a smooth road, with a +very jerking and jolting motion—they found +themselves quite comfortable, and they had a +very amusing ride.</p> + +<p>When they reached the end of the carriage-road, +they found a guide there ready for them. +He took the bag containing the provisions, from +the fore part of the dog-cart where the coachman +had put it, and threw it over his shoulder, +in such a manner that one of the boxes hung +down before him, and the other behind. The +coachman then took the dog-cart to a farmer’s +near by, to put up the horse, to wait until the +party returned, while the guide, followed by his +party, commenced his ascent of the mountain.</p> + +<p>The path was very good, although rather rugged +and steep, but the country was open, there +being in general no trees, but only furze, broom, +whinbushes, and other such shrubs as grow upon +the Scottish Highlands. Grimkie wished very +much that his aunt should ascend to the top of +the mountain, but he knew very well that the +only hope of her being able to do so, must +depend upon their going very slowly at first. +John and Florence who both felt very fresh and +agile, were eager to press forward, but Grimkie<span class="pagenum" id="Page_150">[150]</span> +kept them back, stopping continually to gather +flowers, and to look back at the prospect. +Whenever he found a flat stone with a smooth +and clear surface, he persuaded his aunt to sit +down, and when she was once seated, he detained +her as long as possible, by talking with +her, and amusing her mind with the objects +around her. Then he would point to the next +elevation above, and ask his aunt if she thought +she could go up to it; and she would say, “Oh, +yes! I am not tired at all yet.”</p> + +<p>In this way the party sauntered along for +more than three hours, advancing all the time, +but in a slow and unconcerned manner, without +thought or care, as if they were out for a walk, +without any definite plan in respect to the end +of the excursion. At last, however, about noon, +Mrs. Morelle took out her watch, and expressed +surprise to find how late it was, and said that it +was time for her to begin to think about going +home.</p> + +<p>“Look up there, Auntie,” said Grimkie, +“where that shepherd is standing with his dog. +There must be a grand lookout from there. Let +us go up as high as that, and there we will have +our luncheon, and then, if you please, we will set +out for home.”</p> + +<p>Mrs. Morelle made no objection to going up<span class="pagenum" id="Page_151">[151]</span> +to the point which Grimkie had indicated, and +they soon attained it. Here they found a spring +of water coming out from under a great rock. +Grimkie brought some flat stones and made seats +for the party in a shady and sheltered place, and +then the guide opened the bag and took out the +provisions. Mrs. Morelle was quite surprised to +see so abundant a supply of provisions coming +to view.</p> + +<p>“I did not know that we were going to have +even a luncheon on the mountain,” said she, +“and here you have got enough, almost, for a +dinner.”</p> + +<p>The party remained at the spring for more +than half an hour, and then Mrs. Morelle found +herself so much refreshed by the chicken and +the sandwiches, and especially by the tumbler of +cold coffee which Grimkie mixed for her, that +she said she was almost inclined to go on farther; +and when the guide told her that an hour +more of easy walking would bring her to the +very top, she said she had half a mind to try to +go there.</p> + +<p>“Do you think I could do it, Grimkie?” said +she.</p> + +<p>Grimkie said it was a great thing for a lady +to get to the top of Ben Nevis, but if she felt +strong enough to try it, he should like it very<span class="pagenum" id="Page_152">[152]</span> +much indeed. She might go on for half an hour +more at any rate, and then if she felt tired she +could turn.</p> + +<p>Mrs. Morelle determined to follow this suggestion, +and the result was, that she persevered +until she reached the top.</p> + +<p>The wind blew very fresh and cool upon the +summit, and the party could not remain there +long. While they did remain, however, they +were filled with wonder and delight at the extent +and sublime magnificence of the view. The +mountains lay all around them, clothed with a +velvet-like covering of the softest green, and +between them lay an endless number and variety +of lakes and rivers—all sleeping apparently in +the sun—and green fields, and pretty villages, +and charming glens, in endless variety.</p> + +<p>After remaining upon the mountain for about +fifteen minutes, they all set out upon their return. +They of course came down the path very +easily, and getting into the dog-cart, when they +reached the foot of the descent, they were driven +very rapidly back to the inn.</p> +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_153">[153]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XII">CHAPTER XII.</h2> +</div> + +<p class="center">THE CALEDONIAN CANAL.</p> + + +<p>The route of the steamer from the foot of +Ben Nevis to Inverness, lies along a remarkable +chain of lakes, that occupy a long and narrow +valley extending through the very heart of Scotland, +in a direction from southwest to northeast, +and reaching from the base of Ben Nevis to Inverness. +The line of these lakes is easily to be +seen upon the map. In a state of nature the +lakes were connected by rapid streams flowing +from the center lake, which is the highest, down +through the others each way to the sea. But +though the lakes themselves were navigable, the +streams were not. Many years ago, however, as +has already been intimated, deep channels were +cut along these streams, and locks made whereever +there was an ascent or descent, so as to +form a navigable communication through the +whole distance, which received the name of the +Caledonian canal.</p> + +<p>Mrs. Morelle and her party, remained a day or +two at the foot of Ben Nevis, taking little excursions<span class="pagenum" id="Page_154">[154]</span> +in the environs, and exploring for a few +miles, in various directions, the glens which open +around the mountain. On the morning of the +third day, they took the steamer again, at a +place called Banavie, where there was a large +and beautiful hotel, standing almost by itself +in a wild and beautiful place, and surrounded by +gardens and ornamental grounds. A great many +of the best inns and hotels in Scotland, stand +thus in secluded places, entirely apart from the +towns, being intended altogether for the accommodation +of tourists journeying for pleasure, +and being placed accordingly in the localities +where it is supposed to be most convenient or +most agreeable for such travellers to stop.</p> + +<p>By having rested from the steamer two days, +the children were well prepared to return to it +again, and they had a delightful passage along +the canal. Sometimes they found themselves +sailing in a very narrow channel which had been +excavated artificially, to connect one lake with +another. Next they would come to a chain of +locks, by means of which the steamer was to be +raised up, or let down, from one level to another; +and while the lockmen were engaged in +this operation, which always required some time, +the passengers would step out upon the embankment, +and ramble about the neighborhood, or<span class="pagenum" id="Page_155">[155]</span> +walk on to the next lock, with a view of getting +on board again when the steamer came to it. +Then at length, suddenly the steamer would +emerge from the narrow and artificial channel +into one of the lakes, and would glide swiftly on +from one end of it to the other, between the +lofty ranges of mountains which bordered it on +either hand.</p> + +<p>In all cases, the course of the steamer was so +near to the shore, that all the features of the +scenery could be very distinctly seen, and it was +an endless source of amusement to the children +to watch the changes which were continually +taking place, and to explore every hidden recess +of the landscape, and examine every detail with +the glass. They saw the sheep feeding on the +mountain sides, watched by the shepherd and +his dog, and the cottages, with Highland children, +dressed in the kilt, playing at the doors, +and now and then an elegant travelling carriage +moving along the road at the margin of the +water.</p> + +<p>There were a great many mists and clouds +floating over the mountain tops, and these increased +toward the middle of the day. For a +time the effect of these clouds was only to add +an additional feature of grandeur to the scenery, +by the magnificent forms which the stupendous<span class="pagenum" id="Page_156">[156]</span> +masses of vapor assumed on the summits of the +mountain chains, and the mysterious and solemn +gloom which they seemed to impart to the deep +valleys, by hanging over them in heavy folds, like +those of a curtain, and diffusing through the recesses +which they half concealed, a dark and impenetrable +gloom. Florence said that she could +not decide whether she liked the mountains best +when full in view, or when half covered with +clouds.</p> + +<p>“Nor I,” said Grimkie. “Only it is raining +from some of those clouds. All I am afraid of +is, that one of them may come and rain upon +us.”</p> + +<p>Grimkie’s fears were destined to be realized. +In a short time it began to rain upon the deck +of the steamer. Some of the passengers, especially +the ladies, hastily gathering up their maps, +and guide books, and travelling bags, went +below. Others drew themselves into as compact +a mass as possible, and spreading an umbrella +over their heads, kept their seats. Some gentlemen +put on India rubber coats, which they +seemed to have ready at hand, and went on +walking up and down the deck just as before. +One of the men belonging on board the steamer +came up from below, and took up all the cushions +which were not in use, and carried them<span class="pagenum" id="Page_157">[157]</span> +down. He also gathered together all books, +bags, shawls and other such things as any of the +passengers had left exposed, and putting them +upon the end of a seat he covered them with a +tarpaulin. He also gathered together all the +camp-stools which were not in use, and put +them under cover.</p> + +<p>Mrs. Morelle went below as soon as the first +drops of the shower began to fall, leaving the +children to remain if they chose. Grimkie found +a place which was in a good degree sheltered +from the wind and rain, and there, placing +Florence upon one camp-stool in the middle, and +John upon another at the side of her, while he +took his place upon the other side, and then +after spreading a large travelling shawl, or rug +as the English call it, over their knees, and tucking +it in well all around, he opened his umbrella, +which was very large, and looking out from under +it at the shower, he said,</p> + +<p>“Now let it rain.”</p> + +<p>For some time the children seemed to enjoy +the scene and the novelty of their situation, but +before long they began to get tired, and at length +they determined to avail themselves of the first +opportunity, when the rain should slacken a little, +to go below.</p> + +<p>“I have got something for us to do there,”<span class="pagenum" id="Page_158">[158]</span> +said Grimkie. “We shall get the benefit of +Mr. Twig’s advice.”</p> + +<p>“Who is Mr. Twig?” asked Florence.</p> + +<p>“He is the gentleman on board the steamer,” +replied Grimkie, “that told me about travelling +in Scotland. He said that one of the most important +things, was to provide plenty of employment +for rainy days. It rained, he said, in +Scotland about half the time.”</p> + +<p>“Oh, Grimkie!” exclaimed John.</p> + +<p>“Among the Highlands, he meant,” said +Grimkie. “He said that the Gulf of Mexico, +the Atlantic Ocean, and the Highlands and islands +of Scotland formed one great distilling apparatus. +The Gulf of Mexico was the boiler, and +the mountains in Scotland the condenser.</p> + +<p>“But come,” added Grimkie, interrupting +himself, “it does not rain much just this moment. +Let us go below.”</p> + +<p>So they rose from their seats, and taking every +thing with them they hurried along the deck to +the companion-way and went below.</p> + +<p>They found a very pretty cabin, handsomely +carpeted, with four long tables in it, two on each +side, and cushioned seats behind them. There +was also a row of small windows, with sliding +sashes, above, from which they could look out +over the water. Groups of passengers were sitting<span class="pagenum" id="Page_159">[159]</span> +here and there at the tables. Some were +looking over their maps and guide books, and +others were lounging on the seats with a listless +air, as if they had had no one to forewarn them, +as Mr. Twig had done for Grimkie, of the necessity +of providing work for rainy days.</p> + +<p>Grimkie found seats for his party at one of +the tables. He placed his aunt and Florence at +the back side of it, upon one of the cushioned +seats, and set camp-stools for himself and John +in front. He then went for his knapsack.</p> + +<p>This knapsack Grimkie always kept with him +in travelling. He bought it in Liverpool. It +was made of morocco, of a bronze-green color, +and was provided with a strap which was arranged +in such a way that the knapsack could +be suspended from the shoulder, or carried in +the hand like a bag. In it Grimkie carried his +portfolio, his writing apparatus, Mrs. Morelle’s +opera-glass, the map, the guide book, and other +such things as it was necessary to have always +at hand.</p> + +<p>When he had brought the knapsack he laid it +down upon the table, and as soon as he had +taken his seat, he opened it and took out his +portfolio, containing Florence’s flowers.</p> + +<p>“Ah!” said Florence, “here are my flowers.”</p> + +<p>Grimkie had collected a large number of delicate<span class="pagenum" id="Page_160">[160]</span> +Alpine flowers, for Florence, during their +ascent of Ben Nevis, and had put them all carefully +between the leaves of the blotting paper +book, which he had made for her. On the evening +of the same day, on his return from the +mountain, he had looked over all these flowers and +rearranged them. In doing this, he cut off with +the point of a pair of scissors, all the superfluous +parts, smoothed out the little leaves, bent the +stems into graceful forms, and put them into +fresh places between the leaves. When he had +done all this, he placed the book under a small +piece of board which he found in the yard of the +hotel, and put the whole beneath one of the legs +of the bedstead in his room, which of course +subjected the book, and the plants between the +leaves of it, to a heavy pressure.</p> + +<p>The next morning, when the party were about +to leave the hotel, Grimkie took out the book, +and after winding a long tape round it a great +many times, and tying the ends, he crowded +some wedges in on both sides, between the tape +and book covers. This produced a pressure +upon the plants which, though not so great as +before, was sufficient at this stage of the process.</p> + +<p>It was this book, thus tied up and wedged, +that Grimkie now took out from his knapsack.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_161">[161]</span></p> + +<p>“That’s a nice way to press the flowers,” said +Florence.</p> + +<p>“Yes,” replied Grimkie, “only the sides of +the book are not stiff enough to wedge against. I +ought to have two thin pieces of board, just the +size of the book covers, to put upon them, one +on each side.”</p> + +<p>Grimkie opened the book and looked at the +flowers. They were pressed very nicely, and the +colors of the flowers were well preserved. He +also took out from his knapsack some sheets of +white note paper, which he proceeded to fold +into quarters and then to cut them open at the +foldings with a knife, so as to make a number +of little sheets of paper of about the size and +shape of visiting cards, each one, however, having, +like the original sheet of note paper, two +leaves. He gave these to Florence as fast as he +made them, that she might trim the edges with +her scissors. These sheets were to gum the little +flowers upon.</p> + +<p>He also took from his knapsack, a small bottle +of gum arabic. This bottle was very small, +being not much bigger than a large thimble, and +it was very strong, so as not to be in any danger +of breaking, by being carried in a knapsack.</p> + +<p>Grimkie took out the cork from this bottle, +and then proceeded to select from his stock of<span class="pagenum" id="Page_162">[162]</span> +flowers, two or three of different kinds, such as +could be arranged together prettily in the form +of a bouquet. These he proceeded to gum upon +one of his little sheets of paper. He would +take out a very small quantity of the dissolved +gum arabic,—which was very thick,—being of +about the consistence of honey, and then touch +a very little of it, delicately at different points +on the under side of the flower. Then he would +lay down the flower upon the inside page of one +of his little sheets of note paper, taking care to +place it in exactly the position in which he meant +it to lie.</p> + +<p>Presently Florence and John after seeing how +Grimkie managed the work, undertook it themselves, +each selecting flowers from among those +which had been pressed, and gumming them upon +the paper. In this manner, in the course of half +an hour, quite a number of very pretty specimens +were prepared.</p> + +<p>The flowers were in all cases gummed upon +what may be called the third page of the little +sheet of note paper: that is, upon the right hand +page of the second leaf, on the inside. The first +leaf then, when laid down, covered and protected +the flower.</p> + +<p>“When we stop at the next hotel,” said Grimkie, +“we will write upon these little sheets what<span class="pagenum" id="Page_163">[163]</span> +the flowers are, and where they come from, and +then put them all up for you Florence in a package, +and so when you get back to America you +can distribute them among your friends.”</p> + +<p>Just at this time the attention of the whole +party was suddenly attracted to a gleam of sunshine, +which came in through one of the windows +and fell upon the floor. John immediately abandoned +every thing and hurried away to go on +deck. Grimkie after putting all his apparatus +carefully away in his knapsack, followed him, +saying to his aunt and Florence that he would +come back in a moment and tell them whether it +was dry enough for them to come up too.</p> + +<p>In a few minutes Grimkie came down and said +that the steamer was going to stop pretty soon in +a certain place on the border of the lake, in order +to allow the passengers to go on shore to see +a waterfall.</p> + +<p>“To see a waterfall!” exclaimed Mrs. Morelle. +“I never heard of such a thing as a steamer’s +stopping for the passengers to see a waterfall. +You don’t mean that she is going to wait for us.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, Auntie,” said Grimkie. “That is it. +She is going to wait here while we go up and see +it, and then come back. It is only a little way.”</p> + +<p>“Let us go, then, by all means,” said Mrs. Morelle.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_164">[164]</span></p> + +<p>Mrs. Morelle decided to go at once, without +stopping to make any inquiries. Cases of this +kind often occur in which an experienced traveller +is safe in taking things upon trust, without +making inquiries. Mrs. Morelle saw at a glance +that a steamer would not stop for such a purpose +unless the fall was really remarkable, and well +worthy the attention of the tourists on board, +nor without having proper arrangements made, +in respect to guides, paths, and all other necessary +facilities for going to and from the place. +So when, on ascending to the deck, she found the +ladies and gentlemen generally preparing to go +on shore, she determined at once to join them, +especially as it was plain that there was no time +for obtaining any information, as the steamer was +now close to the pier.</p> + +<p>It was a small pier, projecting out a little way +from the shore, in a very wild and solitary place.</p> + +<p>The mountain-side rose quite abruptly from +the surface of the water, half covered with forests, +and there was no town, nor even any house +in sight. There was nothing but a small building +at the end of the pier near which a kind of +cab, or short omnibus without any covering over +it, was standing.</p> + +<p>The steamer was soon made fast and the passengers +went on shore. Most of them began at<span class="pagenum" id="Page_165">[165]</span> +once to walk up a road which was seen ascending +in a diagonal manner through the trees. Some +of the ladies were getting into the cab.</p> + +<p>“Auntie,” said Grimkie. “They are going to +ride up. You had better ride too.”</p> + +<p>“How far is it?” asked Mrs. Morelle.</p> + +<p>“I don’t know at all,” said Grimkie. “Only +it must be far enough to ride, or else they would +not have a carriage.”</p> + +<p>This reasoning seemed very conclusive, but +Mrs. Morelle turned to a gentleman who was +walking near her with a lady upon his arm, and +asked him if he knew how far it was to the fall.</p> + +<p>“No madam,” said he with a smile, “we don’t +know any thing about it. We are only following +the multitude.”</p> + +<p>Mrs. Morelle might perhaps have asked half +or two thirds of the whole company without receiving +any other answer than this.</p> + +<p>“I think you had better ride, Auntie,” said +Grimkie. “That will be the safest way.”</p> + +<p>Mrs. Morelle acceded to this proposal and +Grimkie helped her into the cab, and then he +followed Florence and John up the road.</p> + +<p>The road was a most excellent one. It was +not very wide, but it was perfectly made, and the +borders of it on each side were finished as nicely +as if it had been a walk in a gentleman’s private<span class="pagenum" id="Page_166">[166]</span> +grounds. The land was very steep, both above +and below it, and the slopes were covered with +forest trees. The road ascended in a zigzag +direction, in long reaches, though the children +soon came to places where there were short cuts +by a foot-path from one angle of the road to another, +which they found that most of the people +who were walking took, and so they took them too.</p> + +<p>They went on in this way for nearly half an +hour, ascending all the time, and at length they +seemed to have left the carriage road altogether. +At last, however, they came out into it again at +a place where they could hear the roar of the +waterfall in a deep ravine below them. The +tourists seemed to find out by some sort of instinct +that this was the place where the carriage +was to come, and so those who had ladies in the +carriage stopped here, to wait for the carriage to +come up, while the others began to go down a +steep zigzag path which led into the ravine.</p> + +<p>“We will wait here,” said Grimkie, “until +Auntie comes.”</p> + +<p>It was not long before the carriage came, and +all the ladies who had rode up in it got out. +They then all began to go down the zigzag path +into the ravine. The scenery in the chasm was +grand beyond description. The path, as it +changed its direction at the different turns,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_167">[167]</span> +brought continually new portions of the vast +chasm into view, and revealed awful depths +which it made one dizzy to look down into. At +the same time the thundering of the cataract, +reverberating from the rocky precipices which +formed the sides of the chasm filled the air with +a deafening sound.</p> + +<p>At length the path came to an end on a pinnacle +of rock, where there was room for only +one or two to stand at a time, and where the +fall itself was in full view. It was an immense +torrent coming down through a vast fissure in +the rocks above, and falling with the noise of +thunder, eighty or ninety feet, into an awful +abyss below.</p> + +<p>It was fearful to stand upon the dizzy pinnacle +where the path terminated, and attempt to +look down into the gulf half hidden by mist +and spray into which the cataract descended. +Only one or two could stand there at a time, +and the visitors were consequently obliged to +take turns. Mrs. Morelle allowed the children +to go, one at a time, while she held them nervously +to prevent their falling, and right glad +she was when they all had seen it and she could +go away.</p> + +<p>The company lingered a little while at the +different turns of the path to look down into<span class="pagenum" id="Page_168">[168]</span> +the chasm. It was of a very irregular form, +and it presented new and striking aspects at +every new point of view. It was very impressive +to survey the precipitous rocks, the trees clinging +to the crevices on the sides, and the foaming +torrents forcing their way furiously through the +devious and rocky channels at an immense depth +below.</p> + +<p>After a time all the passengers had ascended +to the place where the carriage had been left. +The ladies who had rode up took their places in +it again, and began to descend the hill by the +road, while the rest of the party went down +more rapidly by the short cuts which the foot-path +followed.</p> + +<p>Grimkie waited at the bottom until the carriage +came down, and then, after helping his +aunt to descend, and paying the driver of the +carriage the shilling fare, they all went together +again on board the steamer.</p> + +<p>The name of this cataract is the Fall of +Foyers. It is on the shore of Loch Ness, the last +of the lakes which lie on the line of the Caledonian +canal; and not many hours from the time of resuming +the voyage, after visiting the fall, the +steamer arrived at its destination at Inverness.</p> + +<p>As the party went into the town from the +place of debarkation, they all gazed about them<span class="pagenum" id="Page_169">[169]</span> +with great curiosity and interest. They saw +the river Ness flowing rapidly along between +green and beautiful banks, and a long and massive +stone bridge leading across it, and a grand +looking castle on the brow of a hill bordering +the town overlooking the river, and a compact +mass of grey stone houses, ancient and venerable +in appearance, but snug, tidy, and all in +excellent order. Nothing was imperfect or unfinished. +There was no building going on, nor +any improvements of any kind in progress. +Florence said it looked as if the town had been +completed fifty years before, and that thenceforth +nothing had been done, and nothing was ever +to be done but to keep everything in it in the +nicest order.</p> + +<p>There were the neatest and prettiest little +graveled roads extending along the banks of the +river on either side, which promised to be charming +walks, and ornamented grounds here and +there which seemed to be open to the public, +and high craggy summits of hills seen in the +environs that Grimkie said he must ascend. On +the whole the aspect of the town and of its environs +was charming. But the party could only +get occasional glimpses of the view, for they +were driven along rapidly in their carriage, and +at length stopped in the middle of a street, at<span class="pagenum" id="Page_170">[170]</span> +the door of a very snug, compact, and quiet-looking +hotel, called the Union Hotel. Grimkie +had chosen it from its name, partly on account +of the American associations connected with that +word, and partly for the sake of variety. The +other principal hotel in the town was the Caledonian; +and as it was the Caledonian canal on +which they had been travelling all day, Grimkie +said it would make an agreeable change, he +thought, to take some other name for the hotel.</p> + +<p>After the party became settled at the hotel, +John, on reflecting upon the name, wondered at +first that one of so peculiarly American a meaning +should be given to an inn in so remote a part +of Scotland. He concluded that it must have +been given out of compliment to the Americans, +in hopes of attracting their custom; just as he +had seen “New York Hotel” at Glasgow. He +at length ventured to ask a respectable looking +gentleman who was standing at the door what +the name denoted. The gentleman answered +him as follows, in broad Scotch:</p> + +<p>“It is joost to commemorate the union of +the two kingdoms of England and Scotland,” +said he. “Ye ken that in former days they +were separate altogether, but at length by marriages +and intermarriages atween the twa royal +hooses, they baith descended to the same heir,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_171">[171]</span> +who was James Sixth of Scotland and First of +England. But still the twa kingdoms were +separate, each with its own parliament and its +own laws, although they were ruled over by one +and the same king. This was found in the end +not to be convenient, and so finally an act of +union was passed by which the twa realms themselves +were moulded and merged into ane, with +ane only parliament at London to make laws for +the whole. This was the famous union, and ye +will larn all aboot it, when ye get a little older +and study Scottish history.”</p> + +<p>On hearing this, John went in and told Grimkie +that he had missed it in coming to that +hotel, for the union of it was not the American +Union at all.</p> +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_172">[172]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XIII">CHAPTER XIII.</h2> +</div> + +<p class="center">THE VITRIFIED FORT.</p> + + +<p>The party arrived at the hotel about the +middle of the afternoon. After getting somewhat +settled in their rooms, Grimkie ordered dinner +at five o’clock, and then, while Mrs. Morelle +and Florence were occupied in their chamber, he +and John went out to take a walk.</p> + +<p>They spent their time during their walk in +rambling along the principal streets of the town, +occupying themselves with looking at the curious +dresses of the people, hearing the little children +talk broad Scotch in their play, and examining +the objects displayed in the shop windows. +Many of these objects were very curious, especially +the bracelets, and pins, and brooches, +made of Scotch pebbles, many of which were of +the most singular forms, being made after the +fashion of the different clans of Highlanders, as +they wore them in ancient times.</p> + +<p>“You may depend upon it my mother will +buy some of these pins,” said John.</p> + +<p>There were also a number of curious articles<span class="pagenum" id="Page_173">[173]</span> +made of wood painted in tartan, according to +the fashion of the different clans, such as boxes, +card-cases, needle-books, pen-holders, paper-folders, +and many other such things.</p> + +<p>When the time drew near which had been +appointed for dinner, the boys went home, and +very soon after they arrived the dinner was +brought in. While they were at table, Grimkie +asked his aunt, whether she was not glad, so far, +that she had come.</p> + +<p>“Yes,” said she, “very glad indeed. We +have had a delightful voyage among the mountains +and lakes, but I feel tired and I have a +great idea of going into lodgings here for a week +to rest and recruit.”</p> + +<p>“Oh, mother!” exclaimed Florence, “we have +not had anything to tire us. We have had +nothing to do but to sit quietly on the deck of +the steamer, and look at the scenery.”</p> + +<p>“It is not my body that is tired,” said Mrs. +Morelle, “but my mind. I have been continually +wondering and admiring for four or five +days, and I am tired of wondering and admiring. +I want to be quiet a little while, to rest my mind, +and get ready to begin again. And the best +way to do that is to go into lodgings. I see +lodgings to let on several of the houses along +the street.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_174">[174]</span></p> + +<p>The English system in respect to accommodations +for strangers at private houses, as well as +that of the hotels, is entirely different from the +usage which prevails in America. Instead of +boarding houses, they have what is called lodging +houses. In one of these houses, the party +travelling, if they wish to remain some days in +any place, and to spend the time in a more quiet +and domestic way than by remaining at a hotel, +take apartments and keep house, precisely as if +they were in their own home. After looking at +the different rooms, and hearing the prices of +each, they select as many as they require, and +take possession of them, paying so much a day +for them. The price which they pay for the +rooms, includes the necessary service, and the +<em>cooking</em> of the food, but not the purchase of it. +The lodger may either purchase the food for +himself, going to the market for it every day, +just as if he were keeping house at home, or he +may request the landlady to purchase it for him. +In case he adopts the latter plan, the landlady +keeps an account of what she expends, and +brings him in the bill every morning.</p> + +<p>In a word, at an English lodging house a lady +stopping to rest for a week, finds herself keeping +house, just as if she were at home, with an experienced, +capable, and motherly woman to act as<span class="pagenum" id="Page_175">[175]</span> +her housekeeper, and to do every thing that she +requires. She can arrange the expenses too just +as she pleases, for every thing except the price of +the rooms, which is agreed upon beforehand, is +under her immediate control.</p> + +<p>English ladies when they take lodgings in this +way, usually go out themselves to the grocers and +to the markets, to purchase their provisions and +supplies—but American ladies, not being so well +acquainted with English marketing, usually give +the landlady a memorandum in the morning of +what they would like during the day, and the +landlady then makes the purchases.</p> + +<p>In addition to the domestic quiet and repose +which the traveller obtains by taking lodgings, +when he wishes to remain in any town for several +days, there is a great advantage in the arrangement, +in point of economy. The expense is only +from one-third to one-half, for the same rooms +and style of living, at the lodging-houses of what +it costs at the hotels.</p> + +<p>Mrs. Morelle had often experienced the advantage +of stopping occasionally for a week, and +going into lodgings, when she had been travelling +in Europe before. But the children knew nothing +about the system. They were, however, always +ready for any new plan which was proposed, +and in coming into Inverness they had seen so<span class="pagenum" id="Page_176">[176]</span> +much to attract their attention that they were +perfectly willing to remain there a week. So it +was determined that they should remain at the +hotel that night, and the next morning go and +look out for lodgings.</p> + +<p>But the next morning Mrs. Morelle found herself +so well rested, by a good night’s sleep that +she began to feel inclined to go on.</p> + +<p>“The next portion of our journey is by the +stage-coach, Grimkie, is it not?” said she.</p> + +<p>Grimkie said that it was. They were to go by +a circuitous route, following the indentations of +the shore to Wick, and there to wait for the +Edinburgh steamer.</p> + +<p>“And I believe,” said Grimkie, “that the +steamer only goes once a week, and it touches at +Wick every Friday night, at midnight.”</p> + +<p>“At midnight,” repeated Mrs. Morelle.</p> + +<p>“Yes, Auntie,” said Grimkie, “but that will +not make any difference. It will be as light as +day.”</p> + +<p>“That will be funny,” said John.</p> + +<p>“Let us send for Boots,” said Mrs. Morelle, +“and ascertain exactly how it is.”</p> + +<p>So Grimkie rang the bell and asked the waiter +to send up Boots, and when he came they obtained +from him all the necessary information. +He said that the coach left Inverness every evening<span class="pagenum" id="Page_177">[177]</span> +at eight o’clock—that it travelled all night—that +about two o’clock it crossed a wide ferry +called the Mickle Ferry—a mile wide—that it +arrived at Wick about ten o’clock on the following +day, and that the steamer would arrive from +Edinburgh in the course of Friday night, and +they would have to go on board early on Saturday +morning.</p> + +<p>The children were all very much pleased to +learn that they were to ride in the stage-coach +all night, and even Mrs. Morelle did not object +to it on the whole. She concluded, however, +not to remain at Inverness, as she had at first intended, +but to go directly on as far as Wick. It +was on Wednesday, when the party arrived at +Inverness, and in order to be in time for the +steamer of that week, it would be necessary to +leave that very evening, and this she determined +to do.</p> + +<p>“And then,” said she, “when we arrive at +Wick, in case the weather is favorable we will +go on board the steamer and accomplish our +voyage. If it is not favorable then we can go +into lodgings and spend our week there.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, Auntie,” said Grimkie, “John and I +will like that very much, for then we can see the +fishing boats go out and come in. Wick is the +greatest place in the world for the herring fishery.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_178">[178]</span> +The guide book says there are fifteen hundred +large fishing boats that belong there.”</p> + +<p>The plan being thus arranged, Grimkie and +John went to the coach to “book” as they +called it, for Wick. They were very desirous, +of taking outside seats for themselves, and inside +seats, which are much dearer, for the two +ladies; but Mrs. Morelle was afraid to have the +boys sit outside all night, for fear that they +might get asleep and fall off. So she requested +them to take the four inside seats for the party, +promising that if there was room outside, and +the coachman had no objection, they should ride +there a part of the time.</p> + +<p>Accordingly, Grimkie went to the coach office, +and took all the four inside seats and paid the +fare. The clerk said that the travellers must be +at the office, with their luggage at a quarter +before eight.</p> + +<p>When the two boys returned to the hotel, +they found a large open carriage before the door, +and Mrs. Morelle and Florence preparing to take +a drive around the environs of Inverness to see +the scenery. Mrs. Morelle invited the two boys +to join the party, which invitation they were of +course very ready to accept. Grimkie proposed, +too that, in the course of the ride the carriage +should stop at the foot of Craig Phadric, and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_179">[179]</span> +that they should all go up and see the remains +of a vitrified fort that he said existed there.</p> + +<p>In furtherance of this suggestion, he opened +one of his books and read an account of the vitrified +forts.</p> + +<p>These forts are objects of great curiosity to +tourists and antiquarians. They exist in various +parts of the country, and are so ancient that +not only all records, but even all traditions of +their origin is lost. They are referred to in the +very earliest accounts of the country that exist, +as ruins and remains exhibiting the same appearance +then as they now present, and enveloped in +the same mystery in respect to their origin.</p> + +<p>There are a great many of these old forts in +different parts of the country, and the thing +which chiefly characterizes them, and the one +from which they derive their name, is that the +stones of which the walls are composed instead +of being cemented together by mortar, are fused, +or vitrified, as if by the action of great heat, +into one continuous mass. It is not possible to +ascertain the exact nature of this vitrification, +for the walls of these forts have nearly disappeared, +leaving only long ridges of ruins, covered +in the main with earth, and turfed over; and in +many cases immense trees are growing upon them. +Portions of the old walls, however, appear here<span class="pagenum" id="Page_180">[180]</span> +and there above the ground, and by a little digging +they may be uncovered at any point along +the line, when the stones, melted together, are +brought to view.</p> + +<p>A great many different suppositions have been +advanced by antiquarians to account for the +origin of these works. Some suppose that they +were erected in times before the use of cement +was known, and that the people of those days +resorted to this mode of consolidating their masonry, +not knowing any other. They think that +they laid up the wall first in the usual way, +selecting such stones as would vitrify by heat, +and then built immense fires against them, and +kept up the heat by replenishing the fires continually +until the effect was produced.</p> + +<p>It has been supposed that in order to concentrate +the heat, and economize fuel, the builders +were accustomed to build a second wall outside +the first, and very near it, leaving only interval +enough for the fuel to be laid in.</p> + +<p>It must be confessed, however, that some persons +who have examined these remains, have suggested +that perhaps the vitrification was not +produced purposely at all, but was an accidental +effect, resulting from the building of great beacon +fires on the hills where the forts stand, perhaps +long after the forts themselves fell to ruin.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_181">[181]</span> +It is a fact that the vitrified forts are generally +situated on commanding elevations. It is also +a well-known fact that in ancient times it was +the universal custom, in all this region, to extend +the alarm through the country in case of +war, by immense beacon fires built upon the +hills; and it has been suggested accordingly, +that it might have been in some accidental way +like this, and not by any special design and process +of art, that the vitrification was produced.</p> + +<p>Grimkie had read accounts of these forts in +the different books that he had consulted, and +was very desirous of visiting one of them. He +was influenced in this desire, not only by a wish +to see the fort, but he also wished to procure a +specimen of the stones fused together to carry +home, and add to the museum at the Chateau. +And thus it was that he proposed to his aunt, +when they were getting into the carriage to go +and take their ride, that they should drive first +to the foot of Craig Phadric, and so go up and +see the fort.</p> + +<p>“How high is Craig Phadric?” asked Mrs. +Morelle. “Is it as high as Ben Nevis?”</p> + +<p>“Oh no, Auntie,” replied Grimkie. “It is +only two or three hundred feet high.”</p> + +<p>“Because I don’t feel quite able to undertake +a second Ben Nevis just yet,” said Mrs. Morelle.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_182">[182]</span></p> + +<p>“It will be nothing like Ben Nevis, Auntie,” +said Grimkie. “They never would make a fortification +on such a mountain as that. Besides +you will not be obliged to go any farther than +you like. If we find it too steep, or too high, +we can turn back again at any time.”</p> + +<p>“Ah!” replied Mrs. Morelle, laughing, “that +is the way you got me up to the top of Ben +Nevis, by pretending that I could turn about +whenever I pleased.”</p> + +<p>“Oh no, Auntie! I did not <em>pretend</em>,” said +Grimkie. “You really <em>could</em> turn about whenever +you pleased. I think I was very honest +about it. Though I confess I hoped all the +time that you would get to the top.”</p> + +<p>“Yes,” said Mrs. Morelle, “you were honest, +and I am very glad that you managed as you +did, and that it ended in my going to the top of +the mountain. And we will go to Craig Phadric +now. I won’t promise to go up, but on the +way you shall tell us about the vitrified fort, as +you call it, that we are to see there.”</p> + +<p>So they all got into the carriage, and directed +the coachman to drive to the foot of the Craig +Phadric.</p> + +<p>On the way Grimkie gave his aunt an account +of the particulars in respect to vitrified forts, +which have been stated above. His aunt was<span class="pagenum" id="Page_183">[183]</span> +very much interested in what he said, having +never heard of the vitrified forts before. She +became still more interested in the idea of making +the ascent, when she came to see the hill +itself, which was in full view as the carriage +crossed the bridge. It was a high hill, well +wooded except upon one side, where the rocks +were exposed to view, naked and precipitous.</p> + +<p>After ascending by a winding road for some +time, the coachman stopped the horses near a +small farm house, close under the hill, and on +getting down from the carriage the party saw a +small path leading through the woods up the +ascent. They took this path and after following +it for about ten minutes through various meanderings +and windings they found themselves +upon the summit.</p> + +<p>Here the remains of the fort lay before them, +though they were all somewhat disappointed in +the appearance of them. They had expected to +see some solid walls with the outside surface of +them fused into a black and glass-like slag. Instead +of this, however, there were only long embankments +of earth, forming an immense parallelogram +which occupied the whole top of the +hill. These embankments as well as various +detached mounds which were connected with +them in various places in the form of outworks,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_184">[184]</span> +were almost entirely grassed over, and from the +firm and compact turf which enveloped them, +immense trees were growing everywhere. Indeed, +the whole of the ground occupied by the +fort was covered with a forest of ancient and +venerable-looking trees, the effect of which was +to impart an air of strange solitude and solemnity +to the scene, which made it extremely impressive. +Mrs. Morelle said that though she +was a little disappointed in what she saw, she +was far more than repaid by what she <em>felt</em>, in +walking over the ruins, or rather the remains, +and that she would not on any account have +failed of visiting the spot.</p> + +<p>After rambling about for some time, Grimkie +at length found several places where portions of +the old wall were exposed to view, and though +they were mere shapeless masses of stones that +he thus found, they appeared to be fused together +by heat. After pounding among them for +a while he succeeded in obtaining several good +specimens of the curious conglomerate, to carry +with him to America. He selected also a very +pretty specimen, the smallest that he could find, +for Florence, and others similar to it for Mrs. +Morelle and John.</p> + +<p>After satisfying themselves with an examination +of the fort, Grimkie led the way out of the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_185">[185]</span> +wood toward the brow of the precipice, which +formed the side of the hill next the town. Here +they enjoyed a magnificent prospect of the whole +valley, with the river Ness flowing through the +center of it, the bridge over it, leading into the +town, the town itself, and the castle by its side. +Florence thought that this view was far more +worth seeing than the fort.</p> + +<p>“So do I,” said John. “In fact I don’t think +much of the fort. I’ve seen just such banks as +those on the Heights of Dorchester once, when +I was in Boston.”</p> + +<p>“True,” said his mother, “only those were +not a hundred years old, and these are probably +two thousand.”</p> + +<p>“That does not make any difference in the +looks of them,” replied John.</p> + +<p>“No,” said his mother, “but it makes some +difference in the <em>feelings</em> with which we regard +them.”</p> + +<p>“It does not make much difference in mine,” +said John.</p> + +<p>Just then John saw something alive running +off through the woods.</p> + +<p>“It is a rabbit,” said he, and he darted off +at full speed, taking aim at the same time with +his specimen of the vitrification. Grimkie called +him to come back, but before he had time to<span class="pagenum" id="Page_186">[186]</span> +obey the stone flew from his hand through the +air, and at last struck the trunk of a tree very +near where the rabbit had disappeared, and rebounded +from it with great force.</p> + +<p>“Johnnie!” said Grimkie, speaking in a very +stern voice. “It is very lucky for you that you +did not hit that rabbit.”</p> + +<p>“Why so?” asked John.</p> + +<p>“If you had hit him and killed him, you +would have been a poacher. Any body that +kills any kind of game in this country, unless +the owner of the land gives him leave, is a +poacher. Did not you ever read the story of +Black Giles the Poacher?”</p> + +<p>“Yes,” said John; “but he did things a +great deal worse than killing rabbits out in the +woods. I tell you these rabbits don’t belong to +any body. I don’t believe the <em>land</em> here belongs +to any body. It is <em>wild</em> land.”</p> + +<p>“We should find that it belonged to some +body,” replied Grimkie, “if people should catch +us killing rabbits here.”</p> + +<p>John had a sort of instinctive feeling that +Grimkie was right, but he consoled himself for +his discomfiture in the argument by saying +that at any rate he came within one of hitting +the rabbit.</p> + +<p>The subject here dropped, as the reporters in<span class="pagenum" id="Page_187">[187]</span> +Parliament say, and the whole party returned +down the hill.</p> + +<p>“Now, Auntie,” said Grimkie, as they rode +back to the hotel, “the clerk said we must be at +the stage office at a quarter before eight. Would +you like to ride there?”</p> + +<p>“If it is not far,” said his aunt, “we can +walk just as well, and so we shall see more of +the town.”</p> + +<p>“Yes,” said Grimkie, “I should like that, and +Mr. Boots will carry our luggage for us.”</p> +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_188">[188]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XIV">CHAPTER XIV.</h2> +</div> + +<p class="center">NIGHT RIDE BY DAYLIGHT.</p> + + +<p>A little before eight o’clock that evening, +the whole party proceeded on foot from the hotel +to the stage office. The porter of the hotel +went with them, taking the trunk and some +smaller parcels. The coach soon came out in +front of the office, the trunk and the parcels +were put upon the roof. Mrs. Morelle and +Florence took their places inside, while Grimkie +and John mounted to the top, and established +themselves upon a long cushioned seat, which +extended from one side of the coach to the other, +directly behind the coachman.</p> + +<p>Instead of a rack behind, as in American +stage-coaches, there was a sort of box, with a +door opening into it, for the mail bags, and seats +above, over the back part of the coach. One of +these seats is occupied by the man who has care +of the mails, and who is called the guard. The +other seats are for such passengers as choose to +ride there. Grimkie and John, however, chose<span class="pagenum" id="Page_189">[189]</span> +to ride on the forward seat, so that they could +see before them as they rode along.</p> + +<p>The coach drove first through the village and +stopped at the post-office to take the mails, where +quite a little crowd of men and boys assembled +to witness the setting off. The horses were soon +in motion again, the coachman cracking his whip +with a very smart air, as the wheels ran rapidly +over the pavement. From their elevated seat, +Grimkie and John could look down with great +advantage upon every thing around them. They +soon came to the end of the pavement, and then +the horses trotted and cantered swiftly along +over a hard and smooth road, across the canal +by a beautiful bridge, and then on among green +fields, through turnpike gates, and along the +walls of gardens, and parks, and pleasure-grounds, +while pretty cottages, and porters’ +lodges, and green hedges, and milestones, and +peasant girls, going or returning from milking, +and a thousand other such objects as mark the +rural scenery of Scotland in a summer evening, +glided by them in rapid succession.</p> + +<p>In the distance all around them lofty mountains +were seen, the summits of some of them +covered with snow, and the sun still high in the +sky in the northwest, though half concealed by<span class="pagenum" id="Page_190">[190]</span> +golden clouds, promised to accompany and cheer +them on their journey for a long time.</p> + +<p>“It is after eight o’clock,” said Grimkie, “and +see how high the sun is!”</p> + +<p>“Very high,” said John. “I don’t believe +the sun will set before ten o’clock.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, the sun sets here a little after nine,” +said Grimkie.</p> + +<p>“How do you know?” asked John.</p> + +<p>“I looked in a Glasgow almanac,” replied +Grimkie. “The sun sets in Glasgow one or two +minutes after nine to night, and here it must be +some minutes later, for we are two or three degrees +farther north.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t see why that is any reason,” said John.</p> + +<p>“Oh that is very plain,” rejoined Grimkie. +“Don’t you see that we are going round over the +curvature of the earth toward the north?”</p> + +<p>As he said this, Grimkie made a gesture with +his hand, pushing it out before him in a manner +to denote a motion in advance over the curved +surface of a ball.</p> + +<p>“Yes,” said John.</p> + +<p>“And don’t you see that the sun is going down +over the roundness of the earth in the same direction?”</p> + +<p>“Yes,” said John, “almost in the north—in +the north<em>west</em>.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_191">[191]</span></p> + +<p>“Then don’t you perceive,” added Grimkie, +“that the farther we go, on the same course that +he is going, the longer we can see him?”</p> + +<p>“Ah yes,” said John. “And that is the reason +why we shall see the sun longer here to-night +than they will in Glasgow.”</p> + +<p>“Exactly,” said Grimkie.</p> + +<p>In the meantime the horses, having been now +trotting and galloping for about an hour over the +hard and smooth road, were brought up by the +coachman somewhat suddenly at the door of an +inn in a small village, in order to be changed. +The coachman descended from his seat, the post-boys +led out the fresh horses from the stable of +the inn, and the guard took the mail bags which +were to be left at that place out of his box, and +threw them down into the road.</p> + +<p>Grimkie availed himself of this opportunity to +inquire after the welfare of his aunt and cousin. +He leaned over as far as he could on one side, +toward the coach window below, and called out:</p> + +<p>“Auntie, are you getting along pretty well?”</p> + +<p>Immediately Florence’s head appeared at the +window.</p> + +<p>“Grimkie,” said she, “where are we?”</p> + +<p>“We have stopped to change horses,” said +Grimkie.</p> + +<p>“Already?” said Florence.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_192">[192]</span></p> + +<p>“Yes,” said Grimkie. “When the horses go +so fast they have to be changed very often. Have +you got a good seat?”</p> + +<p>“An excellent seat,” said Florence. “I have +got a window all to myself.”</p> + +<p>“And can you see the country?” asked Grimkie.</p> + +<p>“Oh, yes!” said Florence, “I can see it +beautifully, I have got one window and mother +has got the other.”</p> + +<p>“And mother says,” she added, after turning +her head a moment, “that you and Johnnie +must be careful not to fall off.”</p> + +<p>“There is no danger, tell her,” replied Grimkie. +“We have good safe seats, with an iron +railing at the two ends to keep us in.”</p> + +<p>By this time the fresh horses were put in, and +the coachman having mounted to his place again, +the coach was soon rolling on along the road, +faster even than before.</p> + +<p>Soon after this the sun went down, but the +clouds which he left behind him in the western +sky, were for a time almost as bright as he himself +had been, so that at half past nine there +seemed to be no sensible diminution of the light +of day. The track of the sun too, in going down, +was so oblique to the horizon, that even at half-past +ten his distance below it was very small,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_193">[193]</span> +and Grimkie and John could see the country +all about them, and the time by their watches, +and the places through which they were passing, +just as well almost as ever.</p> + +<p>From half-past ten to eleven there was still +very little change. The children were all playing +in the streets of the villages that they passed, +and groups of men and boys had collected at the +doors of the inns where they stopped, as they +would have done at half-past seven or eight +o’clock in a summer evening in America. Even +the hens did not seem to know that it was night, +for they were rambling about, and scratching at +every unusual appearance on the grounds, as +briskly as in any part of the day.</p> + +<p>“I don’t see how the children know when to +go to bed,” said John.</p> + +<p>“Or the hens either,” said Grimkie. “A +Connecticut rooster I should think would be +greatly mystified here. He would not lead his +hens off to roost until he saw it growing dark,—and +then if he began to crow again as soon as he +saw any light, he would not give them any time +to sleep at all.”</p> + +<p>After eleven o’clock the boys found that at +each succeeding village or hamlet that they came +to fewer and fewer people appeared, until at +length at twelve, and between twelve and one,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_194">[194]</span> +the country seemed deserted, and yet the light +continued. It was a strange thing, the boys +thought, to drive into a village in broad day-light, +and to find the streets silent and solitary, +and without a person being visible at any door +or window; and still more sometimes, when +they stopped to change horses, to see that the +coachman was obliged to knock upon the stable-door +to wake the ostlers up, while by the aspect +of the whole scene around, there was nothing +that betokened night.</p> + +<p>It was not much after midnight when the +coach arrived at the Mickle Ferry. The Mickle +Ferry means the <em>great</em> ferry. It is so called to +distinguish it from another smaller one in the +neighborhood called the Little Ferry. The +Mickle Ferry passes across a narrow part of the +Dornoch Firth, as may be seen by the map. +The firth is a mile or two wide, at the ferry, and +is crossed in a large flat-bottomed sail-boat, sufficient +to convey the passengers and their luggage +in perfect safety,——but not large enough for +the coach.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_195">[195]</span></p> + +<p>The coach was accordingly to be left on the +hither side of the ferry, another being provided +on the farther side, to receive the passengers at +the landing and take them on.</p> + +<p class="p2"></p> +<div class="chapter"> +<div class="figcenter" id="i_195a"> +<img src="images/i_195a.jpg" alt="" width="650" height="432"> +<p class="caption center">CROSSING THE MICKLE FERRY.</p> +</div> +</div> +<p class="p2"></p> + +<p>The company in the coach, accordingly, on<span class="pagenum" id="Page_197">[197]</span> +arriving at the margin of the water, descended +from the coach and walked down the sloping +pier to the boat, and went on board. Mrs. +Morelle had felt some apprehension at the idea +of crossing a wide ferry in an open boat at midnight, +but she found, on arriving at the spot, +that there was no occasion for alarm. The boat +was very wide, and appeared very steady; and +as to midnight,—it might as well have been eight +o’clock of a bright summer evening at home. It +is true that the sun was entirely below the horizon, +but the whole northern sky was brightly +illuminated by his beams, and so light was it +upon the water, that Grimkie said that if he +had a newspaper, he would amuse them during +the passage by reading the news.</p> + +<p>The boat was wafted very rapidly, but yet +with a very smooth and gentle motion, across +the water. The passengers landed on the farther +side, and the luggage was taken out, and in a +few minutes the new coach was seen coming +rapidly down the road toward the landing place +in order to receive the travellers and convey +them onward.</p> + +<p>Mrs. Morelle now proposed that the two boys +should get inside, but they were extremely +desirous to continue upon the top, and as the +coachman assured Mrs. Morelle that the seat<span class="pagenum" id="Page_198">[198]</span> +was perfectly safe for them, even if they should +fall asleep, she consented that they should +remain. Besides it was now after one o’clock, +and it was growing lighter quite fast. In a little +more than an hour, as Grimkie calculated, it +would be nearly sunrise.</p> + +<p>The country now became very picturesque +and wild, the sea being brought continually into +full view as the horses trotted swiftly round the +curves of the road, following the undulations of +the coast. At one place it descended by a winding +and zigzag way into an immense ravine a +mile or two across. The sides of the ravine +were covered with forest, and there was a river +and a village at the bottom of it.</p> + +<p>After traversing this ravine, the road followed +the line of the coast, passing by many great castles, +and presenting here and there magnificent +views of the sea. Mrs. Morelle and Florence +lost some of these views, for they fell asleep; +and even John, upon the top, nodded several +times, though he insisted, whenever Grimkie +asked him about it, that he was not in the least +sleepy.</p> + +<p>At length, toward noon of Friday, the coach +arrived safely at Wick.</p> + +<p>The passengers were all very glad to reach the +termination of their ride, for though it was a<span class="pagenum" id="Page_199">[199]</span> +very delightful one, it was long, and the fact +that the night was not dark made it seem longer +even than it was. At least, so John thought. +He said it seemed like two long days together, +without any night between.</p> +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_200">[200]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XV">CHAPTER XV.</h2> +</div> + +<p class="center">THE PRINCE CONSORT.</p> + + +<p>Grimkie and John had both been very curious +to see how Wick would look, and they watched +for the first appearance of it with great interest. +It proved to be a small and ancient looking +town, built very compactly of gray stone, and +situated at the bottom of a small bay which +here sets in from the sea. In front of it was a +little port formed by two piers built out into the +water, and curved in such a manner as to enclose +a considerable space of smooth water, with a +small opening between the two ends of them, to +allow the fishing boats to pass in and out. As +usual in such cases there was a light-house on +the end of one of these piers.</p> + +<p>“The very first thing we will do, Grimkie,” +said John, “will be to go down to the piers and +see the fishing boats.”</p> + +<p>“After breakfast,” said Grimkie.</p> + +<p>It was now nearly noon and the party had had +no breakfast, excepting some cakes and oranges<span class="pagenum" id="Page_201">[201]</span> +which Grimkie had brought in his knapsack, +and which they ate very early in the morning.</p> + +<p>The coach drove rapidly into the town, and +stopped at the door of a snug and neat-looking +inn, where Grimkie soon engaged rooms and +ordered breakfast. The weather was cool, too, +and Mrs. Morelle requested the waiter to have a +good fire made in their sitting-room. In half +an hour the breakfast was ready, and about the +same time all the members of the party, having +in the meanwhile been occupied, in their several +rooms, in making their toilet, were ready to eat +it. Of course their appetites were very eager, +and as the breakfast was an excellent one, consisting +of fresh herring nicely fried, beef-steaks, +eggs, hot rolls, toast, coffee with plenty of hot +milk and cream, fresh butter, and other such +niceties, they all enjoyed the repast exceedingly.</p> + +<p>“What a nice thing a really good breakfast +is,” said Florence, “when we have waited long +enough for it to get completely hungry.”</p> + +<p>Pretty soon after breakfast they all went out +to take a walk to see the town, and the pier. +They first walked along through the principal +street, looking into the shops to see if there was +anything new or curious in them which it would +be well to buy as souvenirs. Then they went +down to the water, in order to see the pier. It<span class="pagenum" id="Page_202">[202]</span> +was rather to please the two boys that they did +this, but still Mrs. Morelle was very willing to +go, for she was curious to see what the accommodations +were for going on board the steamer +in case she should conclude to embark the next +morning.</p> + +<p>They found that the piers were each very wide. +On the inside of the enclosure formed by them +was a range of vessels and fishing boats, which were +moored to rings, and massive piles, on the margin +of the pier, and near them were cranes and other +such fixtures used for discharging cargoes. Then +came a broad space to land goods upon, and beyond +a road for carts and wagons. All this was +upon the top of the pier, and on the outside was a +high parapet wall to protect the platform and road-way, +above described, from the wind and the sea.</p> + +<p>Thus in walking along the road-way upon the +piers, one could see the fishing boats and vessels +within the port, and witness all the operations +going on there, but the view seaward was intercepted +by the parapet wall.</p> + +<p>Mrs. Morelle was well satisfied with the appearance +of the port, and with the probable facilities +for going on board the steamer, which she +supposed would come inside, so as to allow the +passengers to go on board by means of a broad +plank.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_203">[203]</span></p> + +<p>The weather, too, was very fine, and she presumed +that the sea was smooth. She had an +opportunity soon of ascertaining this point, for +on arriving at the end of one of the piers there +were steps leading up to a lookout upon the +top of the parapet wall, and she asked Grimkie +to go up there and look out to sea, and make a +report of the appearance of things.</p> + +<p>Grimkie did so and reported that the surface of +the water was smooth as glass, as far as he could +see.</p> + +<p>“Then,” said she, “if there is no change +before night we will go.”</p> + +<p>Mrs. Morelle and Florence soon returned to +the hotel, but the boys spent most of the afternoon +in rambling about the pier, examining the +fishing boats, talking with the fishermen, and +watching the various operations which were +going on in the port. When they went home to +tea, Grimkie asked what time the steamer would +come the next morning, and the porter informed +him that she was due about two o’clock, but +that there was some uncertainty in respect to +the time of her arrival. He said, however, that +she would remain some hours at Wick, and that +he would call them an hour before it would be +time for them to go on board.</p> + +<p>The whole party went to bed in good season,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_204">[204]</span> +both because they had so little sleep the night +before, and also because they were to be called +up so early the following morning.</p> + +<p>It was about half-past one when the porter +knocked at their doors to waken them. It was +light enough to dress without candles, and they +were all soon ready. When they came down to +the door they found the porter there with a barrow. +The baggage was put upon the barrow, +and the porter set forward, followed by the party +of travellers on foot. It was a bright and pleasant +morning, and the air was calm. Mrs. Morelle +was greatly pleased by the prospect before +her.</p> + +<p>After walking through several streets, they +came to the pier but Mrs. Morelle looked in vain +for the steamer.</p> + +<p>“Why, Grimkie!” she exclaimed in surprise, +“where is the steamer?”</p> + +<p>“She must be out <em>there</em>,” said Grimkie, pointing +as he spoke to a column of smoke which was +seen rising into the air over and beyond the parapet +wall.</p> + +<p>“And how are we going to get on board?” +asked Mrs. Morelle.</p> + +<p>“It must be that we are going in a boat,” +said Grimkie, “but you won’t mind that, +Auntie.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_205">[205]</span></p> + +<p>Mrs. Morelle saw at a glance that it was too +late now to retreat, and she had the good sense +to go forward boldly, acting upon the excellent +principle, that when there is anything disagreeable +before us which must be done, it is just as +well to do it with a good grace.</p> + +<p>Mrs. Morelle found, moreover, as we often do +in such cases, that the difficulties which she anticipated +disappeared as she approached them. +At a certain part of the pier, not far from the +entrance, there was a flight of stone steps leading +down to the water. The boat which was to +take the passengers to the steamer lay at the +bottom of these steps. There was a small party +of passengers immediately preceding Mrs. Morelle +and her company. Seeing them go down +at once, Mrs. Morelle followed, and all were soon +safe on board the boat, seated in the stern. The +trunks and other packages were then handed +down and placed in the bows.</p> + +<p>After waiting some little time for other passengers +who were seen coming along the pier, +the boat put off and was rowed easily out +through the opening, and there the steamer +came into full view. They were soon alongside +of it, and without any difficulty ascended to the +deck.</p> + +<p>It was now nearly sunrise, but everything was<span class="pagenum" id="Page_206">[206]</span> +very quiet on board the steamer. The children +seemed quite inclined to remain on deck to see +what would take place, but Mrs. Morelle wished +first to go below and find her berth or her stateroom. +So they all went down.</p> + +<p>They descended a short and winding stair-way, +and at the bottom of it entered the cabin. On +each side of the cabin, near the entrance to it, +there was a row of three or four staterooms +partitioned off, which made the cabin itself in +this part, comparatively narrow. It was wide +enough, however, for two long tables which +stood here, with comfortable cushioned seats on +each side of them.</p> + +<p>Beyond the staterooms the cabin widened to +the whole breadth of the ship, and was terminated +toward the stern in a great semicircular +sweep, with two tiers of wide and soft sofas, +covered with crimson plush. The two tiers +were parallel to each other, one above and back +of the first, like the seats of an amphitheatre, +and almost all the sofas were occupied by passengers, +more or less covered with blankets and +fast asleep. There were also some sleepers lying +upon the sofas near the tables in the narrow +part of the cabin, The sleepers seemed all to +be men, except that there were one or two whose +faces had a feminine expression, and Grimkie<span class="pagenum" id="Page_207">[207]</span> +could not tell whether they were young women, +or very pretty boys.</p> + +<p>“Where is the ladies’ cabin?” asked Mrs. +Morelle, turning to the stewardess, who had +met the party at the foot of the stairs and followed +them into the cabin.</p> + +<p>“Here it is, madam,” said the stewardess. +“But it is pretty full.”</p> + +<p>So saying, the stewardess led the way to a +passage behind the stairs, and there, pulling +aside a certain screen before a door, she disclosed +a room in the sides of which were berths, and +on the floor sofas, cots, and beds made of +cushions, all of which were filled with female +sleepers lying in all imaginable attitudes. Mrs. +Morelle and Florence turned back immediately. +It was evident that there was very little room +for them there.</p> + +<p>“Is not there any stateroom for us?” asked +Mrs. Morelle.</p> + +<p>“Oh yes,” said the stewardess. And she at +once led the way back to the main cabin, and +there, opening one of the doors on the side, not +far from the entrance, she ushered Mrs. Morelle +and Florence into a very nice and bright-looking +stateroom.</p> + +<p>“Ah!” exclaimed Mrs. Morelle, the moment +that she saw the interior of it, speaking in a<span class="pagenum" id="Page_208">[208]</span> +tone of great satisfaction. “This is exactly +what we want. Here is a berth for you and one +for me. It is <em>exactly</em> what we want.”</p> + +<p>“I suppose there is something extra for the +stateroom,” she added, turning to the stewardess.</p> + +<p>“Four shillings each,” said the stewardess.</p> + +<p>“We will take it,” said Mrs. Morelle. “And +as for you, boys, you must find places to sleep on +the sofas in the cabin. We can’t afford a stateroom +for you.”</p> + +<p>“We don’t <em>want</em> any stateroom, mother,” +said John. “I would a great deal rather sleep +in the cabin.”</p> + +<p>So the boys went to the cabin, and all four of +the party were soon in their several berths or +upon their sofas sound asleep. The steamer was +quiet and still, except the slight jarring sensation +produced by the paddles after she began to +move through the water, and the passengers all +continued to sleep after this for several hours, +for although it was near sunrise when Mrs. Morelle +and her party came on board, still, in respect +to the time for sleeping, it was not much +past the middle of the night.</p> + +<p>There began to be a movement for getting up +in the gentleman’s cabin about seven o’clock, +and soon after this time Grimkie and John rose +and went on deck. There they took out their<span class="pagenum" id="Page_209">[209]</span> +maps and endeavored by calculation of the distance +which they had run, and the bearing of +the land which was in sight, to find out where +they were.</p> + +<p>One of the passengers who saw what they +were doing, came and informed them that a certain +large island which they were passing was +Ronaldsay, one of the Orkneys, and that the +land beyond it which extended in both directions +as far as they could see, was another of the +islands, and that the steamer would arrive at +Kirkwall in about two hours. They found out +the name of the steamer too,—the <em>Prince Consort</em>. +She was named thus in honor of Prince +Albert, the consort of the queen.</p> + +<p>The boys remained on deck watching the land +as cape after cape and headland after headland +came into view, for an hour more, and then +Grimkie sent John down to knock at his mother’s +stateroom door, and tell her that they +were drawing near to Kirkwall.</p> + +<p>In about half an hour after receiving this +summons, Mrs. Morelle and Florence came upon +deck.</p> + +<p>The steamer had turned in now among the +islands, where the water was sheltered and +smooth as in a river, and the views on every side +were enchanting. The principal islands were so<span class="pagenum" id="Page_210">[210]</span> +large that they looked like portions of the main +land, and they presented an appearance of verdure +and beauty impossible to describe. Great +fields of the richest green, separated from each +other by hedges neatly trimmed, or by substantial +walls, extended in every direction as far as +the eye could reach, while elegant villas, and +spacious farm-houses, and rows of cottages appearing +here and there, diversified the scene. +The fields in many cases sloped down smoothly +and beautifully to the water’s edge. In other +places the line of the coast was formed of rocky +cliffs with the surf of the sea rolling in at the +base of them, and far in the interior lofty mountains +were seen marking their dim blue outline +upon the sky.</p> + +<p>“Well, Grimkie,” said Mrs. Morelle, “what +do you think of the Orkneys?”</p> + +<p>“I don’t think much of them,” said Grimkie, +with an air of disappointment. “The sea is as +smooth, and the country is as beautiful, as any +where in England. I don’t believe the Norsemen +had very hard times after all.”</p> + +<p>“Ah!” said Mrs. Morelle, “you ought to be +here in January, when there is as little day as +there is night now.”</p> + +<p>The cabin and the deck of the steamer was +soon all in a bustle in consequence of the preparations<span class="pagenum" id="Page_211">[211]</span> +which were made by the Orkney passengers +to land. The steamer turned in more and +more among the islands, until at last she approached +Kirkwall, which was situated, like +Wick, at the bottom of a small bay, and had a +port formed of two piers for the protection of +fishing boats and other small vessels. The +steamer came to anchor outside this port. Boats +came out to receive the passengers and their luggage. +In these boats they were all conveyed +within the port, and landed at a small pier sloping +down to the water’s edge.</p> + +<p>Here a number of porters were assembled to +take the luggage of the passengers into the town. +There were no carriages. A group of islands is +not the region in which carriages are likely to be +multiplied. Grimkie selected from among the +porters one who had an honest face, and giving +him the trunk asked him to lead the way to the +hotel. The porter went on into a very narrow +street—the width of it being barely sufficient for +a single carriage—between ancient stone buildings +which had more the appearance of prisons +than houses—so few were the windows, and so +deep were they sunk into the massive walls—and +thus they arrived at the hotel.</p> +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_212">[212]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XVI">CHAPTER XVI.</h2> +</div> + +<p class="center">KIRKWALL.</p> + + +<p>The hotel at Kirkwall, when it first came into +view, presented a very unpromising appearance. +It was built upon a little paved court, the front, +containing the entrance being at the back side +of the court, and two wings one on each side +extending forward to the street. A low wall, +with two gateways through it, extended along +the line of the street from one of these wings to +the other.</p> + +<p>The building itself, like all the buildings in +the town, was formed of very thick and massive +walls of stone, with windows set in so far back +in the wall, that the sashes scarcely appeared in +view. Indeed in looking along the street the +windows of the houses appeared only as openings +in the wall, as if the buildings were so many +stone barns.</p> + +<p>On entering the hotel, however, the scene was +entirely changed. The waiter conducted the +party up to the second story, and ushered them +at once into a large and handsomely furnished<span class="pagenum" id="Page_213">[213]</span> +room. There was a bright fire blazing in the +grate, and a polished mahogany dining-table in +the middle of the floor, and arm-chairs, and +sofas, and carpets, and curtains to the windows, +and tables in the corners covered with books, +and stands of flower-pots with flowers in full +bloom, and many other nameless conveniences +and elegancies which are comprised in the idea +of a comfortable parlor in an English inn.</p> + +<p>“Ah, Florence!” exclaimed Mrs. Morelle. +“This is just the place for us. How glad I am +to see the fire. I did not know I was so cold.”</p> + +<p>The chambermaid came soon to show the +ladies their chamber, and Mrs. Morelle when she +went into hers, asked Grimkie to order the best +breakfast that he could get for them. In half +an hour the breakfast was ready, and very soon +after breakfast the whole party set out to take a +walk and see the town.</p> + +<p>They found that the town consisted chiefly of +a very long and narrow street, which followed +the curvature of the shore. It was very narrow, +and seemed intended almost exclusively for foot-passengers. +There was only a narrow track in +the center of it—about two feet wide, that is, +just wide enough for one horse—that was paved +like a street. The rest of the space on each side<span class="pagenum" id="Page_214">[214]</span> +was covered with flag stones for foot-passengers. +Thus the street was almost all sidewalk.</p> + +<p>“We may know by the narrowness of the +streets and by the looks of the houses that they +have dreadful gales of wind and storms here in +the winter,” said Grimkie. “See what thick +walls, and what little windows and how few! +See how deep the windows are set in the walls, +so that the gales may not get at them to burst +them in!”</p> + +<p>The party walked on for some time, following +the windings of the street, and looking in at the +shop windows to see what sort of things there +were to sell. At one place they saw some views +in the Orkneys, hanging at the window of a +print shop. There was a view of some of the +coast scenery, with lofty mountains rising abruptly +out of the sea, and tremendous precipices. +There was a view also of the town of Kirkwall, +and one of Stromness, a place upon the opposite +side of the island. But the picture which most +attracted the attention of Mrs. Morelle and +Florence, was one of the Stones of Stennis. +It was a view of an open plain in a wild and +desolate country, with a range of gigantic stones, +like immense tombstones, set up in the ground.</p> + +<p>“What is this?” asked Mrs. Morelle; “what +are the stones of Stennis?”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_215">[215]</span></p> + +<p>“Ah, that is something very curious,” replied +Grimkie. “I read an account of them. They +are on the road to Stromness. We must go to +see them.”</p> + +<p>“They look like the pictures I have seen of +Stonehenge,” said Florence.</p> + +<p>“They are like Stonehenge,” said Grimkie.</p> + +<p>After going along a little farther, the party +came to a sort of open space in which there was +an immense cathedral, old and ruinous, though it +bore marks of having been recently repaired. +Mrs. Morelle was much surprised to see this edifice. +She wondered how there could ever have +been any occasion for a structure of such magnitude +in so remote a region, and still more how it +could ever have been built. But the truth is that +the earls of Orkney, who formerly ruled over the +islands like sovereign princes, were at one time +very wealthy and powerful, and there was a time +moreover, during the period in which the Catholic +religion was in the ascendency in these countries, +when the cathedrals and abbeys, and monasteries +which were built in the north of Scotland, +and in the islands adjacent, were of the +grandest and most gorgeous description.</p> + +<p>“Would you like to go in and see the cathedral, +Auntie?” asked Grimkie.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_216">[216]</span></p> + +<p>“Do they have service in it on Sunday?” rejoined +Mrs. Morelle.</p> + +<p>“In one end of it,” said Grimkie. “One end +is finished off for a church. The rest of it is +empty.”</p> + +<p>“Then we shall see it to-morrow when we go +to church,” replied Mrs. Morelle, “and that will +be better. I like to see such places better when +the people are in them.”</p> + +<p>The stones with which the cathedral had been +repaired were of a red color, which gave them the +appearance of monstrous bricks. They were +really of sandstone, though of a bright color. +John said that he read in a guide book that they +were obtained from a quarry in a cliff which was +named Red Head.</p> + +<p>Near the cathedral were the ruins of two ancient +palaces, the bishop’s and the earl’s. These +ruins were very ancient and venerable, and Mrs. +Morelle and Florence were greatly interested in +walking about them, and looking up to the ivy +covered battlements and towers. It was melancholy +to look upon these utterly abandoned ruins. +The air of desolation and solitude which reigned +around them was greater than Mrs. Morelle had +ever observed in any ruins before. In England +there are many remains of ancient edifices, but +they are all objects of great interest to tourists,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_217">[217]</span> +and are visited by great numbers of people, for +whose benefit the grounds are kept in order, and +a certain degree of life is imparted to the scene. +But these old palaces seemed not only to have +outlived their possessors and occupants, but to +have been utterly forsaken and forgotten by all +the world, and an air of solitude and desolation +reigned around them that it would be impossible +to describe.</p> + +<p>After passing by the ruins of the palaces, Mrs. +Morelle and the children found themselves coming +out into the country at a place where the +road ascended a hill. They concluded to continue +their walk until they reached the summit, +in order to take a survey of the situation of +Kirkwall, and of the surrounding country. So +they walked slowly on, stopping occasionally +to look at objects of interest, or to talk with +the peasant women whom they met in the road, +or found standing at their cottage doors.</p> + +<p>They asked one of these women about their +mode of life in the winter. Among other questions +they asked her if the days were not very +short at that season of the year.</p> + +<p>“Yes,” said she, “very short. In fact there +is not much of any day in the winter, and it is +always snowing, or blowing, or raining, or something +else, so that there is not much chance to<span class="pagenum" id="Page_218">[218]</span> +work upon the land. So the men stay in the +barns a great deal, and thrash the grain, and do +other such things, by the light of lanterns.”</p> + +<p>“But I should think the ground would be +frozen up in the winter,” said Grimkie, “and +that that would prevent working on the land.”</p> + +<p>“No,” said the woman. “The ground does +not freeze much. We can always work on the +land when it is good weather.”</p> + +<p>“That’s very strange,” said Grimkie, “so far +north as this.”</p> + +<p>“And is not the ground covered with snow?” +asked Mrs. Morelle.</p> + +<p>“Not much,” said the woman. “It snows +very often, but the snow does not lie on the +ground much.”</p> + +<p>“And don’t you travel in sleighs here in the +winter then?” asked John.</p> + +<p>“Sleighs?” repeated the woman, looking puzzled, +“what are they?”</p> + +<p>“Sledges perhaps you call them,” suggested +Mrs. Morelle.</p> + +<p>“No,” replied the woman. “We never use +sledges. But they do in some countries I’ve +heard tell.”</p> + +<p>After reaching the top of the hill, the party +stopped to take a survey of the country around, +and a very magnificent spectacle presented itself<span class="pagenum" id="Page_219">[219]</span> +to view. The land extended in every direction +farther than they could see, but it was +divided and separated into so many portions by +bays, straits, inlets, and channels formed by the +sea, that the view exhibited as charming a combination +of land and water as could possibly be +imagined. The islands which were near were +formed of green and fertile slopes of land, of +marvelous beauty, with pretty dells and vales +opening here and there among them, and hamlets +and villages, and farm-houses, and gentlemen’s +seats, dotting the country in every direction. +Toward the west ranges of lofty mountains +were seen. Grimkie took out his map and +a little pocket compass which he had, and endeavored +to ascertain the names of some of the +highest peaks, by the bearings and distances of +them. He pointed out in what direction they +would go in their ride to Stromness, and where +the Stones of Stennis were,—though the spot +was not actually in view, being concealed by an +intervening mountain.</p> + +<p>They saw great numbers of cattle and sheep +feeding on the hill sides in every direction. Indeed +cattle and sheep are the staple productions +of the Orkney Islands. The climate is so wet +that the grass grows luxuriantly, and notwithstanding +the high latitude the air is so tempered<span class="pagenum" id="Page_220">[220]</span> +by the influence of the surrounding seas that it +continues green nearly all the year.</p> + +<p>To the west and south, lofty mountains were +seen, in the distance. Grimkie and John were +greatly taken with the view of these mountains. +They concluded that they must lie at the south +of Stromness.</p> + +<p>“When we go to Stromness we will go up to +the top of them, Johnnie,” said Grimkie.</p> + +<p>John very readily assented to this proposal, +and Florence said that they must take her too.</p> + +<p>After remaining upon the top of the hill until +they were satisfied with studying the localities +which were in sight, and with admiring the different +views, they all descended again, and returned +to the hotel. Instead, however, of going +back through the main street, they took another +course which led them along the margin of the +water. Here they saw the piers which formed +the little port, and the fishing boats lying inside +of them, and many other curious things. Among +other objects that arrested their attention was a +small hut near the shore, the roof of which was +made of an old boat turned upside down. The +boat was supported by walls of stone which +formed the sides of the hut, and there was a +door in front to go in by. John was so much +pleased with this curious hut that he took paper<span class="pagenum" id="Page_221">[221]</span> +and a pencil out of his pocket in order to draw +it, and he remained behind, to make his sketch, +while the rest of the party went on; so that he +did not return to the hotel until some time after +the others arrived.</p> + +<p>He had, however, made a very pretty drawing—so +pretty that Florence asked him to copy it +in ink in her journal book, which John readily +promised to do.</p> +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_222">[222]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XVII">CHAPTER XVII.</h2> +</div> + +<p class="center">THE STONES OF STENNIS.</p> + + +<p>Mrs. Morelle and her party remained many +days at the Orkney Islands, and during this +time they made a number of excursions, some +in a carriage and some on foot. The only carriage, +however, which they could obtain was a +dog-cart, which was anything but a comfortable +vehicle for ladies going out upon an excursion +for pleasure. Indeed Florence expressed the +opinion, that however well adapted it might be +for the conveyance of dogs, it was the worst contrived +vehicle for human beings that she ever +saw. The only redeeming quality which it possessed +was that in case it rained one umbrella +would cover the whole company—after a fashion.</p> + +<p>In this dog-cart they went to visit the Stones +of Stennis. The road was most excellent all +the way, being macadamized in a most perfect +manner, so that it was as smooth as a gravel +walk in a gentleman’s park. The country, however, +through which it passed, after a few miles +from Kirkwall, was an almost boundless expanse<span class="pagenum" id="Page_223">[223]</span> +of moorland, wild and desolate. After going on +for some miles through this dreary country, the +carriage left the main road and passed by a sort +of cart track through the fields and over a long +causeway between two lakes, till it came to the +place where the stones were situated.</p> + +<p>The stones could be seen for a distance of +many miles, standing like so many gigantic posts +on a vast plain. When the party came to the +spot, they found that each stone was from twelve +to twenty feet high, and about five feet wide and +one thick. They were of a somewhat irregular +form, being evidently slabs taken from the natural +strata in the neighborhood, and set up just +as they came from the quarry. They were arranged +in an immense circle with the remains of +an embankment and ditch all around the circumference. +The circle was not complete, the stones +being wanting in many places. In some cases +they had fallen and still remained upon the +ground. In other places where it would seem +stones must have stood, the fragments had been +taken away, it was supposed, after they had +fallen, to be used for buildings or walls, by generations +that lived in ages subsequent to that in +which the stones were set up, but which have +still in their turn long since passed away.</p> + +<p>A great many conjectures have been made in<span class="pagenum" id="Page_224">[224]</span> +respect to these stones, and to the nature of the +structure of which they formed a part, but all is +uncertainty in respect to them. At the very +earliest periods of which there is any account of +the country, they stood as they stand now, solitary and in +ruin—an inexplicable wonder to all +who saw them.</p> + +<p>The party went also to Stromness, a town at +the western side of the island on which Kirkwall +stands, and here, while Mrs. Morelle and +Florence remained at the inn, Grimkie and +John engaged a sail boat and a man to manage +it, and made a cruise of four or five hours along +the neighboring shores. There they saw some +stupendous cliffs, called the Black Craigs, and +great numbers of birds flying about them, and +among other birds they saw an eagle perched +upon a lofty summit, where he stood silent and +solitary, looking far and wide over the sea. +Grimkie and John had an excellent view of him +through their opera glass.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_225">[225]</span></p> + +<p class="p2"></p> +<div class="chapter"> +<div class="figcenter" id="i_225a"> +<img src="images/i_225a.jpg" alt="" width="385" height="650"> +<p class="caption center">THE BLACK CRAIGS.</p> +</div> +</div> +<p class="p2"></p> + +<p>At one time while the party remained at +Kirkwall, they were imprisoned nearly a whole +day by a pouring rain. Mrs. Morelle, when she +found, as she did after breakfast, that there was +no prospect that any of them could go out, +asked the waiter if they had any books in the +hotel relating to the Orkney Islands. The<span class="pagenum" id="Page_227">[227]</span> +waiter said he would inquire, and pretty soon he +came in bringing a number of books of different +sizes, some old and some new; some with pictures +in them and some without. Mrs. Morelle +directed that a good fire should be made, and +the table cleared, and then placed these books +upon the table and said that she was going to +have a school.</p> + +<p>“We will begin at ten o’clock,” said she. +“You can take your seats at the table, or at the +windows, or where you please, and for two hours +we will all look over these books and see how +much we can learn about the Orkneys. Then +we will have a luncheon. After luncheon we +will each of us take a sheet of paper and a pen +and ink and write down the most interesting +thing that we have learned.”</p> + +<p>This plan was entered into by all the children +very cordially. They spent two hours in studying +the books and looking at the pictures. Then +came the luncheon which consisted of some slices +of cold roast mutton very tender and nice, with +some flat rolls of bread, sweet fresh butter, +strawberry preserves and cold coffee.</p> + +<p>After the luncheon all spent an hour in writing, +and by that time it had stopped raining. +So it was concluded to postpone reading the +compositions until the evening.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_228">[228]</span></p> + +<p>In the evening they were read. Florence’s +was as follows:</p> + + +<p class="center">“THE POISONED SHIRT.”</p> + +<div class="blockquot"> + +<p>“In former times there was an earl of Orkney, +named Hacon. He married a wife and had +a son named Paul. After this his wife died, and +then he married a princess of Caithness, named +Helga.</p> + +<p>“Caithness is the northern part of Scotland. +It was a kingdom in those days, now it is a +county.</p> + +<p>“After his second marriage Hacon had another +son named Harold.</p> + +<p>“Harold and his mother hated Paul because +he was the oldest son, and was entitled to the +succession, and they did all in their power to +supplant him in his father’s affections. They +succeeded so far that the old king finally agreed +that Paul should not have the whole kingdom, +but should share it with Harold. Accordingly, +when the old king died the two sons were joined +in the government of the islands.</p> + +<p>“But they did not agree together at all. +Helga was continually maneuvering with her +son Harold to gain for him more than his share +of the power. At length the two brothers came +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_229">[229]</span>to open war, and the whole country was desolated +by their dreadful fights.</p> + +<p>“At last, after becoming weary of this, they +agreed to make a treaty, and become reconciled, +and as a pledge of the reconciliation, it +was agreed that after the ratification of the +treaty, each brother should invite the other to a +grand feast, about the time of Christmas.</p> + +<p>“When it came to Paul’s turn to be invited +to Harold’s feast, Helga, the mother, determined +to poison him. Her plan was to make a beautiful +embroidered garment for him, as a present, in +token of her entire reconciliation to him, and +then before giving him the garment to poison it, +so that it should kill him when he put it on. +She kept this plan a profound secret from all +but a sister who was living with her, named +Franquart, to whom she confided her design. +Franquart aided her in embroidering the garment, +and in applying the poison.</p> + +<p>“At length, on the morning of the feast, Harold, +happening to come into his mother’s room, +saw the beautiful garment lying there, all ready +to be given to Paul when he should arrive, and +asked what it was. His mother told him that +it was a present that she and Franquart had +been making for Paul. Harold was much enraged +to hear this, and said that he would not +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_230">[230]</span>allow of their offering Paul handsomer presents +than they made for him. So he seized the garment +and declared that he would keep it for +himself. His mother and Franquart were dreadfully +alarmed. They begged and implored him +to put the garment down. But they could not +tell him that it was poisoned without betraying +their own guilt. In the end Harold went away +with the garment, leaving his mother and Franquart, +in the utmost distress and terror.</p> + +<p>“Harold immediately put on the garment, +and he died that very night in great agony.</p> + +<p>“The consequence was that Paul regained his +whole kingdom, and when he discovered the +treachery which Helga and Franquart had attempted +to practice upon him, he drove them +out of the islands.”</p> +</div> + +<p>Grimkie’s composition was as follows:</p> + + +<p class="center">“THE EAGLE AND THE BABY.”</p> + +<div class="blockquot"> + +<p>“In one of the Orkney Islands named Hoy, +where there are a great many high mountains +and lofty precipices near the sea, there lived a +fisherman named Halco. He had a small hut +on the rocks, and a boat. There was a little +green spot near his hut where he used to dry his +nets, and where his little child, whose name was +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_231">[231]</span>Halco too, used to lie sometimes, and roll in the +grass, and play.</p> + +<p>“There are a great many eagles among the +rocks of Hoy, and they often carried off the +farmers’ lambs, but as Halco had no sheep or +lambs he did not pay much attention to the +eagles.</p> + +<p>“One day when Halco was coming home in +his boat, just before he reached the shore he saw +a monstrous eagle hovering over his hut, and +after wheeling round and round several times in +the air, he made a fell swoop toward the ground, +and disappeared behind the hut. A moment +afterward Halco saw him come up again, and to +his amazement and horror he saw that he had +little Halco in his claws.</p> + +<p>“The eagle rose slowly with the child, and +passing directly over Halco’s head soared to a +great height, and then sailed away to his nest on +the summit of a cliff.</p> + +<p>“Halco was almost stupefied by the terrible +shock which he had received. He pulled like a +madman to get to the shore. When he entered +his hut he found his wife in a swoon. He paid +no attention to her but seized his gun and rushed +out of the hut. He climbed up the mountain +side, and after great labor he came near enough +to the nest to see the eagle perched upon the +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_232">[232]</span>edge of it. He crept up a little nearer, and +then took aim and fired. The eagle, after balancing +and tottering a moment on his perch, fell +heavily over, down the face of the cliff, and disappeared. +Halco climbed out to the place of +the nest, and there he found his little child, safe +and sound, and playing with the young eagles.”</p> +</div> + +<p>“Why, Grimkie!” said John, as soon as +Grimkie had finished reading his narrative, “I +found a story a little like that, about an eagle +carrying off a child, but there was not half as +much in it as you have told.”</p> + +<p>“I thought I would embellish it a little,” said +Grimkie. “I presume it is just as true after I +embellished it, as it was before.”</p> + +<hr class="tb"> + +<p>John’s composition was very short. It was as +follows:</p> + + +<p class="center">“THE HOLE IN THE STONE.”</p> + +<div class="blockquot"> + +<p>“In one of the stones of Stennis, is a round +hole passing directly through the stone, not far +from the edge. Nobody knows what this hole +was made for by the people who set up the stone, +but for a great many ages past it has been considered +sacred for engagements. Whenever two +persons wish to make any solemn agreement +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_233">[233]</span>they go to Stennis and put their hands through +this hole, and clasp them together in the center +of it and then make the promise. If they do +this they consider themselves solemnly bound.</p> + +<p>“Lovers used to do this when they engaged +themselves to each other. And it is said they +do so now sometimes. Grimkie and I wanted +to try it, but we could not think of anything to +promise each other.”</p> +</div> + +<p>Instead of a composition Mrs. Morelle wrote a +letter to America, giving an account of the journey +and voyage to the Orkney Islands. She +read this letter to the children after they had +finished reading their compositions, and then, +though it was yet very light, they all went to +bed.</p> +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_234">[234]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XVIII">CHAPTER XVIII.</h2> +</div> + +<p class="center">THE EMBARKATION.</p> + + +<p>After remaining for some time in the islands, +and making many excursions, sometimes by land +and sometimes by water, in one of which Grimkie +and John went out in one of the fishing +boats, and had an excellent time fishing, the +party began to look forward with some interest to +the time for setting out on their return. The +question arose <em>how</em> they should return. John +was very eager to go by the mail boat across the +Pentland Firth, instead of returning by the +steamer, as they came.</p> + +<p>The steamer made the trip only once a week. +It started from Edinburgh, touched at Aberdeen +and at Wick, then, after going to Kirkwall in +the Orkneys, proceeded to the Shetland Islands, +sixty miles or more farther north. Then returning +by the same way, she went back to Edinburgh. +This voyage, with the necessary detentions +at the different ports, occupied six days, so +that there was no opportunity of returning to<span class="pagenum" id="Page_235">[235]</span> +Scotland by the <em>Prince Consort</em>, except once a +week.</p> + +<p>It was necessary to send the mail to the Orkneys, +however, every day, and John had found +out that a special service had been organized for +this purpose over the islands toward the south +by some sort of mail-cart, and thence across the +Pentland Firth, at the narrowest place, to the +coast of Scotland, in a sail boat. Thence by +coach or mail-cart to Wick, and so south toward +England.</p> + +<p>There were three reasons why John wished to +go by this route. First, he wished to see what +sort of travelling riding in a mail cart would be. +Next he had a great desire to see the Pentland +Firth, and to cross it in a sail boat. He had +heard wonderful accounts of this famous channel—of +the furious tides and currents that swept +through it, producing whirlpools, and boiling +surges, and roaring breakers of the most wonderful +character, and he was very curious to see +them. Then, lastly, by this route he had hoped +to go and see John O’Groat’s house.</p> + +<p>John O’Groat’s house, the name of which has +become so famous all the world over, stands, or +rather stood, upon the very extremity of Scotland, +toward the northeast, and as the opposite +corner of the island toward the southwest, is<span class="pagenum" id="Page_236">[236]</span> +called Land’s End, there arose the expression +from the Land’s End to John O’Groat’s, to +denote the whole territory of Great Britain.</p> + +<p>But inasmuch as the British territory extended +to the southwest to several islands the most +remote of which in that direction is Jersey, and +as it also includes on the north the Shetland +Islands, the most northern point of which is +called Ska, the expression would more fully comprehend +all that is intended, if instead of being +“from Land’s End to John O’Groat’s,” it was +“from Jersey to Ska.”</p> + +<p>The story of John O’Groat is, that he had six +relatives or friends who when they came to see +him quarreled in respect to which should take +precedence in going out at the door, and in +order to settle the question, he built a six-sided +house, with a door in each side, and made a six-sided +table within, with a side toward each door, +so that each of his guests might have a seat of +honor, and seem to be first in going out when +the feast was over.</p> + +<p>John O’Groat’s house is now nothing but a +name, as all traces of the building—if any such +ever existed—have long since disappeared. Nothing +marks the spot but a little green mound, +which tradition says is the one which the building +formerly occupied.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_237">[237]</span></p> + +<p>It was found on inquiry, that John’s plan for +returning to Scotland, was wholly impracticable. +It was very inconvenient and very expensive, for +a single individual to go by the mail route, over +the islands and across the firth, but for a party +as large as Mrs. Morelle’s, it was impossible. +There was no alternative but to take the +steamer.</p> + +<p>“We must take the steamer, too, whatever +the weather is,” said Mrs. Morelle, “unless we +are willing to remain here another whole week, +with the chance of finding worse weather still at +the end of it.”</p> + +<p>In fact, however, when the morning arrived +for expecting the <em>Prince Consort</em> on her return +from Shetland, the weather proved to be very +fine. The steamer was expected to come into +port at eight o’clock, and to remain there several +hours.</p> + +<p>“So that you need be in no hurry,” said the +porter, who gave Grimkie this information. +“You can take your breakfast quietly, and then +go on board at your leisure. The steamer will +not sail before eleven or twelve.”</p> + +<p>“Why does she remain here so long?” asked +Grimkie.</p> + +<p>“It takes some time to get the cattle on +board,” said the porter. “You see they have to<span class="pagenum" id="Page_238">[238]</span> +take them all out in boats, and then get them +on board.”</p> + +<p>“Cattle!” exclaimed John. “Do the cattle +go a sailing in the steamboat?”</p> + +<p>“Oh yes,” said the porter, smiling, “great +numbers of them. There’s no other way to get +the cattle, and sheep, and other animals, that are +raised on these islands to market. They can’t +get to England by land, and so the steamer takes +them. That is the main business of the steamer +in fact.”</p> + +<p>As soon as Grimkie and John heard this they +were both eager to go on board the steamer as +soon as possible after she came into port, as they +were extremely desirous of witnessing the operation +of getting cattle and horses up to her deck +from a boat out in the middle of the harbor.</p> + +<p>“In the first place,” said John, “I don’t see +how they’ll get them into the boats—and then +when they get the boats to the side of the +steamer, I can’t imagine how they are going to +make them go up such a steep and narrow ladder.”</p> + +<p>John had seen no other mode of ascending and +descending to the deck of the steamer, from boats +alongside, but by the step-ladder used by the passengers, +and he did not think of there being any +other mode.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_239">[239]</span></p> + +<p>Grimkie, with Mrs. Morelle’s consent, ordered +breakfast at half past seven, and he told the porter +that they should wish to go on board as soon +as the steamer came in. Mrs. Morelle had no objection +to this, for they knew that the steamer being +in harbor, would be at rest, and though they expected +to have to wait on board for several hours +they thought that they should be likely to find +more to amuse them there during that time than +at the hotel, where they had become entirely +familiar with every thing that was to be seen.</p> + +<p>Grimkie and John also took pains to have +every thing packed and ready before the breakfast +came upon the table, so that they might be +all prepared to go on board immediately after +breakfast, in case the steamer should arrive so +soon. It was not, however, till about nine +o’clock that the porter came to call them.</p> + +<p>There are no cabs or hackney coaches of any +kind in the Orkneys, and so every body walks to +the landing when they are going on board the +steamer. When the time arrived the porter +came for the trunk, and steadying the trunk on +his shoulder with one hand, and carrying the +night valise in the other, he led the way out +through the court of the hotel. As soon as they +entered the street, Mrs. Morelle and Florence +were both alarmed at the sight of a monstrous<span class="pagenum" id="Page_240">[240]</span> +bull, which a man was leading before them, and +which was followed by a troop of men and boys.</p> + +<p>“Let us go slowly,” said she, “till that bull +gets out of the way.”</p> + +<p>“I verily believe he is going on board the +steamer,” said Grimkie.</p> + +<p>“No,” said John; “It can’t be. They might +possibly get him into a boat and row him out +there, but if they think that they can get such +a fellow as that up that little narrow black step-ladder, +they will find themselves very much mistaken +I can tell them. <em>I</em> know more about +bulls than that, myself.”</p> + +<p>Mrs. Morelle did not gain much advantage by +keeping back and walking slowly, for when at +length she reached the landing place, she found +the bull standing there surrounded by people. +There were also some curious-looking boxes +there, of the form of stalls for cattle, but Mrs. +Morelle did not stop to look at them, being in +haste to go past the bull and get into the boat. +She effected this object safely. A number of +other passengers went on board the boat at the +same time. Their luggage was also put in, and +then the boatmen pushed off, and rowed out to +the steamer.</p> + +<p>Mrs. Morelle and Florence, who were beginning +to be somewhat accustomed to going on<span class="pagenum" id="Page_241">[241]</span> +board a steamer from a boat, found no difficulty +in going up the step-ladder, however difficult +such a feat might be expected to prove for a bull. +As for the boys, they liked much better embarking +in this way than to walk over a plank from +a pier. As soon as they were all on board they +went below to choose a stateroom for the two +ladies. Mrs. Morelle offered also to take a stateroom +for the boys, but they preferred to be in +the cabin they said, so as to see and hear what +was going on.</p> + +<p>As soon as the stateroom was chosen they all +went up to the deck again, and after Grimkie +and John had found seats for Mrs. Morelle and +Florence, where they could see all around, and +especially on the side toward the little port, +where sail boats and fishing boats were continually +coming and going, John took the opera +glass, and began to watch the boats as they came +in succession out from the opening between the +two piers, which formed the entrance to the +port, in order to see when the bull came, if he +could.</p> + +<p>After scrutinizing a number of boats, which +proved to be only fishing boats going out to sea, +or passage boats belonging to private individuals +going away to some of the other islands, John +saw a very broad and heavy boat coming propelled<span class="pagenum" id="Page_242">[242]</span> +by oars. After gazing at it a moment +with great attention through his glass, he exclaimed, +in a very excited manner,</p> + +<p>“Yes, Grimkie! he is coming! Here he is! +I can see his horns!”</p> + +<p>Then after a moment’s pause he added,</p> + +<p>“There are a great many of them,—bulls and +oxen, or something. I can see a great many +horns. Look! Grimkie. Look!”</p> + +<p>So saying, he gave Grimkie the glass, and by +the time Grimkie had got the boat into the field +of view it had come so much nearer that he +could see very plainly that it was very large and +that it had a sort of floor in the bottom of it +which was completely filled with oxen and cows. +The animals stood together as close as they could +be packed, and Grimkie could just see their +heads and necks above the gunwales of the +boat.</p> + +<p>“I don’t understand how they got them into +that boat,” said John, “and we will see pretty +soon how they make out in driving them up this +little stair.”</p> + +<p>“They won’t drive them up there,” said +Grimkie. “That is the gangway for the passengers. +They won’t take them into this part +of the steamer at all.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_243">[243]</span></p> + +<p>“Where will they take them in then?” asked +John.</p> + +<p>“Forward,” said Grimkie.</p> + +<p>“Then let us go forward and see,” said John.</p> + +<p>“Very well,” said Grimkie. “This is the +way.”</p> + +<p>There was a broad bridge extending across +from one paddle-wheel to the other, at some distance +above the main deck, and a walk, with +railings on each side, extending fore and aft from +this bridge to the quarter deck where Mrs. Morelle +and Florence were sitting. The boys went +along the walk to the bridge, and there, as they +looked down upon the forward deck, an extraordinary +spectacle met their view. The space +was divided into pens,—made by small iron +posts set up in the deck, and strong bars connecting +them—and these pens were filled with +animals of all kinds, cows, sheep, horses, ponies, +oxen, and even pigs. These animals had all been +taken on board at Shetland,—the produce of the +farms there, which the farmers were sending to +market.</p> + +<p>Among all these animals those which most +attracted the attention of the boys, were the +Shetland ponies. They stood together in a pen +by themselves. They were of various sizes, and +although they all had the general form and appearance<span class="pagenum" id="Page_244">[244]</span> +of the horse, some of them were very +small. There was one that John said would be +<em>too</em> small even for <em>him</em>.</p> + +<p>These ponies were going to England to be sold +there to gentlemen who were willing to buy +them for their boys, to ride about upon over +the smooth gravel roads made in their parks and +pleasure-grounds. Such ponies are used too by +ladies to drive over the same kind of roads in a +small and light open chaise, called a pony-chaise.</p> + +<p>Before the boys had satisfied themselves with +looking at the ponies, their attention was suddenly +called away by the arrival of the boatload +of cows, which now came up alongside of +the steamer at a place where an opening had +been made in the bulwarks for the purpose of +taking them in. They immediately went over +to that side of the steamer, and looked down +from their elevated position upon the bridge, to +watch the mode of proceeding for getting the +cattle on board.</p> + +<p>Just beneath them was an iron crane with a +small steam engine attached to it, by which it +was worked. The whole was upon a small round +iron platform, which moved upon a pivot in the +deck, in such a manner that the platform could +turn in any direction, carrying with it crane,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_245">[245]</span> +engine, and all. There was a boy upon this +platform who governed its motions by two +polished iron handles which were connected with +the different steam pipes. The boy received his +orders from the men who had the management +of the cattle, pulling and pushing his handles in +different ways, according as they called out, +<em>Lower! Hoist! Stop! Turn!</em></p> + +<p>There were two men in the boat with the cattle, +crowding their way about among them, +without paying the least attention either to their +horns or their heels. The people from the deck +threw down two broad bands, made of canvas +or sail cloth, to these men. The men took one +of the bands and passed it under one the cows, +between her fore legs and her hind legs, and +then brought the edges together over her back. +In the meantime the boy had been called upon +to “lower,” and he turned his handles in such a +way as to swing the top of the crane out over +the boat and to lower the chain, which had a +hook in the end of it, until the men in the boat +could reach it and hook it into certain rings in +the upper edges of the canvas over the cow’s +back.</p> + +<p>The order was then given to the boy to +“hoist,” and immediately afterward the little +steam engine began rapidly to wind up the chain<span class="pagenum" id="Page_246">[246]</span> +whereupon the poor cow found herself suddenly +lifted off from her feet, and rising rapidly into +the air, her legs hanging down in the most awkward +and helpless condition imaginable. As +soon as she was raised fairly above the level of +the deck, the men waiting there seized her by +the head and horns and swung her in on board, +and then the boy lowered her until her feet +touched the planks, when she immediately +began to spring and scramble to get away. At +the same time instant the broad belt by which +she had been lifted was dropped, and fell upon +the deck and the cow was free. The men led +her away by means of a short cord fastened to +one of her horns, and put her in a pen with the +other cattle.</p> + +<p>By this process the cows were all hoisted out +of the boat and landed upon the steamer, in a +rapid and unceremonious manner. While one +cow was coming up, the men in the boat were +placing the second band under another one, so +as to be ready to hook the chain to her, the +moment it came down, and thus not a moment +was lost. The words Lower, Hoist, Stop, Turn, +followed each other in very rapid succession, and +the little piston-rod of the engine plied its +strokes in the nimblest possible manner, as cow<span class="pagenum" id="Page_247">[247]</span> +after cow came up, until at length the boat was +wholly cleared.</p> + +<p>By the time that the first boat was empty another +one came. This second one contained the +bull, but instead of being free as the cows had +been, he was secured fast in one of the moveable +stalls which Mrs. Morelle had seen at the landing. +The stall was a narrow box, just wide enough for +the bull to stand in it. It had a floor, two sides, +two ends, but no top. Instead of a top, there +were two irons passing over from one side to the +other, above, giving the box the appearance of a +monstrous oblong pail with two bails to it. +When the chain was lowered the hooks were attached +to these two bails, and the box, bull and +all, was run up rapidly to the deck, and placed +there in a secure position among the piers.</p> + +<p>As fast as the remaining cattle were brought +up, new pens were made upon the deck, and when +at length the pens were all full, the hatches were +opened, and a great many cows, after being +hoisted up from the boat and swung round over +the hatchways, were lowered down into the hold, +to some dark and dismal region there, which the +boys could not see.</p> + +<p>Besides the cows and a load of oxen, there was +a boat full of sheep that came on board, and also +one of pigs. The pigs were hoisted two at a<span class="pagenum" id="Page_248">[248]</span> +time—each of them having a band passed round +him, and the hook taking hold of the rings of +each band. The pigs made a frightful outcry at +being hoisted in this manner.</p> + +<p>There were a great many boxes containing fish, +and packages of wool, and bags of grain, and +other such things, the produce of the islands, +that were also taken on board. The work of getting +all the cargo in, and on board, occupied several +hours, and it was near noon before the +steamer was ready to sail.</p> +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_249">[249]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XIX">CHAPTER XIX.</h2> +</div> + +<p class="center">CONCLUSION.</p> + + +<p>The sea was very smooth, and the air calm, on +the day that Mrs. Morelle and her party made +the voyage back from the Orkneys to what may +be called in relation to them, the main land. +Mrs. Morelle and Florence having some misgivings +in respect to the effect which the sea might +produce upon them, thought it best to remain +below, at least until the steamer should arrive at +Wick, because they could lie down while they +were below, and a horizontal position is found +to be the best means, both for guarding against +the approach of sea-sickness, and for alleviating +the sufferings produced by it when it comes.</p> + +<p>“But we will not go into our stateroom, Grimkie,” +said Mrs. Morelle. “We will lie down +upon the sofas in the great cabin, and then if we +can not read we can amuse ourselves with observing +what is going on.”</p> + +<p>Grimkie accordingly accompanied his aunt and +cousin below, and found nice sofas for them there. +He put two or three soft cushions at the head of<span class="pagenum" id="Page_250">[250]</span> +each sofa, and when Mrs. Morelle and Florence +had come down, he spread shawls over their feet, +and gave them their books. Then leaving them +to themselves he went upon deck again to join +John.</p> + +<p>Grimkie and John remained upon the deck all +the afternoon, except that from time to time +they went below to see if the ladies were doing +well in the cabin. They watched the different +islands as the steamer passed along their shores +on her way to the southward, identifying them +one after another by means of the map. When +at length they came opposite to the Pentland +Firth, John looked in that direction long and +earnestly to see if he could discern any signs of +the whirlpools, or foaming breakers that he read +accounts of in the books,—but excepting a white +line of surf which often appeared along the +rocky shores at the margin of the water, nothing +was to be seen.</p> + +<p>In the meantime the coast of Caithness, the +northern part of Scotland, had come fully into +view, and presently the steamer, drawing nearer +and nearer to the coast began to follow the line +of it, at a little distance in the offing, toward +Wick.</p> + +<p>The steamer remained several hours at Wick, +and the boys were at first very anxious to go on<span class="pagenum" id="Page_251">[251]</span> +shore during the interval, but Mrs. Morelle +thought it not prudent for them to do so. They +afterward concluded, however, that they liked +quite as well to remain on board, for a great +many boat loads of cattle, sheep, and other animals +were brought out and hoisted on board, +and they were very much entertained in watching +the operations.</p> + +<p>At length, about nine o’clock in the evening, +the steamer sailed again, and now her course led +her out quite into the open sea, as will appear +by an inspection of the map, which shows a +great bay entering into the land between Wick +and Aberdeen, across the mouth of which the +track of the steamer lay. Mrs. Morelle and +Florence determined to go into their stateroom +at once, and go to bed, hoping to sleep during +the whole time of passing across this bay. +Grimkie and John remained on deck till eleven +o’clock, and then, though it was still very light, +they went below and took their places on the +couches or sofas where Mrs. Morelle and Florence +had lain during the afternoon, and were both +soon sound asleep. They slept without any intermission +until morning.</p> + +<p>After this brief and prosperous voyage the +whole party landed safely in Scotland, which +seemed to them like a continent in comparison<span class="pagenum" id="Page_252">[252]</span> +with the smaller islands that they had been to +visit. There was a railway station very near the +quay, and after spending a few hours at the hotel +to take breakfast, and to rest a little from the +voyage, they took places in the train for Perth +and Edinburgh, and set out upon their journey +about ten o’clock, They met with a great many +entertaining adventures on the way toward London, +but they can not be related in this volume.</p> + + +<p>THE END.</p> + + + +<div class="transnote"></div> + +<h3 class="nobreak" title="" id="end_note">Transcriber’s Notes</h3> +<p class="left"><a href="#Page_78" title="" >Page 78</a>—changed Morell to <b>Morelle</b></p> +<p class="left"><a href="#Page_80" title="" >Page 80</a>—changed CHAPTER VI to <b>CHAPTER VII</b></p> +<p class="left"><a href="#Page_100" title="" >Page 100</a>—changed locks to <b>lochs</b></p> +<p class="left"><a href="#Page_158" title="" >Page 158</a>—changed appartus to <b>apparatus</b></p> +<p class="left"><a href="#Page_175" title="" >Page 175</a>—changed househeeper to <b>housekeeper</b></p> +<p class="left"><a href="#Page_186" title="" >Page 186</a>—changed discomforture to <b>discomfiture</b></p> + +<div style='text-align:center'>*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 77259 ***</div> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/77259-h/images/cover.jpg b/77259-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a5915b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/77259-h/images/cover.jpg diff --git a/77259-h/images/i_023a.jpg b/77259-h/images/i_023a.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..0f05643 --- /dev/null +++ b/77259-h/images/i_023a.jpg diff --git a/77259-h/images/i_097a.jpg b/77259-h/images/i_097a.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..0640f7d --- /dev/null +++ b/77259-h/images/i_097a.jpg diff --git a/77259-h/images/i_127a.jpg b/77259-h/images/i_127a.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..0dd95bf --- /dev/null +++ b/77259-h/images/i_127a.jpg diff --git a/77259-h/images/i_195a.jpg b/77259-h/images/i_195a.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..cfabc88 --- /dev/null +++ b/77259-h/images/i_195a.jpg diff --git a/77259-h/images/i_225a.jpg b/77259-h/images/i_225a.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..2d183ed --- /dev/null +++ b/77259-h/images/i_225a.jpg diff --git a/77259-h/images/i_frontis.jpg b/77259-h/images/i_frontis.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..62f06cd --- /dev/null +++ b/77259-h/images/i_frontis.jpg diff --git a/77259-h/images/i_title.jpg b/77259-h/images/i_title.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..f652d43 --- /dev/null +++ b/77259-h/images/i_title.jpg diff --git a/77259-h/images/small.jpg b/77259-h/images/small.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..017c5b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/77259-h/images/small.jpg diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6c72794 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This book, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0d3bab0 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for eBook #77259 +(https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/77259) |
